2016 – 2017 STUDENT HANDBOOK Version 2...Lesson Page Number Lesson Page Number PR #1 S1 Alg. 2.5...

431
Mathematics Course for High School Seniors 2016 – 2017 STUDENT HANDBOOK Version 2.0

Transcript of 2016 – 2017 STUDENT HANDBOOK Version 2...Lesson Page Number Lesson Page Number PR #1 S1 Alg. 2.5...

Page 1: 2016 – 2017 STUDENT HANDBOOK Version 2...Lesson Page Number Lesson Page Number PR #1 S1 Alg. 2.5 S189 PR 1.1 S5 Alg. 3.1 S206 PR 2.1 S16 Alg. 3.2 S215 PR 2.2 S21 Alg. 3.3 S220 PR

Mathematics Course for High School Seniors 2016 – 2017

STUDENT HANDBOOK

Version 2.0

Page 2: 2016 – 2017 STUDENT HANDBOOK Version 2...Lesson Page Number Lesson Page Number PR #1 S1 Alg. 2.5 S189 PR 1.1 S5 Alg. 3.1 S206 PR 2.1 S16 Alg. 3.2 S215 PR 2.2 S21 Alg. 3.3 S220 PR

Table of Contents

Student Handbook – Version 2.0 Lesson Page Number Lesson Page Number

PR #1 S1 Alg. 2.5 S189

PR 1.1 S5 Alg. 3.1 S206

PR 2.1 S16 Alg. 3.2 S215

PR 2.2 S21 Alg. 3.3 S220

PR 2.3 S24 Alg. 3.4 S228

PR 3.1 S31 Alg. 3.5 S234

PR 3.2 S36 Alg. 3.6 S241

PR 3.3 S38 Alg. 3.7 S256

PR 3.4 S40 Alg. 3.8 S271

PR 3.5 S52 Alg. 3.9 S295

PR 3.6 S54 Alg. 4.0 S305

PR 3.7 S57 Alg. 4.1 S307

PR 3.8 S77 Alg. 4.2 S312

PR 4.1 S78 Alg. 4.3 S317

PR 4.2 S84 Alg. 4.4 S329

PR 4.3 S85 Alg. 4.5 S345

Alg. 1.1 S127 Alg. 4.6 S358

Alg. 1.2 S135 Alg. 4.7 S378

Alg. 2.0 S147 Alg. 4.8 S393

Alg. 2.1 S152 Alg. 4.9 S404

Alg. 2.2 S160 MTE Lesson 1 S556

Alg. 2.3 S163 MTE Lesson 2 S575

Alg. 2.4 S171 MTE Lesson 3 S593

Page 3: 2016 – 2017 STUDENT HANDBOOK Version 2...Lesson Page Number Lesson Page Number PR #1 S1 Alg. 2.5 S189 PR 1.1 S5 Alg. 3.1 S206 PR 2.1 S16 Alg. 3.2 S215 PR 2.2 S21 Alg. 3.3 S220 PR

PROPORTIONAL REASONING

Page 4: 2016 – 2017 STUDENT HANDBOOK Version 2...Lesson Page Number Lesson Page Number PR #1 S1 Alg. 2.5 S189 PR 1.1 S5 Alg. 3.1 S206 PR 2.1 S16 Alg. 3.2 S215 PR 2.2 S21 Alg. 3.3 S220 PR
Page 5: 2016 – 2017 STUDENT HANDBOOK Version 2...Lesson Page Number Lesson Page Number PR #1 S1 Alg. 2.5 S189 PR 1.1 S5 Alg. 3.1 S206 PR 2.1 S16 Alg. 3.2 S215 PR 2.2 S21 Alg. 3.3 S220 PR

© 2015 CUNY Collaborative Programs Supported by the NYS Education Department S1

Non-Routine first LESSON

Sums of Consecutive Numbers Instructions

Individually, or in groups of two or three, work through the following math activity.

As you work, think about the strategies you use to solve the problem. Math Activity

7 + 8 = 15 2 + 3 + 4 = 9 4 + 5 + 6 + 7 = 22

The expressions above are examples of the sums of consecutive numbers. The number 15 is shown as the sum of two consecutive numbers. The number 9 is shown as the sum of three consecutive numbers. The number 22 is shown as the sum of four consecutive numbers. In this activity, you will explore how to make different numbers with sums of consecutive numbers.

1. (Handouts for exploring consecutive sums)

Page 6: 2016 – 2017 STUDENT HANDBOOK Version 2...Lesson Page Number Lesson Page Number PR #1 S1 Alg. 2.5 S189 PR 1.1 S5 Alg. 3.1 S206 PR 2.1 S16 Alg. 3.2 S215 PR 2.2 S21 Alg. 3.3 S220 PR

© 2015 CUNY Collaborative Programs Supported by the NYS Education Department S2

Non-Routine first LESSON

Problems to follow Table handouts 2. What patterns do you see in the chart? (You might look for numbers that can be made by a particular length of sum, or how many different-length sums can make particular numbers, or which numbers can’t be made by consecutive sums. Use your imagination!) 3. What predictions about sums of consecutive numbers can you make from these patterns? Write a rule if you can. How general is your rule? 4. If you haven’t already, look just at the numbers that can be made by a sum of three consecutive numbers. What patterns do you see in those numbers? How can you predict whether a number can be made by a sum of three consecutive numbers? Which consecutive numbers will add up to these numbers? 5. Now do the same thing for sums of five consecutive numbers. Can you predict which numbers can be made by such sums and what consecutive numbers will make them? 6. Make a prediction about sums of other odd numbers of consecutive numbers. Test your prediction for an example or two. Why does your prediction work?

Page 7: 2016 – 2017 STUDENT HANDBOOK Version 2...Lesson Page Number Lesson Page Number PR #1 S1 Alg. 2.5 S189 PR 1.1 S5 Alg. 3.1 S206 PR 2.1 S16 Alg. 3.2 S215 PR 2.2 S21 Alg. 3.3 S220 PR

© 2015 CUNY Collaborative Programs Supported by the NYS Education Department S3

Non-Routine first LESSON

7. Does this rule work for sums of an even number of consecutive numbers? Why or why not? If not, how might you modify the rule to make it work? 8. Now use your rule(s) to predict whether each of the following numbers can be made with two consecutive numbers, three consecutive numbers, four consecutive numbers, etc. Explain why you made the predictions you did. Then check them to see if they work. a. 45 b. 57 c. 62 d. 75 e. 80

Page 8: 2016 – 2017 STUDENT HANDBOOK Version 2...Lesson Page Number Lesson Page Number PR #1 S1 Alg. 2.5 S189 PR 1.1 S5 Alg. 3.1 S206 PR 2.1 S16 Alg. 3.2 S215 PR 2.2 S21 Alg. 3.3 S220 PR

© 2015 CUNY Collaborative Programs Supported by the NYS Education Department S5

DRAFT – DO NOT DUPLICATE

PR LESSON 1.1

Warm-Up: ONE WHAT?

A. The “unit” can mean different things. The principal said that there were exactly 4 full classes on the third floor and no other students. How many students are on the third floor? To answer this we need to know “What is a full class.” If I tell you that a full class is 31 students, what can you determine?

B. When mom cuts and serves us oranges, each person gets half an orange. She has 5 oranges so, how many people can she serve?

C. 35 grapes were enough to serve 5 kids at snack time. What was a single serving?

D. Let’s stick with the grapes for a minute. Below are enough grapes for one and a half snacks:

What is the number of grapes in one serving? What would be the total number of grapes needed to have enough for 5 servings?

Page 9: 2016 – 2017 STUDENT HANDBOOK Version 2...Lesson Page Number Lesson Page Number PR #1 S1 Alg. 2.5 S189 PR 1.1 S5 Alg. 3.1 S206 PR 2.1 S16 Alg. 3.2 S215 PR 2.2 S21 Alg. 3.3 S220 PR

© 2015 CUNY Collaborative Programs Supported by the NYS Education Department S6

DRAFT – DO NOT DUPLICATE

PR LESSON 1.1

Activity 1

1. Suppose that below are enough raisins for of one serving of raisins. We want to figure out what six full

servings would require.

a. If the picture of raisins above represents

of a serving, can you figure out what is?

b. If you know of a raisin serving size, can you determine a whole serving size?

c. Now that you know a whole serving size, how many raisins do you need for 6 servings? 10 servings? 52

servings?

2. Locate on the number line.

Page 10: 2016 – 2017 STUDENT HANDBOOK Version 2...Lesson Page Number Lesson Page Number PR #1 S1 Alg. 2.5 S189 PR 1.1 S5 Alg. 3.1 S206 PR 2.1 S16 Alg. 3.2 S215 PR 2.2 S21 Alg. 3.3 S220 PR

© 2015 CUNY Collaborative Programs Supported by the NYS Education Department S7

DRAFT – DO NOT DUPLICATE

PR LESSON 1.1

3. Locate on the number line.

4. Locate on the number line.

5. Locate on the number line.

6. Locate on the number line.

Page 11: 2016 – 2017 STUDENT HANDBOOK Version 2...Lesson Page Number Lesson Page Number PR #1 S1 Alg. 2.5 S189 PR 1.1 S5 Alg. 3.1 S206 PR 2.1 S16 Alg. 3.2 S215 PR 2.2 S21 Alg. 3.3 S220 PR

© 2015 CUNY Collaborative Programs Supported by the NYS Education Department S8

DRAFT – DO NOT DUPLICATE

PR LESSON 1.1

7. Suppose the picture below represents . We want to figure out how to represent . Will be fewer

or more circles?

a. If the picture above represents , then can you figure out ?

b. If you know , can you figure out 1 (a whole)?

c. If you know 1, can you represent ?

Page 12: 2016 – 2017 STUDENT HANDBOOK Version 2...Lesson Page Number Lesson Page Number PR #1 S1 Alg. 2.5 S189 PR 1.1 S5 Alg. 3.1 S206 PR 2.1 S16 Alg. 3.2 S215 PR 2.2 S21 Alg. 3.3 S220 PR

© 2015 CUNY Collaborative Programs Supported by the NYS Education Department S9

DRAFT – DO NOT DUPLICATE

PR LESSON 1.1

Activity 2

8. Suppose the picture below represents .

a. If the picture above represents , what would be 1? (Is there a question you ask yourself to figure

this out?)

b. How would you represent ?

9. Analyze your friend’s response to the problem below. Is it correct?

BJ and Reece bought a deck of baseball cards. BJ took 3/8 of the deck and Reece took 5/8 of the deck. BJ took home 15 cards. How many cards were there in the deck?

Page 13: 2016 – 2017 STUDENT HANDBOOK Version 2...Lesson Page Number Lesson Page Number PR #1 S1 Alg. 2.5 S189 PR 1.1 S5 Alg. 3.1 S206 PR 2.1 S16 Alg. 3.2 S215 PR 2.2 S21 Alg. 3.3 S220 PR

© 2015 CUNY Collaborative Programs Supported by the NYS Education Department S10

DRAFT – DO NOT DUPLICATE

PR LESSON 1.1

10. Imagine a single unit is represented as follows: . What is represented by the shaded

region ?

11. If the unit is , what would the shaded region represent?

12. In each case draw a picture of one unit. One method is to find a useful unit fraction to help you.

a. b. c. d.

Page 14: 2016 – 2017 STUDENT HANDBOOK Version 2...Lesson Page Number Lesson Page Number PR #1 S1 Alg. 2.5 S189 PR 1.1 S5 Alg. 3.1 S206 PR 2.1 S16 Alg. 3.2 S215 PR 2.2 S21 Alg. 3.3 S220 PR

© 2015 CUNY Collaborative Programs Supported by the NYS Education Department S11

DRAFT – DO NOT DUPLICATE

PR LESSON 1.1

13. Ruth’s diet allows her to eat pound of turkey or chicken breast, fresh fruit, and fresh vegetables. She

ordered pound of turkey breast at the delicatessen. The sales person sliced 3 uniform slices, weighed

them, and said, “this is of a pound.” What part of the order could Ruth eat and stay on her diet?

14. Answer the questions below: Describe how you can see each quantity named. a. fourths b. eighths c. thirty-seconds d. sixteenths e. sixty-fourths

a. b. c. d. e.

Page 15: 2016 – 2017 STUDENT HANDBOOK Version 2...Lesson Page Number Lesson Page Number PR #1 S1 Alg. 2.5 S189 PR 1.1 S5 Alg. 3.1 S206 PR 2.1 S16 Alg. 3.2 S215 PR 2.2 S21 Alg. 3.3 S220 PR

© 2015 CUNY Collaborative Programs Supported by the NYS Education Department S12

DRAFT – DO NOT DUPLICATE

PR LESSON 1.1

Exit Ticket

Sixteen liters of water fill my fish tank to of its capacity. How many liters does it take to fill the tank?

Page 16: 2016 – 2017 STUDENT HANDBOOK Version 2...Lesson Page Number Lesson Page Number PR #1 S1 Alg. 2.5 S189 PR 1.1 S5 Alg. 3.1 S206 PR 2.1 S16 Alg. 3.2 S215 PR 2.2 S21 Alg. 3.3 S220 PR

PR LESSON 2.1

© 2015 CUNY Collaborative Programs Supported by the NYS Education Department S16

DRAFT – DO NOT DUPLICATE

Activity 1

1. Two quantities are given in each example. Using arrows and words, show how the quantities change together or write NR when the quantities are not related (Lamon). Example: People working on a project, time to complete the project Think: With fewer people working on the project, it will take more time to complete the project so people ↓, time ↑. With more people working, the project can be completed in a shorter time, so people ↑, time ↓.

a. Unit cost, total cost b. Size of a gas tank, cost to fill your tank c. Distance in feet, distance in meters d. Diameter of your tires, gas consumption on a given trip e. Side length of a square, area of a square f. Percentage of discount, discount in dollars g. Price paid for an item, sales tax h. Population of a town, time in years i. Number of hours you drive, average speed over your trip j. Number of office colleagues who buy a lottery ticket, share of the winnings k. Number of work days in a month, number of vacation days in a month l. Price of a candy bar, number of candy bars you can afford to buy

Page 17: 2016 – 2017 STUDENT HANDBOOK Version 2...Lesson Page Number Lesson Page Number PR #1 S1 Alg. 2.5 S189 PR 1.1 S5 Alg. 3.1 S206 PR 2.1 S16 Alg. 3.2 S215 PR 2.2 S21 Alg. 3.3 S220 PR

PR LESSON 2.1

© 2015 CUNY Collaborative Programs Supported by the NYS Education Department S17

DRAFT – DO NOT DUPLICATE

2. Use arrow notation to show the direction of change (↑, ↓, or =) for two related quantities. Then fill in the blank. If this is impossible, tell why (Lamon).

a. 8 people clean a house in 2 hours; 2 people clean that house in ___ hours. b. It costs $30 to play 15 games; 3 games will cost ___. c. It takes 4 hours to play 1 game of golf; 3 games will take ___ hours. d. John is 10 years old and his mother is 3 times as old as John; Ben is 12 years old, and his mother is

___ years old. e. I pay 6% sales tax when I purchase 1 item; I will pay ___ % tax when I purchase 5 items. f. Three people eat their dinner in 30 minutes; it will take 9 people ___ minutes. g. 2 people deliver all the papers on a certain route in 30 minutes; 6 people do the route in ___

minutes.

3. Carter and Rico like to ride their bikes on the trails in town. Today, they both started riding at the beginning of the trail; each rode continuously at a constant speed, making no stops, to the end of the trail. Rico took longer than Carter to reach the end of the path.

Which boy was biking faster? How do you know?

What are the assumptions? What are the variables?

Page 18: 2016 – 2017 STUDENT HANDBOOK Version 2...Lesson Page Number Lesson Page Number PR #1 S1 Alg. 2.5 S189 PR 1.1 S5 Alg. 3.1 S206 PR 2.1 S16 Alg. 3.2 S215 PR 2.2 S21 Alg. 3.3 S220 PR

PR LESSON 2.1

© 2015 CUNY Collaborative Programs Supported by the NYS Education Department S18

DRAFT – DO NOT DUPLICATE

4. Two pitchers of juice are on the table. Pitcher B contains weaker juice than pitcher A. Add one teaspoon of instant juice crystals to pitcher A and one cup of water to pitcher B.

Which pitcher will contain the stronger juice? Why?

5. Jenson drives 100km in 2 hours and has 60km to go. Do you think Jenson will drive the other 60km in more or less than 2 hours? Justify your answer.

6. Greg and Ross hammered a line of nails into different boards from one end to the other. Ross hammered more nails than Greg. Ross’ board was shorter than Greg’s. On which board are the nails closer together? Why?

(Source: Non‐Numeric Problems that Encourage Proportional Thinking: http://www.edugains.ca/resources/LearningMaterials/ContinuumConnection/BigIdeasQuestioning_ProportionalReasoning.pdf )

Page 19: 2016 – 2017 STUDENT HANDBOOK Version 2...Lesson Page Number Lesson Page Number PR #1 S1 Alg. 2.5 S189 PR 1.1 S5 Alg. 3.1 S206 PR 2.1 S16 Alg. 3.2 S215 PR 2.2 S21 Alg. 3.3 S220 PR

© 2016 CUNY Collaborative Programs Supported by the NYS Education Department S21

DRAFT – DO NOT DUPLICATE

PR LESSON 2.2

Activity 1: String Bean and Slim Task1

Jo has two snakes, String Bean and Slim. Right now, String Bean is 3 feet long and Slim is 10 feet long. Jo knows that two years from now, String Bean will be about 8 feet long, while Slim’s length will be about 15 feet. Over the next two year, will both snakes grow the same amount? Explain and justify your response.

1 University of Pittsburgh. (2010). Retrieved from http://schools.nyc.gov/NR/rdonlyres/A9F735CB-47E4-40F8-884F-EA54D0AB5705/0/NYCDOEG6MathRatios_Final.pdf

PR LESSON 2.2

Page 20: 2016 – 2017 STUDENT HANDBOOK Version 2...Lesson Page Number Lesson Page Number PR #1 S1 Alg. 2.5 S189 PR 1.1 S5 Alg. 3.1 S206 PR 2.1 S16 Alg. 3.2 S215 PR 2.2 S21 Alg. 3.3 S220 PR
Page 21: 2016 – 2017 STUDENT HANDBOOK Version 2...Lesson Page Number Lesson Page Number PR #1 S1 Alg. 2.5 S189 PR 1.1 S5 Alg. 3.1 S206 PR 2.1 S16 Alg. 3.2 S215 PR 2.2 S21 Alg. 3.3 S220 PR

PR LESSON 2.3

© 2016 CUNY Collaborative Programs Supported by the NYS Education Department S26

DRAFT – DO NOT DUPLICATE

Activity 1 In these cards there are descriptions of fizzy orange mixtures. Your task is to put the cards in order of strength, from the least orangey (top) to most orangey (bottom). If you think more than one card describes the same fizzy orange mixture, group them together.

Page 22: 2016 – 2017 STUDENT HANDBOOK Version 2...Lesson Page Number Lesson Page Number PR #1 S1 Alg. 2.5 S189 PR 1.1 S5 Alg. 3.1 S206 PR 2.1 S16 Alg. 3.2 S215 PR 2.2 S21 Alg. 3.3 S220 PR
Page 23: 2016 – 2017 STUDENT HANDBOOK Version 2...Lesson Page Number Lesson Page Number PR #1 S1 Alg. 2.5 S189 PR 1.1 S5 Alg. 3.1 S206 PR 2.1 S16 Alg. 3.2 S215 PR 2.2 S21 Alg. 3.3 S220 PR

PR LESSON 3.1

© 2016 CUNY Collaborative Programs Supported by the NYS Education Department S32

DRAFT – DO NOT DUPLICATE

Activity 1: Walk-a-thon

1. The Walk-a-thon Juliana participated in a walk-a-thon to raise money for cancer research. She recorded the total

distance she walked at several different points in time, but a few of the entries got smudged and can no longer be read. The times and distances that can still be read are listed in the table below.

Time in hours Miles walked

1

2 6

12

5

a. Assume Juliana walked at a constant speed. Complete the table.

b. How fast was Juliana walking in miles per hour? How long did it take Juliana to walk one mile?

c. Next year Juliana is planning to walk for seven hours. If she walks at the same speed next year,

how many miles will she walk?

2. Gianna’s pay Use a table to record steps in your work.

Gianna is paid $90 for 5 hours of work. a. At this rate, how much would Gianna make for 8 hours of work? b. At this rate, how long would Gianna have to work to make $60?

Page 24: 2016 – 2017 STUDENT HANDBOOK Version 2...Lesson Page Number Lesson Page Number PR #1 S1 Alg. 2.5 S189 PR 1.1 S5 Alg. 3.1 S206 PR 2.1 S16 Alg. 3.2 S215 PR 2.2 S21 Alg. 3.3 S220 PR

PR LESSON 3.1

© 2016 CUNY Collaborative Programs Supported by the NYS Education Department S33

DRAFT – DO NOT DUPLICATE

Activity 2: Ice cream by the pound

Ahmed’s Ice Cream Shop sells ice cream by weight. They charge $2.50 per quarter pound. 1. Suppose your serving weighs one-third of a pound. How much will it cost?

2. You plan on buying ice cream for you and your date. You estimate buying half of a pound. How much will it cost?

3. You learn that your date loves ice cream and orders half a pound all to themselves. You order your

usual one-third of a pound. How much will it cost? How much total ice cream did you buy?

4. Your teacher is collecting student deposits for the Thanksgiving ice cream party. She estimates that she will need about 1/3 of a pound per student and there are 30 students. She’s trying to decide between Häagen-Dazs, Ben & Jerry’s, and Ahmed’s Ice Cream. What should she do to determine the costs for each choice? (You’ll need some additional research or estimates for this. Let us know if you have any ice cream pricing expertise.) State the cost of a serving, the cost per pound, and the cost for a class order.

Page 25: 2016 – 2017 STUDENT HANDBOOK Version 2...Lesson Page Number Lesson Page Number PR #1 S1 Alg. 2.5 S189 PR 1.1 S5 Alg. 3.1 S206 PR 2.1 S16 Alg. 3.2 S215 PR 2.2 S21 Alg. 3.3 S220 PR

PR LESSON 3.1

© 2016 CUNY Collaborative Programs Supported by the NYS Education Department S34

DRAFT – DO NOT DUPLICATE

5. On Fridays Ahmed advertises buy one pound and get the second pound for 50% off.

a. Recalculate the cost of Ahmed’s ice cream for the class party. State the cost of a serving, the cost per pound, and the cost for a class order.

b. With the discount the class president argues that they should order half a pound per person. Determine the new class cost.

6. Gretchen the city health czar learned about the ice cream party and has reminded the principal of the

quarter pound ice cream limit per student. (The per student order can only be increased when the event is linked to an exercise event.) Determine the new costs.

Page 26: 2016 – 2017 STUDENT HANDBOOK Version 2...Lesson Page Number Lesson Page Number PR #1 S1 Alg. 2.5 S189 PR 1.1 S5 Alg. 3.1 S206 PR 2.1 S16 Alg. 3.2 S215 PR 2.2 S21 Alg. 3.3 S220 PR

PR LESSON 3.1

© 2016 CUNY Collaborative Programs Supported by the NYS Education Department S35

DRAFT – DO NOT DUPLICATE

Exit Ticket

A sale is advertising 3 bottles of Shampoo for $9. The store only has 8 bottles remaining. If the store keeps the sale price for all shampoo, how much should all 8 bottles cost? Create a table to show finding your answer.

Page 27: 2016 – 2017 STUDENT HANDBOOK Version 2...Lesson Page Number Lesson Page Number PR #1 S1 Alg. 2.5 S189 PR 1.1 S5 Alg. 3.1 S206 PR 2.1 S16 Alg. 3.2 S215 PR 2.2 S21 Alg. 3.3 S220 PR

PR LESSON 3.2

© 2016 CUNY Collaborative Programs Supported by the NYS Education Department S36

DRAFT – DO NOT DUPLICATE

Activity 1: Worms Task

Worms

Use number lines to answer the following question:

Andy Worm travels 6cm every 4 minutes.

Betty Worm travels 15cm every 10 minutes.

Are Andy and Betty traveling at the same rate? If not, who is traveling “faster”? Explain how you know!

Page 28: 2016 – 2017 STUDENT HANDBOOK Version 2...Lesson Page Number Lesson Page Number PR #1 S1 Alg. 2.5 S189 PR 1.1 S5 Alg. 3.1 S206 PR 2.1 S16 Alg. 3.2 S215 PR 2.2 S21 Alg. 3.3 S220 PR

PR LESSON 3.2

© 2016 CUNY Collaborative Programs Supported by the NYS Education Department S37

DRAFT – DO NOT DUPLICATE

Exit Ticket

Salty Slug is arguing with Sweet Snail claiming slugs can travel faster than snails. Salty’s argument is as follows:

Slugs move at a faster rate because they can travel 100cm. in 20 hours, and snails can travel only 24cm. in 4 hours.

Use a number line to illustrate if you agree or disagree with Salty Slug and justify your answer using a table of values.

Page 29: 2016 – 2017 STUDENT HANDBOOK Version 2...Lesson Page Number Lesson Page Number PR #1 S1 Alg. 2.5 S189 PR 1.1 S5 Alg. 3.1 S206 PR 2.1 S16 Alg. 3.2 S215 PR 2.2 S21 Alg. 3.3 S220 PR

© 2016 CUNY Collaborative Programs Supported by the NYS Education Department S38

DRAFT – DO NOT DUPLICATE

PR LESSON 3.3

Activity 1

1. You found the following recipe for Pad Thai to serve 4 people. You’re only cooking for 2 people and you don’t want any left overs. Determine how much you will need of each ingredient.

● 2 to 3 Tbsp. tamarind paste, to taste ● 6 Tbsp. fish sauce ● 2 Tbsp. soy sauce ● 1 to 2 tsp. chili sauce, OR 2/3 to 1 ½ tsp. cayenne pepper, to taste ● 6-8 Tbsp. palm sugar OR brown sugar ● 18 ounces of rice noodle

2. After cooking a scrumptious Pad Thai, you found that 10 of your friends want to try it. Determine how much of each ingredient you will need to make enough for 10.

Page 30: 2016 – 2017 STUDENT HANDBOOK Version 2...Lesson Page Number Lesson Page Number PR #1 S1 Alg. 2.5 S189 PR 1.1 S5 Alg. 3.1 S206 PR 2.1 S16 Alg. 3.2 S215 PR 2.2 S21 Alg. 3.3 S220 PR

© 2016 CUNY Collaborative Programs Supported by the NYS Education Department S39

DRAFT – DO NOT DUPLICATE

PR LESSON 3.3

Practice Set 1 Solve these problems using any method you like.

1. This ratio table shows the number of cans of paint needed to cover various lengths of fence

Cans of Paint

2 4 6 8 10 12

Feet of Fence

30 60 90 120 150 180

a. Find the number of cans needed to paint 75ft. of fence. b. Find the number of cans needed to paint 140ft. of fence.

2. The Holmes family has two adults and three children. The family uses an average of 1,400 gallons of water per week. Last month they had two houseguests who stayed for a week. Assuming that the water usage is proportional to the number of people in the house, about how much water did the household use during the guests’ visit?

Page 31: 2016 – 2017 STUDENT HANDBOOK Version 2...Lesson Page Number Lesson Page Number PR #1 S1 Alg. 2.5 S189 PR 1.1 S5 Alg. 3.1 S206 PR 2.1 S16 Alg. 3.2 S215 PR 2.2 S21 Alg. 3.3 S220 PR

PR LESSON 3.4

© 2016 CUNY Collaborative Programs Supported by the NYS Education Department S40

DRAFT – DO NOT DUPLICATE

Activity 1

Mixture A

Mixture B

Mixture C

A. Consider mixtures A, B, and C. Would they generate paint of the same color? If not, rank them from

lightest to darkest. B. Create a mixture that would have the exact same color as Mixture B. State the ratio of blue to white for

mixture B and the ratio of blue to white for your mixture. What is true of these two ratios? C. Jerry wants to create a mixture with nine pails that is the exact same color as mixture A. How many

white and how many blue pails will he need?

Page 32: 2016 – 2017 STUDENT HANDBOOK Version 2...Lesson Page Number Lesson Page Number PR #1 S1 Alg. 2.5 S189 PR 1.1 S5 Alg. 3.1 S206 PR 2.1 S16 Alg. 3.2 S215 PR 2.2 S21 Alg. 3.3 S220 PR

PR LESSON 3.4

© 2016 CUNY Collaborative Programs Supported by the NYS Education Department S44

DRAFT – DO NOT DUPLICATE

Activity 2

1. In the junior softball league, you keep records on players’ batting averages. To motivate young players, they create a fresh batting average for every game. Below is a table of six players’ hits and the number of times they were at bat.

Player Hits At Bat

Mike 4 11

Julian 10 15

Suraj 8 12

Lekha 10 18

Antonio 6 12

Maya 9 16

First section: No calculator

a. Who seems better Mike or Julian? Why? b. Who seems better Mike or Suraj? Why? c. Who seems better Suraj or Julian? d. Try to rank these players from lowest to highest batting average without using a calculator.

e. Jon has missed a few practices because of a new job he started. He is pleading with the coach to

let him play in the next game even though he missed practice. He says, “Come on coach, let Mike pitch me five balls and I’ll show you that I’m better than Suraj.” How many would Jon have to hit to show that he is better than Suraj?

f. If Mike pitched five and Jon hit two, could it be true that Jon is better than Suraj?

Page 33: 2016 – 2017 STUDENT HANDBOOK Version 2...Lesson Page Number Lesson Page Number PR #1 S1 Alg. 2.5 S189 PR 1.1 S5 Alg. 3.1 S206 PR 2.1 S16 Alg. 3.2 S215 PR 2.2 S21 Alg. 3.3 S220 PR

PR LESSON 3.4

© 2016 CUNY Collaborative Programs Supported by the NYS Education Department S45

DRAFT – DO NOT DUPLICATE

g. Owen is Suraj’s twin brother and he plays on a different team. The two of them are identical in everything. They even maintain the same batting average! What are different possible “hits” and “at bats” for Owen?

(Please grab a calculator!) In each case, determine whether the pricing is proportional and explain why or why not. 1. The Green Grocery sells tomato sauce in 6oz. cans for $0.49 and in 15oz. cans for $0.69. 2. The Town Market sells its store brand sugar in a 4 pound bag for $2.99, a 5 pound bag for $3.75, and a

10-pound bag for $11.74. 3. At the farmers' market, strawberries were priced at $2.98 for a pound, and $1.49 for 8 ounces. 4. I can buy 25 fabric softener sheets for $1.69, 50 sheets for $2.99, or 100 sheets for $5.98. 5. A certain breakfast buffet charges $0.89 for each year of a child's age, up to the age of 12. 6. Stop N Shop sells 12-can soft drink boxes for $3.29 each or a bundle of 3 boxes for $10.19.

Page 34: 2016 – 2017 STUDENT HANDBOOK Version 2...Lesson Page Number Lesson Page Number PR #1 S1 Alg. 2.5 S189 PR 1.1 S5 Alg. 3.1 S206 PR 2.1 S16 Alg. 3.2 S215 PR 2.2 S21 Alg. 3.3 S220 PR

PR LESSON 3.4

© 2016 CUNY Collaborative Programs Supported by the NYS Education Department S46

DRAFT – DO NOT DUPLICATE

Activity 3: Do the facts agree?1

1. “In 2012, 123 African-Americans were shot dead by police. There are currently more than 43 million blacks living in the U.S.A.,” O’Reilly said on his program. “Same year, 326 whites were killed by police bullets. Those are the latest stats available.”

a. What would the population of whites have to be for the two rates to be proportional? b. What is the US population of whites?

2. “Nicholas Kristof wrote this week (12/1/2014) that young black men are 21 times more likely to be shot and killed by police than young white men.” His source, ProPublica, stated, "The 1,217 deadly police shootings from 2010 to 2012 captured in the federal data show that blacks, age 15 to 19, were killed at a rate of 31.17 per million, while just 1.47 per million white males in that age range died at the hands of police."

a. How does Kristof come to his conclusion? b. James, a student in class, graphed the following two points: (31.2, 1000000), and (1.5, 1000000).

He then showed how he could draw a line between the two points and claimed that the rates were the same. Is he correct? Why or why not?

1 http://www.cnn.com/2014/12/02/politics/kristoff-oreilly-police-shooting-numbers-fact-check/

Page 35: 2016 – 2017 STUDENT HANDBOOK Version 2...Lesson Page Number Lesson Page Number PR #1 S1 Alg. 2.5 S189 PR 1.1 S5 Alg. 3.1 S206 PR 2.1 S16 Alg. 3.2 S215 PR 2.2 S21 Alg. 3.3 S220 PR

PR LESSON 3.4

© 2016 CUNY Collaborative Programs Supported by the NYS Education Department S47

DRAFT – DO NOT DUPLICATE

3. St. Louis County officers shot four times more African Americans than whites, even though African Americans make up only 25 percent of St. Louis County’s population. (http://www.kmov.com/special-coverage-001/Police-records-show-far-more-blacks-than-whites-shot-by-local-officers-280371252.html)

On the second bar represent the fraction or percent of African Americans shot among all individuals shot.

4. In 2011 there were 11,944 law enforcement agencies that employed 535,651 officers.

a. Law enforcement agencies reported that 54,774 officers were assaulted while performing their duties in 2011. What proportion of officers were assaulted?

b. Of all officers who were assaulted in 2011:

33.3 percent were responding to disturbance calls (family quarrels, bar fights, etc.).

12.6 percent of the officers assaulted were handling or transporting prisoners.

14.7 percent of the officers assaulted were attempting other arrests. How many police officers were assaulted responding to disturbance calls?

Page 36: 2016 – 2017 STUDENT HANDBOOK Version 2...Lesson Page Number Lesson Page Number PR #1 S1 Alg. 2.5 S189 PR 1.1 S5 Alg. 3.1 S206 PR 2.1 S16 Alg. 3.2 S215 PR 2.2 S21 Alg. 3.3 S220 PR

PR LESSON 3.4

© 2016 CUNY Collaborative Programs Supported by the NYS Education Department S48

DRAFT – DO NOT DUPLICATE

5. a. Why is $26,000 per year proportional to $500 per week? What are the equivalent fractions? What is done to determine the weekly rate?

b. In 2011 the average annual pension for police serving 35 years or more was $97,793. Determine the rate of pension per month, per week and per day.

Page 37: 2016 – 2017 STUDENT HANDBOOK Version 2...Lesson Page Number Lesson Page Number PR #1 S1 Alg. 2.5 S189 PR 1.1 S5 Alg. 3.1 S206 PR 2.1 S16 Alg. 3.2 S215 PR 2.2 S21 Alg. 3.3 S220 PR

PR LESSON 3.4

© 2016 CUNY Collaborative Programs Supported by the NYS Education Department S49

DRAFT – DO NOT DUPLICATE

Problem Set 2

1. Consider these triangles.

a. Are the side lengths of Triangle ABC proportional to those of Triangle XYZ? Explain how you know.

b. Are the triangles similar? Explain.

2. For each rectangle, find the ratio of the length to the width. Is the relationship between the lengths and widths of these rectangles proportional? Explain

Page 38: 2016 – 2017 STUDENT HANDBOOK Version 2...Lesson Page Number Lesson Page Number PR #1 S1 Alg. 2.5 S189 PR 1.1 S5 Alg. 3.1 S206 PR 2.1 S16 Alg. 3.2 S215 PR 2.2 S21 Alg. 3.3 S220 PR

PR LESSON 3.4

© 2016 CUNY Collaborative Programs Supported by the NYS Education Department S50

DRAFT – DO NOT DUPLICATE

3. On the cards below, the top numbers are proportional to the bottom numbers. Find another card that belongs in this set. Explain how you know your card belongs. 1 1.5 2 2.5 2 3 4 5

4. Chris created this tile pattern:

a. Describe how the pattern of white and colored tiles changes from one stage to the next b. For the stages shown, is the number of white tiles proportional to the number of purple tiles?

Explain c. Starting with Stage 1 above, draw the next two stages for a tile pattern in which the number of

white tiles is proportional to the number of purple tiles.

Page 39: 2016 – 2017 STUDENT HANDBOOK Version 2...Lesson Page Number Lesson Page Number PR #1 S1 Alg. 2.5 S189 PR 1.1 S5 Alg. 3.1 S206 PR 2.1 S16 Alg. 3.2 S215 PR 2.2 S21 Alg. 3.3 S220 PR

PR LESSON 3.4

© 2016 CUNY Collaborative Programs Supported by the NYS Education Department S51

DRAFT – DO NOT DUPLICATE

Exit Ticket

“Mixing Drinks (source: map.mathshell.org) When Sam and his friends get together, Sam makes a fizzy orange drink by mixing orange juice with soda. On Friday, Sam makes 7 liters of fizzy orange by mixing 3 liters of orange juice with 4 liters of soda. On Saturday, Sam makes 9 liters of fizzy orange by mixing 4 liters of orange juice with 5 liters of soda.

1. Does the fizzy orange on Saturday taste the same as Friday’s fizzy orange, or different?

If you think it tastes the same, explain how you can tell. If you think it tastes different, does it taste more or less orangey? Explain how you know.

2. On Sunday, Sam wants to make 5 liters of fizzy orange that tastes slightly less orangey than Friday’s

and Saturday’s fizzy orange drink. For every liter of orange, how many liters of soda should be added to the mixture? Explain your reasoning.

Page 40: 2016 – 2017 STUDENT HANDBOOK Version 2...Lesson Page Number Lesson Page Number PR #1 S1 Alg. 2.5 S189 PR 1.1 S5 Alg. 3.1 S206 PR 2.1 S16 Alg. 3.2 S215 PR 2.2 S21 Alg. 3.3 S220 PR

© 2015 CUNY Collaborative Programs Supported by the NYS Education Department S52

DRAFT – DO NOT DUPLICATE

PR LESSON 3.5

Problem Set 1

1. Abby is inviting friends over for brunch. Best West Bagels charges $4.50 for three bagels and Connie’s Bagel House charges $6.75 for half a dozen bagels. At which store will Abby get more for her money? Explain.

2. Jon is bringing muffins to the brunch. The East Village Bakery advertises “Two muffins for $2.99.” Mollie’s Muffins charges $15 per dozen. Where will Jon get a better deal? Explain.

Page 41: 2016 – 2017 STUDENT HANDBOOK Version 2...Lesson Page Number Lesson Page Number PR #1 S1 Alg. 2.5 S189 PR 1.1 S5 Alg. 3.1 S206 PR 2.1 S16 Alg. 3.2 S215 PR 2.2 S21 Alg. 3.3 S220 PR

© 2015 CUNY Collaborative Programs Supported by the NYS Education Department S53

DRAFT – DO NOT DUPLICATE

PR LESSON 3.5

Problem Set 2

1. Yudelca has a long distance phone plan that charges higher rates for calls outside of the continental US. On her bill she notices that a 17-minute call to Mexico cost $7.14. A 25-minute call to Toronto cost $8.00. How would you compare these rates? Explain.

2. The West Corner Deli charges $3.52 for four mangoes while Mario’s Supermarket charges $5.52 for six mangoes. Which store offers the better price for mangoes? Explain your answer.

3. Go back and solve problems 1 and 2 by an alternative method. Compare the method you used initially with your alternative method. (Why might one method be better for a problem? Would it always be the better method? Would your preference be different without a calculator?).

4. Julio and Marco are arguing over whether or not the price for a dozen eggs is a unit rate. What do you think and why?

Page 42: 2016 – 2017 STUDENT HANDBOOK Version 2...Lesson Page Number Lesson Page Number PR #1 S1 Alg. 2.5 S189 PR 1.1 S5 Alg. 3.1 S206 PR 2.1 S16 Alg. 3.2 S215 PR 2.2 S21 Alg. 3.3 S220 PR

© 2016 CUNY Collaborative Programs Supported by the NYS Education Department S54

DRAFT – DO NOT DUPLICATE

PR LESSON 3.6

Activity 1

Jefferson High School has 600 students, and Memorial High School has 450 students. For each of these problems, use this percent diagram to estimate an answer.

0%

25%

50%

75%

100%

0

200

400

600

0

150

300

450

MemorialJefferson

1. A survey of the two schools finds that 300 Jefferson students watch more than 1 hour of television

every night, while 270 Memorial students watch more than 1 hour per night.

a. What percentage of Jefferson students watch more than 1 hour of TV each night? b. What percentage of Memorial students watch more than 1 hour of TV each night? c. Comparing percentages, do more Jefferson students or more Memorial students watch more than 1 hour of TV each night?

2. Jefferson has 275 girls and Memorial has 350 girls. Which school has a greater percentage of girls?

Explain.

Page 43: 2016 – 2017 STUDENT HANDBOOK Version 2...Lesson Page Number Lesson Page Number PR #1 S1 Alg. 2.5 S189 PR 1.1 S5 Alg. 3.1 S206 PR 2.1 S16 Alg. 3.2 S215 PR 2.2 S21 Alg. 3.3 S220 PR

© 2016 CUNY Collaborative Programs Supported by the NYS Education Department S55

DRAFT – DO NOT DUPLICATE

PR LESSON 3.6

3. At each school, 75% of the students play a musical instrument.

a. About how many students at Jefferson play a musical instrument? b. About how many students at Memorial play a musical instrument?

4. Here are two statements about Jefferson and Memorial schools:

A. Jefferson has 275 girls and Memorial has 250 girls, so there are more girls at Jefferson. B. Jefferson is almost 46% girls and Memorial is almost 56% girls, so there are more girls at Memorial.

Which statement uses a common scale to make a comparison?

Which statement do you think is a better answer to the question, “Which school has more girls?” Explain your thinking.

Page 44: 2016 – 2017 STUDENT HANDBOOK Version 2...Lesson Page Number Lesson Page Number PR #1 S1 Alg. 2.5 S189 PR 1.1 S5 Alg. 3.1 S206 PR 2.1 S16 Alg. 3.2 S215 PR 2.2 S21 Alg. 3.3 S220 PR

© 2016 CUNY Collaborative Programs Supported by the NYS Education Department S56

DRAFT – DO NOT DUPLICATE

PR LESSON 3.6

Exit Ticket

Michaela was making $8 per hour and just received a 50 cent raise. Annie was making $960 per month and received a raise of $40 per month. They are trying to decide who got the better deal. What can you determine and why?

Page 45: 2016 – 2017 STUDENT HANDBOOK Version 2...Lesson Page Number Lesson Page Number PR #1 S1 Alg. 2.5 S189 PR 1.1 S5 Alg. 3.1 S206 PR 2.1 S16 Alg. 3.2 S215 PR 2.2 S21 Alg. 3.3 S220 PR

© 2016 CUNY Collaborative Programs Supported by the NYS Education Department S57

DRAFT – DO NOT DUPLICATE

PR LESSON 3.7

Warm-Up

One month Rob spent $8.02 on his phone. The next month he spent $6.00. To work out the average amount Rob spends over the two months, you could press the calculator keys:

( 8 . 0 2 + 6 ) ÷ 2 = 1. Tom usually earns $40.85 per hour.

He has just heard that he has had a 6% pay raise. He wants to work out his new pay on his calculator. It does not have a percent button. Which keys must he press on his calculator? Write down the keys in the correct order. (You do not have to do the calculation)

2. Maria sees a dress in a sale. The dress is normally priced at $56.99 The ticket says that there is 45% off She wants to use her calculator to work out how much the dress will cost. It does not have a percent button. Which key smust she press on her calculator? Write down the keys in the correct order. (You do not hav eto do the calculation)

3. Last Year, the price of an item was $350. This year it is $450. Lena wants to know what the percentage change is. Write down the calculation she will need to do to get the correct answer. (You do not hav eto do the calculation)

4. In a sale, the prices in a shope were all decreased by 20%

After the sale they were all increased by 25% What was the overall effect on the shop prices? Explain how you know.

Increasingand Decreasing Quantities by a Percent, © 2012 MARS. Shell Center. University of Nottingham

Page 46: 2016 – 2017 STUDENT HANDBOOK Version 2...Lesson Page Number Lesson Page Number PR #1 S1 Alg. 2.5 S189 PR 1.1 S5 Alg. 3.1 S206 PR 2.1 S16 Alg. 3.2 S215 PR 2.2 S21 Alg. 3.3 S220 PR
Page 47: 2016 – 2017 STUDENT HANDBOOK Version 2...Lesson Page Number Lesson Page Number PR #1 S1 Alg. 2.5 S189 PR 1.1 S5 Alg. 3.1 S206 PR 2.1 S16 Alg. 3.2 S215 PR 2.2 S21 Alg. 3.3 S220 PR

© 2016 CUNY Collaborative Programs Supported by the NYS Education Department S58

DRAFT – DO NOT DUPLICATE

PR LESSON 3.7

Page 48: 2016 – 2017 STUDENT HANDBOOK Version 2...Lesson Page Number Lesson Page Number PR #1 S1 Alg. 2.5 S189 PR 1.1 S5 Alg. 3.1 S206 PR 2.1 S16 Alg. 3.2 S215 PR 2.2 S21 Alg. 3.3 S220 PR
Page 49: 2016 – 2017 STUDENT HANDBOOK Version 2...Lesson Page Number Lesson Page Number PR #1 S1 Alg. 2.5 S189 PR 1.1 S5 Alg. 3.1 S206 PR 2.1 S16 Alg. 3.2 S215 PR 2.2 S21 Alg. 3.3 S220 PR

© 2016 CUNY Collaborative Programs Supported by the NYS Education Department S60

DRAFT – DO NOT DUPLICATE

PR LESSON 3.7

Page 50: 2016 – 2017 STUDENT HANDBOOK Version 2...Lesson Page Number Lesson Page Number PR #1 S1 Alg. 2.5 S189 PR 1.1 S5 Alg. 3.1 S206 PR 2.1 S16 Alg. 3.2 S215 PR 2.2 S21 Alg. 3.3 S220 PR
Page 51: 2016 – 2017 STUDENT HANDBOOK Version 2...Lesson Page Number Lesson Page Number PR #1 S1 Alg. 2.5 S189 PR 1.1 S5 Alg. 3.1 S206 PR 2.1 S16 Alg. 3.2 S215 PR 2.2 S21 Alg. 3.3 S220 PR

© 2016 CUNY Collaborative Programs Supported by the NYS Education Department S62

DRAFT – DO NOT DUPLICATE

PR LESSON 3.7

Page 52: 2016 – 2017 STUDENT HANDBOOK Version 2...Lesson Page Number Lesson Page Number PR #1 S1 Alg. 2.5 S189 PR 1.1 S5 Alg. 3.1 S206 PR 2.1 S16 Alg. 3.2 S215 PR 2.2 S21 Alg. 3.3 S220 PR
Page 53: 2016 – 2017 STUDENT HANDBOOK Version 2...Lesson Page Number Lesson Page Number PR #1 S1 Alg. 2.5 S189 PR 1.1 S5 Alg. 3.1 S206 PR 2.1 S16 Alg. 3.2 S215 PR 2.2 S21 Alg. 3.3 S220 PR

© 2016 CUNY Collaborative Programs Supported by the NYS Education Department S64

DRAFT – DO NOT DUPLICATE

PR LESSON 3.7

Page 54: 2016 – 2017 STUDENT HANDBOOK Version 2...Lesson Page Number Lesson Page Number PR #1 S1 Alg. 2.5 S189 PR 1.1 S5 Alg. 3.1 S206 PR 2.1 S16 Alg. 3.2 S215 PR 2.2 S21 Alg. 3.3 S220 PR
Page 55: 2016 – 2017 STUDENT HANDBOOK Version 2...Lesson Page Number Lesson Page Number PR #1 S1 Alg. 2.5 S189 PR 1.1 S5 Alg. 3.1 S206 PR 2.1 S16 Alg. 3.2 S215 PR 2.2 S21 Alg. 3.3 S220 PR

© 2016 CUNY Collaborative Programs Supported by the NYS Education Department S66

DRAFT – DO NOT DUPLICATE

PR LESSON 3.7

Page 56: 2016 – 2017 STUDENT HANDBOOK Version 2...Lesson Page Number Lesson Page Number PR #1 S1 Alg. 2.5 S189 PR 1.1 S5 Alg. 3.1 S206 PR 2.1 S16 Alg. 3.2 S215 PR 2.2 S21 Alg. 3.3 S220 PR
Page 57: 2016 – 2017 STUDENT HANDBOOK Version 2...Lesson Page Number Lesson Page Number PR #1 S1 Alg. 2.5 S189 PR 1.1 S5 Alg. 3.1 S206 PR 2.1 S16 Alg. 3.2 S215 PR 2.2 S21 Alg. 3.3 S220 PR

© 2016 CUNY Collaborative Programs Supported by the NYS Education Department S68

DRAFT – DO NOT DUPLICATE

PR LESSON 3.7

Page 58: 2016 – 2017 STUDENT HANDBOOK Version 2...Lesson Page Number Lesson Page Number PR #1 S1 Alg. 2.5 S189 PR 1.1 S5 Alg. 3.1 S206 PR 2.1 S16 Alg. 3.2 S215 PR 2.2 S21 Alg. 3.3 S220 PR
Page 59: 2016 – 2017 STUDENT HANDBOOK Version 2...Lesson Page Number Lesson Page Number PR #1 S1 Alg. 2.5 S189 PR 1.1 S5 Alg. 3.1 S206 PR 2.1 S16 Alg. 3.2 S215 PR 2.2 S21 Alg. 3.3 S220 PR

© 2016 CUNY Collaborative Programs Supported by the NYS Education Department S69

DRAFT – DO NOT DUPLICATE

PR LESSON 3.7

Warm-Up 2

Barry’s Bargain Basement Sale Everything’s a Bargain!

Steve’s Super Savings Store We won’t be undersold!

All items are marked with an arrival date. 1 month old, 10% off the original price! 2 months old, 20% off the original price! 3 months old, 30% off the original price! 4 months or older, 50% off the original price!

All items are marked with an arrival date. If it’s been here 1 month, take 10% off! If it’s been here 2 months, take another 20% off the already reduced price! If it’s been here 3 months or longer, take another 40% off the already reduced price!

Page 60: 2016 – 2017 STUDENT HANDBOOK Version 2...Lesson Page Number Lesson Page Number PR #1 S1 Alg. 2.5 S189 PR 1.1 S5 Alg. 3.1 S206 PR 2.1 S16 Alg. 3.2 S215 PR 2.2 S21 Alg. 3.3 S220 PR

© 2016 CUNY Collaborative Programs Supported by the NYS Education Department S70

DRAFT – DO NOT DUPLICATE

PR LESSON 3.7

Problem Set 1

1) Rebecca went to Barry’s Bargain Basement to buy a pair of jeans. The jeans had been in the store for 1 month. The original price was $40. a) What was the sale price? b) What percentage of the original price was the sale price?

2) Julie was a smart shopper. The pair of shoes she wanted had an original price of $50 at both Barry’s

and Steve’s. The shoes had been in both stores 2 months. a) How much would Julie pay for the shoes at Barry’s? At Steve’s? b) Explain why these sales prices are different.

Page 61: 2016 – 2017 STUDENT HANDBOOK Version 2...Lesson Page Number Lesson Page Number PR #1 S1 Alg. 2.5 S189 PR 1.1 S5 Alg. 3.1 S206 PR 2.1 S16 Alg. 3.2 S215 PR 2.2 S21 Alg. 3.3 S220 PR

© 2016 CUNY Collaborative Programs Supported by the NYS Education Department S71

DRAFT – DO NOT DUPLICATE

PR LESSON 3.7

3) Doug, a frequent shopper at Barry’s, has his eye on a hat with an original price of $20. a) The hat has been in the store for 1 month. How much will Doug save? b) Doug is considering waiting another month to get a better price. How much will he save after 2

months? c) Is the amount Doug would save with the 10% discount double the amount he would save with

the 20% discount? d) How can you easily determine how much Doug would save after 3 months?

4) Joy found a sweatshirt at Steve’s with an original price of $30.

a) If the sweatshirt has been in the store long enough to earn the 10% discount, how much will Joy save?

b) If the sweatshirt has been there long enough to earn the 20% discount, how much will she save

from the original price?

Page 62: 2016 – 2017 STUDENT HANDBOOK Version 2...Lesson Page Number Lesson Page Number PR #1 S1 Alg. 2.5 S189 PR 1.1 S5 Alg. 3.1 S206 PR 2.1 S16 Alg. 3.2 S215 PR 2.2 S21 Alg. 3.3 S220 PR

© 2016 CUNY Collaborative Programs Supported by the NYS Education Department S72

DRAFT – DO NOT DUPLICATE

PR LESSON 3.7

c) Is the dollar amount of the second discount twice the dollar amount of the first discount? Explain why or why not.

d) Joy calculated the final price this way: “First I take 10% off, and then I take 20% off, so all together I’m

taking 30% off. That’s $9, so the final price is $21.” Is Joy correct? Explain. e) If Joy buys the sweatshirt after it’s been in the store 2 months, what is the total percent discount from

the original price? Show how you found your answer. 5) An item originally marked at $100 is in both stores for more than 3 months. Where would you get the

better buy? Explain. 6) Is the ad for Steve’s—which claims they won’t be undersold—true when Steve’s prices are compared

with Barry’s prices? Explain.

Page 63: 2016 – 2017 STUDENT HANDBOOK Version 2...Lesson Page Number Lesson Page Number PR #1 S1 Alg. 2.5 S189 PR 1.1 S5 Alg. 3.1 S206 PR 2.1 S16 Alg. 3.2 S215 PR 2.2 S21 Alg. 3.3 S220 PR

© 2016 CUNY Collaborative Programs Supported by the NYS Education Department S73

DRAFT – DO NOT DUPLICATE

PR LESSON 3.7

7) Suppose you reduce an 8 inch by 10 inch picture by 90% and then increase the copy by 90%.

a) Will you get the same size picture you started with? Explain.

b) What is the percent change from the original size to the final size

Page 64: 2016 – 2017 STUDENT HANDBOOK Version 2...Lesson Page Number Lesson Page Number PR #1 S1 Alg. 2.5 S189 PR 1.1 S5 Alg. 3.1 S206 PR 2.1 S16 Alg. 3.2 S215 PR 2.2 S21 Alg. 3.3 S220 PR

© 2016 CUNY Collaborative Programs Supported by the NYS Education Department S74

DRAFT – DO NOT DUPLICATE

PR LESSON 3.7

Problem Set 2

In a recent election by a seventh grade class with 90 students, Jesse received 36 votes and Kiran received 54 votes.

*These problems are taken From Impact Mathematics, Course 2

1) Tell whether each of the following statements presents this information accurately. For each accurate statement, explain or give a calculation to show why it is accurate.

a) The ratio of the number of students who voted for Jesse to the number who voted for Kiran is

2:3. b) 40% of the voters preferred Jesse. c) Kiran received 20% more of the total vote than Jesse received. d) 50% more people voted for Kiran than for Jesse. e) 18 more people voted for Kiran than for Jesse. f) Kiran received 3/5 of the votes. g) The number of people who voted for Kiran is 1/5 times the number who voted for Jesse.

Page 65: 2016 – 2017 STUDENT HANDBOOK Version 2...Lesson Page Number Lesson Page Number PR #1 S1 Alg. 2.5 S189 PR 1.1 S5 Alg. 3.1 S206 PR 2.1 S16 Alg. 3.2 S215 PR 2.2 S21 Alg. 3.3 S220 PR

© 2016 CUNY Collaborative Programs Supported by the NYS Education Department S75

DRAFT – DO NOT DUPLICATE

PR LESSON 3.7

2) Which of the accurate statements in Problem 1 seems to give the best impression of the class’s preference for Kiran? Why?

3) Which of the accurate statements in Problem 1 seems to minimize the class’s preference for Kiran?

Explain. 4) Do some of the statements seem more informative than others? 5) Some ratios compare a part of some group to the whole group, like the number of students who voted

for Jesse, 36, compared to the total number of voters, 90. Such ratios are called part-to-whole ratios.

Other ratios compare a part of a group to another part of the same or a different group, like the number of students who voted for Jesse, 36, compared to the number who voted for Kiran, 54. These kinds of ratios are called part-to-part ratios.

a) Which statements in Problem 1 make part-to-whole comparisons?

b) Which statements in Problem 1 make part-to-part comparisons?

Page 66: 2016 – 2017 STUDENT HANDBOOK Version 2...Lesson Page Number Lesson Page Number PR #1 S1 Alg. 2.5 S189 PR 1.1 S5 Alg. 3.1 S206 PR 2.1 S16 Alg. 3.2 S215 PR 2.2 S21 Alg. 3.3 S220 PR

© 2016 CUNY Collaborative Programs Supported by the NYS Education Department S76

DRAFT – DO NOT DUPLICATE

PR LESSON 3.7

Exit Ticket

In a sale, the prices in a shop were all decreased by 20%. After the sale they were all increased by 25%. What was the overall effect on the shop prices? Explain how you know.

Page 67: 2016 – 2017 STUDENT HANDBOOK Version 2...Lesson Page Number Lesson Page Number PR #1 S1 Alg. 2.5 S189 PR 1.1 S5 Alg. 3.1 S206 PR 2.1 S16 Alg. 3.2 S215 PR 2.2 S21 Alg. 3.3 S220 PR

NRP LESSON: PR 3.8

Activity 1: Summer Jobs1

The headline reads, “Students Protest Lack of Summer Jobs.” The students at Gridville High, like many students across the country, are worried about summer jobs. The editor of Coordinate Opinions, the school newspaper, began writing an editorial on the deterioration of summer job opportunities, especially tor girls. When word of the editorial was leaked to the mayor, he demanded to be given air time on the local news broadcast. His response to the proposed editorial: “The editor of Coordinate Opinions should be removed from her job! Her allegations that the summer job situation for students has deteriorated is totally unfounded. More students have summer jobs today than when I was in high school. And as far as girls not having adequate opportunities in Gridville, more girls will be employed this summer than boys.” The school principal, in an attempt to appease the mayor, removed the school editor from her post. However, in a last-ditch effort to get the story out, the editor made copies of two data displays that she had planned to use in her article. The data displays in Figure I circulated throughout Gridville High.

Analyze the data to make the case for the dismissed editor. Feel free to use tables, ratios, fractions, decimals, percents, or any other data displays that will strengthen you argument.

S77

Page 68: 2016 – 2017 STUDENT HANDBOOK Version 2...Lesson Page Number Lesson Page Number PR #1 S1 Alg. 2.5 S189 PR 1.1 S5 Alg. 3.1 S206 PR 2.1 S16 Alg. 3.2 S215 PR 2.2 S21 Alg. 3.3 S220 PR

© 2016 CUNY Collaborative Programs Supported by the NYS Education Department S78

DRAFT – DO NOT DUPLICATE

PR LESSON 4.1

Warm- up1

Think and Discuss Many percent problems can be solved by setting up a proportion. For example, suppose you’re making a shade of light blue paint with 80% blue paint and the remainder white paint. If you want a total of 7 gallons of paint, how many gallons of blue are needed? You could set up the following proportion:

It can also be helpful to consider a percent diagram as below. What would be the proportion that would correspond with the percent diagram below?

1 Activities in this lesson are adapted from IMPACT Mathematics Course 2, McGraw-Hill.

Page 69: 2016 – 2017 STUDENT HANDBOOK Version 2...Lesson Page Number Lesson Page Number PR #1 S1 Alg. 2.5 S189 PR 1.1 S5 Alg. 3.1 S206 PR 2.1 S16 Alg. 3.2 S215 PR 2.2 S21 Alg. 3.3 S220 PR

© 2016 CUNY Collaborative Programs Supported by the NYS Education Department S79

DRAFT – DO NOT DUPLICATE

PR LESSON 4.1

Activity 1

1. Consider this question: What percent of 150 is 6?

a. Explain a method to figure this out. b. Draw a percent diagram to represent the question. c. Express the question as a proportion and solve it.

2. Now consider this question: What is 185% of 20?

a. Draw a percent diagram to represent the question. b. Express the question as a proportion and solve it.

Page 70: 2016 – 2017 STUDENT HANDBOOK Version 2...Lesson Page Number Lesson Page Number PR #1 S1 Alg. 2.5 S189 PR 1.1 S5 Alg. 3.1 S206 PR 2.1 S16 Alg. 3.2 S215 PR 2.2 S21 Alg. 3.3 S220 PR

© 2016 CUNY Collaborative Programs Supported by the NYS Education Department S80

DRAFT – DO NOT DUPLICATE

PR LESSON 4.1

3. A gardener planted 13% of his tulip bulbs in the border of his garden and the rest in the garden bed. In spring, every one of the bulbs grew into a tulip. He counted 45 tulips in the border. How many bulbs had he planted all together? Show how you found your answer.

4. Of 75 flights leaving from Hartsfield Airport in Atlanta, 33 went to the West Coast. What percentage of the 75 flights went to the West Coast? Show how you find your answer.

5. The largest land animal, the African bush elephant, may weigh as much as 8 tons. However, that is only about 3.9% of the weight of the largest animal of all, the blue whale. How heavy can a blue whale be? Show how you found your answer.

Page 71: 2016 – 2017 STUDENT HANDBOOK Version 2...Lesson Page Number Lesson Page Number PR #1 S1 Alg. 2.5 S189 PR 1.1 S5 Alg. 3.1 S206 PR 2.1 S16 Alg. 3.2 S215 PR 2.2 S21 Alg. 3.3 S220 PR

© 2016 CUNY Collaborative Programs Supported by the NYS Education Department S81

DRAFT – DO NOT DUPLICATE

PR LESSON 4.1

6. A In 1995, Americans spent about $403 billion on recreation, including books, toys, videos, sports, and amusement parks. They spent 186% of that amount on housing. How much money did Americans spend on housing in 1995?

7. In 1950, the estimated world population was 2.6 billion. In 2015 it was 7.3 billion. a. Describe the population in 2015 as a percentage of the 1950 population. b. Describe the 1950 population as a percentage of the 2015 population. c. In 2015, about 324 million people lived in the United States. What percentage of the world's

population lived in the United States in 2015?

8. Complete the following. a. Write a proportion that expresses this statement: 32% of 25 is b. Solve your proportion to find b. b. Write a proportion that expresses this statement: n% of a is b. Explain why this proportion is

useful for solving percent problems.

Page 72: 2016 – 2017 STUDENT HANDBOOK Version 2...Lesson Page Number Lesson Page Number PR #1 S1 Alg. 2.5 S189 PR 1.1 S5 Alg. 3.1 S206 PR 2.1 S16 Alg. 3.2 S215 PR 2.2 S21 Alg. 3.3 S220 PR

© 2016 CUNY Collaborative Programs Supported by the NYS Education Department S82

DRAFT – DO NOT DUPLICATE

PR LESSON 4.1

Activity 2

Zoe and Luis both had a resting pulse rate of 84 beats per minute. After jogging for a short period, they both had a pulse rate of 105 beats per minute. Consider the following statements from the two friends about how they each calculated the percent increase.

ZOE said:

105 is what percent of 84? I can solve this proportion:

So, n is 125. That means my active pulse rate is 125% of my resting pulse rate. That’s a 25% increase.

LUIS said:

The difference between the two numbers is 105 – 84 = 21. This difference is what percentage of my resting pulse rate?

So n is 25. That’s 25% and I Know it’s an increase because my active pulse rate was greater

from Impact Math Course 2 Questions:

1. Check to see if the two methods above give the same result.

2. Create a similar problem with slightly different numbers.

3. Will these two methods always give you the same answer? Explain how you know.

Page 73: 2016 – 2017 STUDENT HANDBOOK Version 2...Lesson Page Number Lesson Page Number PR #1 S1 Alg. 2.5 S189 PR 1.1 S5 Alg. 3.1 S206 PR 2.1 S16 Alg. 3.2 S215 PR 2.2 S21 Alg. 3.3 S220 PR

© 2016 CUNY Collaborative Programs Supported by the NYS Education Department S83

DRAFT – DO NOT DUPLICATE

PR LESSON 4.1

Exit Ticket

1. Increase 100 by 20%. Decrease your new result by 20%.

• Is the result the original number, 100? • Try this again with a different starting number. • Explain the result.

2. Use algebra to show what happens. Let A be you starting amount. Increase A by r percent. Now decrease your new result by r percent. By how much does your new result differ from the starting amount?

Page 74: 2016 – 2017 STUDENT HANDBOOK Version 2...Lesson Page Number Lesson Page Number PR #1 S1 Alg. 2.5 S189 PR 1.1 S5 Alg. 3.1 S206 PR 2.1 S16 Alg. 3.2 S215 PR 2.2 S21 Alg. 3.3 S220 PR

© 2016 CUNY Collaborative Programs Supported by the NYS Education Department S84

DRAFT – DO NOT DUPLICATE

Activity 2 Consider the following.

Kerry said that the Japanese Bullet Train takes about 6 minutes to travel 22.2km. Jerry said that at this rate, he could travel around the world at the equator in less than 8 days. Kerry disagrees – she thinks it will take longer.

[The diameter of Earth is approximately 12,740km.] • Who is correct? Justify your response.

PR LESSON 4.2

Page 75: 2016 – 2017 STUDENT HANDBOOK Version 2...Lesson Page Number Lesson Page Number PR #1 S1 Alg. 2.5 S189 PR 1.1 S5 Alg. 3.1 S206 PR 2.1 S16 Alg. 3.2 S215 PR 2.2 S21 Alg. 3.3 S220 PR

© 2016 CUNY Collaborative Programs Supported by the NYS Education Department S85

DRAFT – DO NOT DUPLICATE

PR LESSON 4.3

Mini-Lesson Starter Task

When the choir calendar sale began, Ms. Gomez bought the first 6 calendars. From his purchase alone, the choir raised $15.00. By the end of the first day of the sale, they had raised $67.50. How many calendars had been sold by the end of the first day?

Take a few moments to solve this by a method of your choice.

PR LESSON 4.3

Page 76: 2016 – 2017 STUDENT HANDBOOK Version 2...Lesson Page Number Lesson Page Number PR #1 S1 Alg. 2.5 S189 PR 1.1 S5 Alg. 3.1 S206 PR 2.1 S16 Alg. 3.2 S215 PR 2.2 S21 Alg. 3.3 S220 PR

© 2016 CUNY Collaborative Programs Supported by the NYS Education Department S86

DRAFT – DO NOT DUPLICATE

PR LESSON 4.3

Mini-Lesson (Part 2): Anna, Bob, Carla, and Darnell

Here are three different methods for solving the problem

Anna: I found out how much they would raise if they sold 1 calendar. Then I divided 67.50 by that amount. Unit rate = $15/6 = $2.50 per calendar $67.50/$2.50 = 27 Bob: They raised $15 for 6 calendars. I made a table and multiplied up to get 67.50 to something.

Dollars raised 15 30 60 7.50 67.50 Num. of Calendars 6 12 24 3 27

Carla: I wrote an equation. I knew the amount raised would be proportional to the number of calendars. I let n be the number of calendars and I wrote and then I solved this equation to find the answer.

Then Carla showed that her method was really simpler if she wrote her proportion in the following way.

Page 77: 2016 – 2017 STUDENT HANDBOOK Version 2...Lesson Page Number Lesson Page Number PR #1 S1 Alg. 2.5 S189 PR 1.1 S5 Alg. 3.1 S206 PR 2.1 S16 Alg. 3.2 S215 PR 2.2 S21 Alg. 3.3 S220 PR

© 2016 CUNY Collaborative Programs Supported by the NYS Education Department S87

DRAFT – DO NOT DUPLICATE

PR LESSON 4.3

After seeing Carla’s work Darnell said he preferred to solve those with the arrow method:

= 27

Before calling any of these methods better than the others, it is important to try the methods out on a few problems.

Page 78: 2016 – 2017 STUDENT HANDBOOK Version 2...Lesson Page Number Lesson Page Number PR #1 S1 Alg. 2.5 S189 PR 1.1 S5 Alg. 3.1 S206 PR 2.1 S16 Alg. 3.2 S215 PR 2.2 S21 Alg. 3.3 S220 PR

© 2016 CUNY Collaborative Programs Supported by the NYS Education Department S88

DRAFT – DO NOT DUPLICATE

PR LESSON 4.3

Problem Set 1 Recall the methods Anna (unit rate), Bob (table), and Carla/Darnell (A couple of algebraic methods) used. Solve the following problems using any method you like. Once you have completed the 8 problems, select 4 problems to solve by an alternative method. 1. Pierre went to the bank and exchanged 50 Canadian dollars for 32.28 U.S. dollars. Later that day

Monica went to the same bank to exchange 72 Canadian dollars for U.S. dollars. How many U.S. dollars did she receive? (Assume the exchange rate was the same throughout the day.) a. Set up two proportions you could use to solve this proportion. b. Solve one of your proportions. How much money in U.S. dollars did Monica receive?

2. This ratio table shows the number of cans of paint needed for painting various lengths of fence.

Cans of Paint

2 4 6 8 10 12

Feet of Fence

30 60 90 120 150 180

a. Find the number of cans needed to paint 75ft of fence. b. Find the number of cans needed to paint 140ft of fence.

Page 79: 2016 – 2017 STUDENT HANDBOOK Version 2...Lesson Page Number Lesson Page Number PR #1 S1 Alg. 2.5 S189 PR 1.1 S5 Alg. 3.1 S206 PR 2.1 S16 Alg. 3.2 S215 PR 2.2 S21 Alg. 3.3 S220 PR

© 2016 CUNY Collaborative Programs Supported by the NYS Education Department S89

DRAFT – DO NOT DUPLICATE

PR LESSON 4.3

3. The Holmes family has two adults and three children. The family uses an average of 1,400 gallons of

water per week. Last month they had two houseguests who stayed for a week. Assuming that the water usage is proportional to the number of people in the house, about how much water did the household use during the guests' visit?

4. Paul is using a trail map to plan a hiking trip. The scale indicates that ½ inch on the map represents

1½ miles. Paul chooses a trail that is about 5½ inches long on the map. How long is the actual trail? 5. Georgeanne loves mixed nuts. The local farmer's market sells a mix for $2.79 per pound. How many

pounds can she buy for $10.85? 6. Jack is making his famous waffles for Sunday brunch. He knows that 5 waffles usually feed 2 people.

If he wants to serve 11 people, how many waffles should he make?

Page 80: 2016 – 2017 STUDENT HANDBOOK Version 2...Lesson Page Number Lesson Page Number PR #1 S1 Alg. 2.5 S189 PR 1.1 S5 Alg. 3.1 S206 PR 2.1 S16 Alg. 3.2 S215 PR 2.2 S21 Alg. 3.3 S220 PR

© 2016 CUNY Collaborative Programs Supported by the NYS Education Department S90

DRAFT – DO NOT DUPLICATE

PR LESSON 4.3

7. The week before Thanksgiving, turkeys go on sale for $1.29 per pound at the EatMore grocery store.

How much will a 14-lb turkey cost? 8. At Camp Poison Oak there are 2 counselors for every 15 campers. The camp director expects 75

campers next summer. How many counselors will they need? Write-up on problems 1-8:

For your first solution method did you use the same strategy for solving all the? If so, explain it. If not, choose one of the strategies you used and explain it.

Page 81: 2016 – 2017 STUDENT HANDBOOK Version 2...Lesson Page Number Lesson Page Number PR #1 S1 Alg. 2.5 S189 PR 1.1 S5 Alg. 3.1 S206 PR 2.1 S16 Alg. 3.2 S215 PR 2.2 S21 Alg. 3.3 S220 PR

© 2016 CUNY Collaborative Programs Supported by the NYS Education Department S91

DRAFT – DO NOT DUPLICATE

PR LESSON 4.3

Problem Set 2 Solve each of the problems below with any method you choose. Show all of your work. Compare your solutions with your group and discuss your preferences for different methods for each problem 1. Priya uses seven tubes of toothpaste every ten months. How many tubes would she use in 3 years?

In 10 years? How long would it take her to use 100 tubes? 2. Rajan often cleans his teachers’ mini-wipe boards. He can clean 15 boards in 8 minutes. At this rate,

how long would it take him to clean 90 mini wipe boards? Now reverse the problem: How many mini wipe boards could Rajan clean in one hour?

3. The Dance Club is having a tamale sale! The school has 1600 students, but the club members are not

sure how many tamales to make. One day during lunch, the club asked random students if they would buy a tamale for a buck. They found that 15 out of 80 students surveyed said they would definitely buy a tamale. How many tamales should the Dance Club expect to sell?

Page 82: 2016 – 2017 STUDENT HANDBOOK Version 2...Lesson Page Number Lesson Page Number PR #1 S1 Alg. 2.5 S189 PR 1.1 S5 Alg. 3.1 S206 PR 2.1 S16 Alg. 3.2 S215 PR 2.2 S21 Alg. 3.3 S220 PR

© 2016 CUNY Collaborative Programs Supported by the NYS Education Department S92

DRAFT – DO NOT DUPLICATE

PR LESSON 4.3

4. A typical small bag of colored candies has about 135 candies in it, 27 of which are blue. At this rate, how many blue candies would you expect in a pile of 1000 colored candies?

5. Ten graphing calculators cost $1049.50. How much would 100 cost? 1000? 500? 6. Tickets to 50 home baseball games would cost $1137.50. How much would it cost to get tickets for

all 81 home games? How many games could you go to for $728?

Page 83: 2016 – 2017 STUDENT HANDBOOK Version 2...Lesson Page Number Lesson Page Number PR #1 S1 Alg. 2.5 S189 PR 1.1 S5 Alg. 3.1 S206 PR 2.1 S16 Alg. 3.2 S215 PR 2.2 S21 Alg. 3.3 S220 PR

© 2016 CUNY Collaborative Programs Supported by the NYS Education Department S93

DRAFT – DO NOT DUPLICATE

PR LESSON 4.3

7. Terrence weighs 160 pounds and is on a diet to gain two pounds a week so that he can make the football team. Carlos weighs 208 pounds and is on a diet to lose three pounds a week so that he can be on the wrestling team in a lower weight class.

If Terrence and Carlos stick to these goals and keep dieting, when will they weigh the same, and how much will they weigh at that time? Clearly explain all of your method.

Page 84: 2016 – 2017 STUDENT HANDBOOK Version 2...Lesson Page Number Lesson Page Number PR #1 S1 Alg. 2.5 S189 PR 1.1 S5 Alg. 3.1 S206 PR 2.1 S16 Alg. 3.2 S215 PR 2.2 S21 Alg. 3.3 S220 PR

© 2016 CUNY Collaborative Programs Supported by the NYS Education Department S94

DRAFT – DO NOT DUPLICATE

PR LESSON 4.3

Problem Set 3 Solving Proportional Equations. Solve for x. Check your solutions. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9.

Page 85: 2016 – 2017 STUDENT HANDBOOK Version 2...Lesson Page Number Lesson Page Number PR #1 S1 Alg. 2.5 S189 PR 1.1 S5 Alg. 3.1 S206 PR 2.1 S16 Alg. 3.2 S215 PR 2.2 S21 Alg. 3.3 S220 PR

© 2016 CUNY Collaborative Programs Supported by the NYS Education Department S95

DRAFT – DO NOT DUPLICATE

PR LESSON 4.3

10. 11. 12. 13. 14.

Page 86: 2016 – 2017 STUDENT HANDBOOK Version 2...Lesson Page Number Lesson Page Number PR #1 S1 Alg. 2.5 S189 PR 1.1 S5 Alg. 3.1 S206 PR 2.1 S16 Alg. 3.2 S215 PR 2.2 S21 Alg. 3.3 S220 PR

© 2016 CUNY Collaborative Programs Supported by the NYS Education Department S96

DRAFT – DO NOT DUPLICATE

PR LESSON 4.3

Exit Ticket Solve the following proportional equation and provide justifications for your steps.

Page 87: 2016 – 2017 STUDENT HANDBOOK Version 2...Lesson Page Number Lesson Page Number PR #1 S1 Alg. 2.5 S189 PR 1.1 S5 Alg. 3.1 S206 PR 2.1 S16 Alg. 3.2 S215 PR 2.2 S21 Alg. 3.3 S220 PR

ALGEBRA

Page 88: 2016 – 2017 STUDENT HANDBOOK Version 2...Lesson Page Number Lesson Page Number PR #1 S1 Alg. 2.5 S189 PR 1.1 S5 Alg. 3.1 S206 PR 2.1 S16 Alg. 3.2 S215 PR 2.2 S21 Alg. 3.3 S220 PR
Page 89: 2016 – 2017 STUDENT HANDBOOK Version 2...Lesson Page Number Lesson Page Number PR #1 S1 Alg. 2.5 S189 PR 1.1 S5 Alg. 3.1 S206 PR 2.1 S16 Alg. 3.2 S215 PR 2.2 S21 Alg. 3.3 S220 PR

© 2015 CUNY Collaborative Programs Supported by the NYS Education Department S127

DRAFT – DO NOT DUPLICATE

ALGEBRA LESSON 1.1

Activity 1: Amazon Island On Amazon Island, there are many different merchants and people selling things. The people of Amazon Island often found themselves seeking out best prices and adding up purchases to find totals. In order to help them do their calculations, they created two binary operations: “minimize” and “join.” They used the symbol ⊕ for minimize and ⊞ for join.

5 ⊕ 8 = 5 You take the minimum of 5 and 8 to get 5 Generally: a ⊕ b = min{a,b} 5 ⊞ 8 = 13 You join 5 and 8 to get 13 (it’s really just like adding but they call it joining); Generally: a ⊞ b = a+b

In this lesson we will explore some properties, equations, and solutions by investigating how they might apply on the Amazon Island. A solution to an algebraic equation is the set of things put in place of the variable that make it true.

1. Solve the following (i.e. find everything that would make it true.) There may be one solution, more than one solution, or no solutions.

a. 10 ⊕ 20 = x

b. a ⊕ 6 = 3

c. 4 ⊕ (5 ⊕ 6) = p

d. b ⊕ 5 = 5

e. 6 ⊕ = x

Page 90: 2016 – 2017 STUDENT HANDBOOK Version 2...Lesson Page Number Lesson Page Number PR #1 S1 Alg. 2.5 S189 PR 1.1 S5 Alg. 3.1 S206 PR 2.1 S16 Alg. 3.2 S215 PR 2.2 S21 Alg. 3.3 S220 PR

© 2015 CUNY Collaborative Programs Supported by the NYS Education Department S128

DRAFT – DO NOT DUPLICATE

ALGEBRA LESSON 1.1

f. b ⊕ 8 = 12

g. -7 ⊕ c = -7

2. Create three of your own simple one-variable equations using ⊕. • Find a solution for your equation. • Can you find additional solutions for your equation? • How many solutions are there for the equation? • Are any conjectures emerging?

3. In traditional mathematics, we say that addition is commutative because switching the order of two numbers we’re adding doesn’t change the answer. We say that it is associative because when adding three numbers, it doesn’t matter whether we add the first two first or the last two first. • Do you think ⊕ is commutative? • Do you think ⊕ is associative?

Page 91: 2016 – 2017 STUDENT HANDBOOK Version 2...Lesson Page Number Lesson Page Number PR #1 S1 Alg. 2.5 S189 PR 1.1 S5 Alg. 3.1 S206 PR 2.1 S16 Alg. 3.2 S215 PR 2.2 S21 Alg. 3.3 S220 PR

© 2015 CUNY Collaborative Programs Supported by the NYS Education Department S129

DRAFT – DO NOT DUPLICATE

ALGEBRA LESSON 1.1

4. Does the following work for ALL real numbers a, b, and c? a ⊕ (b⊕c)=(a⊕b) ⊕c

5. Does the following work for all real numbers x and y? x⊕y = y⊕x

6. In traditional mathematics, zero and one can be special in addition and multiplication. • Why would we call zero special in addition? • Is there a similar number for the Amazon operation of minimize, ⊕?

In addition we call -5 the additive inverse or opposite of 5. Is there something similar for ⊕?

7. A teacher without a plan:

Teacher: Today we’re going to investigate the operation of ⊞ on from Amazon Island. Student: I don’t need to do this. Teacher: Why not? Student: Because it’s just addition! Teacher: Shoot!

Is ⊞ just addition? Is it commutative? Is it associative?

Page 92: 2016 – 2017 STUDENT HANDBOOK Version 2...Lesson Page Number Lesson Page Number PR #1 S1 Alg. 2.5 S189 PR 1.1 S5 Alg. 3.1 S206 PR 2.1 S16 Alg. 3.2 S215 PR 2.2 S21 Alg. 3.3 S220 PR

© 2015 CUNY Collaborative Programs Supported by the NYS Education Department S130

DRAFT – DO NOT DUPLICATE

ALGEBRA LESSON 1.1

Activity 2 Does the island of Amazon need an order of operations? An expression might be calculated in different ways if a common order of operations does not exist.

1. Create a few expressions such as 3⊞4⊕5 and explore whether you think an order of operations will make a difference in the result

2. Consider the expression 5⊕6⊞ 7. Determine the result if …

a) the joining operation is done first

b) the minimize operation is done first

c) calculations are done left to right

d) calculations are done right to left

e) the square-with-a-plus operation is done first

Page 93: 2016 – 2017 STUDENT HANDBOOK Version 2...Lesson Page Number Lesson Page Number PR #1 S1 Alg. 2.5 S189 PR 1.1 S5 Alg. 3.1 S206 PR 2.1 S16 Alg. 3.2 S215 PR 2.2 S21 Alg. 3.3 S220 PR

© 2015 CUNY Collaborative Programs Supported by the NYS Education Department S131

DRAFT – DO NOT DUPLICATE

ALGEBRA LESSON 1.1

Exit Ticket After a lot of debate, the Amazon Math Council has determined that joining will precede minimizing unless parentheses are used to make minimizing the priority. Explain what this will mean by using an example that you create.

Page 94: 2016 – 2017 STUDENT HANDBOOK Version 2...Lesson Page Number Lesson Page Number PR #1 S1 Alg. 2.5 S189 PR 1.1 S5 Alg. 3.1 S206 PR 2.1 S16 Alg. 3.2 S215 PR 2.2 S21 Alg. 3.3 S220 PR

© 2015 CUNY Collaborative Programs Supported by the NYS Education Department S135

DRAFT – DO NOT DUPLICATE

ALGEBRA LESSON 1.2

Activity 1: A Planet without Order The planet Krypton is a place without order. They refuse to agree to adopt a single order of operations. The Western Lefties think that order should just come from left to right. On an Eastern continent, they want to go from right to left. Those on an island without much ink and pencil lead want to reason out a logical choice that everyone on the planet follows. Others see no reason to create rules for the community to follow.

1. If there is no order for operations, find at least two different values that are possible for each of the given expressions:

a. 10 – 3 2

b. 48 23 c. 40 – 20 2 + 15 x 1.5 d. a+b3 when a=2 and b = 5 e. ab3 when a=2 and b = 5 f. 1+2c+3c2 when c=

Page 95: 2016 – 2017 STUDENT HANDBOOK Version 2...Lesson Page Number Lesson Page Number PR #1 S1 Alg. 2.5 S189 PR 1.1 S5 Alg. 3.1 S206 PR 2.1 S16 Alg. 3.2 S215 PR 2.2 S21 Alg. 3.3 S220 PR

© 2015 CUNY Collaborative Programs Supported by the NYS Education Department S136

DRAFT – DO NOT DUPLICATE

ALGEBRA LESSON 1.2

2. Two Kryptonites were struggling in emailing each other to discuss a problem. The Islander felt like 1+2c+3c2 should equal 321 when c = 10. The Western Leftie just calculated from left to right and came up with 108,900. Explain each of the answers they came to.

3. When Western Leftie figured out the problem, he just sent a new email using a few extra parentheses for the Islander:

{[((1+2) x c) +3] c}2

What does the expression above lead to when c=10? When Islander wanted to get Leftie to see the answer as 321, she had to write, (1+(2 × c))+(3 × (c^2)) The Islander hated all of the parentheses and considered leaving the planet.

Page 96: 2016 – 2017 STUDENT HANDBOOK Version 2...Lesson Page Number Lesson Page Number PR #1 S1 Alg. 2.5 S189 PR 1.1 S5 Alg. 3.1 S206 PR 2.1 S16 Alg. 3.2 S215 PR 2.2 S21 Alg. 3.3 S220 PR

© 2015 CUNY Collaborative Programs Supported by the NYS Education Department S137

DRAFT – DO NOT DUPLICATE

ALGEBRA LESSON 1.2

Problem Set 1 Luckily on the planet earth we have come to agreements on an order of operations that enables all of us to communicate with only a reasonable use of parentheses. Some would say that the precedence of multiplication over addition is probably a consequence of natural language.

5 apples and 2 bananas is something like 5×a+2×b or 5a+2b where the five next to a implies multiplication.

This may have to do with the fact that multiplication is sometimes expressed by adjectives in the natural language, while summation is expressed by a conjunction. The critical result is that people around the world can communication mathematical expressions without excessive use of parentheses. Multiplication and division precede addition and subtraction. And exponents apply to what is immediately next to them. Solve the following using the correct order of operations:

1. 40 — + 15 x 15

2. 10 — 3 x 2

3. 46 — 24 ÷ (3 — 1)

4. 48 ÷ 23

Page 97: 2016 – 2017 STUDENT HANDBOOK Version 2...Lesson Page Number Lesson Page Number PR #1 S1 Alg. 2.5 S189 PR 1.1 S5 Alg. 3.1 S206 PR 2.1 S16 Alg. 3.2 S215 PR 2.2 S21 Alg. 3.3 S220 PR

© 2015 CUNY Collaborative Programs Supported by the NYS Education Department S138

DRAFT – DO NOT DUPLICATE

ALGEBRA LESSON 1.2

5. (1 + 9)3 - 102 x 8

6. 100 ÷ 52 + 4

7. 32 x 22 — 6 x (9 — 5)

8. 90 - 5 x 32

9. 18 ÷ (100 — 99)9 + 23

10. 92 — 14 x 3

11. (2 +3)3 — (11 — 4)2 x 2

Page 98: 2016 – 2017 STUDENT HANDBOOK Version 2...Lesson Page Number Lesson Page Number PR #1 S1 Alg. 2.5 S189 PR 1.1 S5 Alg. 3.1 S206 PR 2.1 S16 Alg. 3.2 S215 PR 2.2 S21 Alg. 3.3 S220 PR

© 2015 CUNY Collaborative Programs Supported by the NYS Education Department S139

DRAFT – DO NOT DUPLICATE

ALGEBRA LESSON 1.2

Activity 2: More exploring on earth

1a. Write an expression to represent the total area of this diagram:

1b. Which compound area diagram below represents the expression: 5 + 3 x 2?

1c. Create two of your own multiple choice problems like the problem above. Explain the answer.

Page 99: 2016 – 2017 STUDENT HANDBOOK Version 2...Lesson Page Number Lesson Page Number PR #1 S1 Alg. 2.5 S189 PR 1.1 S5 Alg. 3.1 S206 PR 2.1 S16 Alg. 3.2 S215 PR 2.2 S21 Alg. 3.3 S220 PR

© 2015 CUNY Collaborative Programs Supported by the NYS Education Department S140

DRAFT – DO NOT DUPLICATE

ALGEBRA LESSON 1.2

2a. Explain the difference in meaning between 10 x 4 + 5 and 10 x (4 + 5). Use words or diagrams to help your explanation.

2b. Explain the difference in meaning between 82 + 22 and (8 + 2)2. Use words or diagrams to help your explanation.

2c. Explain the difference in meaning between and 8 + 6 ÷ 2. Use words or diagrams to help your explanation.

Page 100: 2016 – 2017 STUDENT HANDBOOK Version 2...Lesson Page Number Lesson Page Number PR #1 S1 Alg. 2.5 S189 PR 1.1 S5 Alg. 3.1 S206 PR 2.1 S16 Alg. 3.2 S215 PR 2.2 S21 Alg. 3.3 S220 PR

© 2015 CUNY Collaborative Programs Supported by the NYS Education Department S141

DRAFT – DO NOT DUPLICATE

ALGEBRA LESSON 1.2

Activity 31: Matching Cards 1. Take turns at matching pairs of cards that you think belong together. 2. Each time you do this, explain your thinking clearly and carefully. Your partner should either explain that reasoning again in his/her own words or challenge the reasons you gave. 3. If you think there is no suitable card that matches, write one of your own on a blank card. 4. Once agreed, stick the matched cards onto the poster paper writing any relevant calculations and explanations next to the cards. You both need to be able to agree on and to be able to explain the placement of every card.

1 Adopted from http://map.mathshell.org/materials/download.php?fileid=1358

Page 101: 2016 – 2017 STUDENT HANDBOOK Version 2...Lesson Page Number Lesson Page Number PR #1 S1 Alg. 2.5 S189 PR 1.1 S5 Alg. 3.1 S206 PR 2.1 S16 Alg. 3.2 S215 PR 2.2 S21 Alg. 3.3 S220 PR

© 2015 CUNY Collaborative Programs Supported by the NYS Education Department S142

DRAFT – DO NOT DUPLICATE

ALGEBRA LESSON 1.2

Page 102: 2016 – 2017 STUDENT HANDBOOK Version 2...Lesson Page Number Lesson Page Number PR #1 S1 Alg. 2.5 S189 PR 1.1 S5 Alg. 3.1 S206 PR 2.1 S16 Alg. 3.2 S215 PR 2.2 S21 Alg. 3.3 S220 PR
Page 103: 2016 – 2017 STUDENT HANDBOOK Version 2...Lesson Page Number Lesson Page Number PR #1 S1 Alg. 2.5 S189 PR 1.1 S5 Alg. 3.1 S206 PR 2.1 S16 Alg. 3.2 S215 PR 2.2 S21 Alg. 3.3 S220 PR

© 2015 CUNY Collaborative Programs Supported by the NYS Education Department S144

DRAFT – DO NOT DUPLICATE

ALGEBRA LESSON 1.2

Page 104: 2016 – 2017 STUDENT HANDBOOK Version 2...Lesson Page Number Lesson Page Number PR #1 S1 Alg. 2.5 S189 PR 1.1 S5 Alg. 3.1 S206 PR 2.1 S16 Alg. 3.2 S215 PR 2.2 S21 Alg. 3.3 S220 PR
Page 105: 2016 – 2017 STUDENT HANDBOOK Version 2...Lesson Page Number Lesson Page Number PR #1 S1 Alg. 2.5 S189 PR 1.1 S5 Alg. 3.1 S206 PR 2.1 S16 Alg. 3.2 S215 PR 2.2 S21 Alg. 3.3 S220 PR

© 2015 CUNY Collaborative Programs Supported by the NYS Education Department S146

DRAFT – DO NOT DUPLICATE

ALGEBRA LESSON 1.2

Exit Ticket

Page 106: 2016 – 2017 STUDENT HANDBOOK Version 2...Lesson Page Number Lesson Page Number PR #1 S1 Alg. 2.5 S189 PR 1.1 S5 Alg. 3.1 S206 PR 2.1 S16 Alg. 3.2 S215 PR 2.2 S21 Alg. 3.3 S220 PR

© 2015 CUNY Collaborative Programs Supported by the NYS Education Department S147

DRAFT – DO NOT DUPLICATE

ALGEBRA LESSON 2.0

Activity 1: Lunchroom Tables Leonard Nimoy High School (LNHS) is purchasing new trapezoidal tables for their lunch room from TablesRUs. The principal, Ms. Counter needs to figure out how many to order. Five students can sit around one of these tables as shown below.

She can also put two tables together and seat eight students.

She can also put more than two tables together.

1. Consider the cases below: a. What happens if you put 3 tables in a line? How many can sit around the table row?

b. What if you put 8 tables in a line? How many can sit around the tables?

c. How many students can sit around 20 tables?

Page 107: 2016 – 2017 STUDENT HANDBOOK Version 2...Lesson Page Number Lesson Page Number PR #1 S1 Alg. 2.5 S189 PR 1.1 S5 Alg. 3.1 S206 PR 2.1 S16 Alg. 3.2 S215 PR 2.2 S21 Alg. 3.3 S220 PR

© 2015 CUNY Collaborative Programs Supported by the NYS Education Department S148

DRAFT – DO NOT DUPLICATE

ALGEBRA LESSON 2.0

d. How many students can sit around 100 tables? e. How many students can sit around t tables?

2. At LNHS they usually have about 450 students at fourth period lunch and 300 students during fifth period lunch. Sometimes these tables are taken to the gym for different events. How many tables would Ms. Counter need for lunch?

Page 108: 2016 – 2017 STUDENT HANDBOOK Version 2...Lesson Page Number Lesson Page Number PR #1 S1 Alg. 2.5 S189 PR 1.1 S5 Alg. 3.1 S206 PR 2.1 S16 Alg. 3.2 S215 PR 2.2 S21 Alg. 3.3 S220 PR

© 2015 CUNY Collaborative Programs Supported by the NYS Education Department S149

DRAFT – DO NOT DUPLICATE

ALGEBRA LESSON 2.0

Activity 2: Tables, continued

3. The janitor reminded Ms. Counter that the cafeteria wouldn’t hold all of the tables in one line. He estimated that the length of the cafeteria was long enough to set up about 20 tables. With this in mind, determine the fewest number of tables needed and the expected set-up to seat 450 students.

4. Mr. Splotch the art teacher is borrowed 15 tables to use for a special joint paper poster assignment.

He’ll be setting them up in three rows. How many students will he be able to seat around them?

Page 109: 2016 – 2017 STUDENT HANDBOOK Version 2...Lesson Page Number Lesson Page Number PR #1 S1 Alg. 2.5 S189 PR 1.1 S5 Alg. 3.1 S206 PR 2.1 S16 Alg. 3.2 S215 PR 2.2 S21 Alg. 3.3 S220 PR

© 2015 CUNY Collaborative Programs Supported by the NYS Education Department S150

DRAFT – DO NOT DUPLICATE

ALGEBRA LESSON 2.0

5. A competing table store, TablesForMore, is selling a new trapezoidal table that seats 7 students around one table – one on each end, three on the long parallel side and two on the short parallel side. These tables cost $80 each whereas the TableRUs tables cost $60. Would it be worth it for the school to buy these tables instead? Show your exploration of the question, work, and findings.

6. The principal often borrows the trapezoid tables for meetings and sometimes rents them out for community events. For a small meeting, about 6 people she arranges them as below:

For larger community events they use a set up like the one below or even longer:

Page 110: 2016 – 2017 STUDENT HANDBOOK Version 2...Lesson Page Number Lesson Page Number PR #1 S1 Alg. 2.5 S189 PR 1.1 S5 Alg. 3.1 S206 PR 2.1 S16 Alg. 3.2 S215 PR 2.2 S21 Alg. 3.3 S220 PR

© 2015 CUNY Collaborative Programs Supported by the NYS Education Department S151

DRAFT – DO NOT DUPLICATE

ALGEBRA LESSON 2.0

a. How many sit around two tables in the first figure? How many sit around 6 tables in the second figure?

b. Consider a longer table arrangement of this kind. How many would sit around 10 tables? 18 tables? 50 tables? n tables?

Page 111: 2016 – 2017 STUDENT HANDBOOK Version 2...Lesson Page Number Lesson Page Number PR #1 S1 Alg. 2.5 S189 PR 1.1 S5 Alg. 3.1 S206 PR 2.1 S16 Alg. 3.2 S215 PR 2.2 S21 Alg. 3.3 S220 PR

© 2015 CUNY Collaborative Programs Supported by the NYS Education Department S152

DRAFT – DO NOT DUPLICATE

ALGEBRA LESSON 2.1

Activity 1 1. Kayla has exactly 28 cents in her pockets.

What can you say for sure about the coins in her pocket? 2. Consider the cases below:

a. If Kayla has exactly three nickels, how many coins total does she have?

b. What is the greatest number of coins Kayla can have?

c. If Kayla has at least one nickel, what is the greatest number of pennies she could have?

d. If Kayla has more nickels than pennies, how many coins does she have, in total?

e. Can Kayla have an odd number of coins in her pocket?

Page 112: 2016 – 2017 STUDENT HANDBOOK Version 2...Lesson Page Number Lesson Page Number PR #1 S1 Alg. 2.5 S189 PR 1.1 S5 Alg. 3.1 S206 PR 2.1 S16 Alg. 3.2 S215 PR 2.2 S21 Alg. 3.3 S220 PR

© 2015 CUNY Collaborative Programs Supported by the NYS Education Department S153

DRAFT – DO NOT DUPLICATE

ALGEBRA LESSON 2.1

Activity 1 (alternate)

1. Kayla has exactly 28 cents in her pockets. What can you say for sure about the coins in her pocket?

2. If Kayla has three nickels, how many coins total does she have? 3. What is the greatest number of coins Kayla can have? 4. If Kayla has at least one nickel, what is the greatest number of pennies she could have? 5. If Kayla has more nickels than pennies, how many coins does she have, in total? 6. Can Kayla have an odd number of coins in her pocket?

Page 113: 2016 – 2017 STUDENT HANDBOOK Version 2...Lesson Page Number Lesson Page Number PR #1 S1 Alg. 2.5 S189 PR 1.1 S5 Alg. 3.1 S206 PR 2.1 S16 Alg. 3.2 S215 PR 2.2 S21 Alg. 3.3 S220 PR

© 2015 CUNY Collaborative Programs Supported by the NYS Education Department S154

DRAFT – DO NOT DUPLICATE

ALGEBRA LESSON 2.1

Activity 2 1. Rommel brought $15 to a school fundraiser and spent it all on hot dogs and game tickets. Hot dogs were $3 each and tickets were $0.25 each.

a. What can you say about his purchases?

b. If Rommel bought 23 items total, how many game tickets did he have?

c. If Rommel bought more hot dogs than game tickets, how many tickets did he have?

d. How many game tickets does Rommel have to give up for every additional hot dog he eats?

Number of hot dogs ($3 each)

Number of tickets ($0.25 each)

4

8

Page 114: 2016 – 2017 STUDENT HANDBOOK Version 2...Lesson Page Number Lesson Page Number PR #1 S1 Alg. 2.5 S189 PR 1.1 S5 Alg. 3.1 S206 PR 2.1 S16 Alg. 3.2 S215 PR 2.2 S21 Alg. 3.3 S220 PR

© 2015 CUNY Collaborative Programs Supported by the NYS Education Department S155

DRAFT – DO NOT DUPLICATE

ALGEBRA LESSON 2.1

Problem Set 1

Write your questions here: Q1: Q2: Q3:

Page 115: 2016 – 2017 STUDENT HANDBOOK Version 2...Lesson Page Number Lesson Page Number PR #1 S1 Alg. 2.5 S189 PR 1.1 S5 Alg. 3.1 S206 PR 2.1 S16 Alg. 3.2 S215 PR 2.2 S21 Alg. 3.3 S220 PR

© 2015 CUNY Collaborative Programs Supported by the NYS Education Department S156

DRAFT – DO NOT DUPLICATE

ALGEBRA LESSON 2.1

Answer the following questions by using the next page:

Q4: Q5:

Q6: If you only have 3-cent coins and 5-cent coins, what total amounts can you make with just these two kinds of coins?

Page 116: 2016 – 2017 STUDENT HANDBOOK Version 2...Lesson Page Number Lesson Page Number PR #1 S1 Alg. 2.5 S189 PR 1.1 S5 Alg. 3.1 S206 PR 2.1 S16 Alg. 3.2 S215 PR 2.2 S21 Alg. 3.3 S220 PR

© 2015 CUNY Collaborative Programs Supported by the NYS Education Department S157

DRAFT – DO NOT DUPLICATE

ALGEBRA LESSON 2.1

Activity 3

1. Pose three questions about the given information. 2. Malika joined Staywell Gym for one month and chose Plan A. Try out some numbers and then find

Malika’s total cost for the month if she makes v visits to the gym. 3. A toad is 25 feet north of a bullfrog and both of them are jumping north. Every time the toad jumps 1

foot, the bullfrog jumps 3 feet. Write a good question to turn this into a word problem. Then, answer it.

Page 117: 2016 – 2017 STUDENT HANDBOOK Version 2...Lesson Page Number Lesson Page Number PR #1 S1 Alg. 2.5 S189 PR 1.1 S5 Alg. 3.1 S206 PR 2.1 S16 Alg. 3.2 S215 PR 2.2 S21 Alg. 3.3 S220 PR

© 2015 CUNY Collaborative Programs Supported by the NYS Education Department S158

DRAFT – DO NOT DUPLICATE

ALGEBRA LESSON 2.1

Activity 4

1a. Raj has three times as many one-dollar bills as he does five-dollar bills. He has a total of $32. How many of each bill does he have?

1b. If Raj has three times as many one-dollar bills as he does five-dollar bills, could he have $42? $40?

Describe the possible amounts of money Raj could have under this condition. 2. Jacob has exactly 84 cents in his pocket. He only has dimes and pennies. Use some guess and check to

find the number of pennies (p) Jacob has if he has d dimes. Try some numbers first: If Jacob has 3 dimes … If Jacob has 7 dimes … If he has 4 dimes … If he has d dimes

Page 118: 2016 – 2017 STUDENT HANDBOOK Version 2...Lesson Page Number Lesson Page Number PR #1 S1 Alg. 2.5 S189 PR 1.1 S5 Alg. 3.1 S206 PR 2.1 S16 Alg. 3.2 S215 PR 2.2 S21 Alg. 3.3 S220 PR

© 2015 CUNY Collaborative Programs Supported by the NYS Education Department S159

DRAFT – DO NOT DUPLICATE

ALGEBRA LESSON 2.1

Problem Set 2

Carla’s going to a county fair, and she’s trying to figure out how much money to bring. She knows she’s going to want to buy exactly 4 food tickets, and she’ll spend the rest of her money playing games. Food tickets cost $3 each, and games cost $2 per turn. Write an equation for the total amount of money (m) Carla must bring if she plays g games.

Try some numbers first. If Carla plays 8 games… If she plays ___ games… If she plays ___ games… If she plays g games…

Page 119: 2016 – 2017 STUDENT HANDBOOK Version 2...Lesson Page Number Lesson Page Number PR #1 S1 Alg. 2.5 S189 PR 1.1 S5 Alg. 3.1 S206 PR 2.1 S16 Alg. 3.2 S215 PR 2.2 S21 Alg. 3.3 S220 PR

© 2015 CUNY Collaborative Programs Supported by the NYS Education Department S160

DRAFT – DO NOT DUPLICATE

ALGEBRA LESSON 2.2

Activity 1 1. There are about 240 million egg-laying hens in the United States. A laying hen produces roughly 250 to 300 eggs per year. On July 4, 2015, the population of the United States was estimated to be about 321 million people. Write three questions that make sense to ask about this situation.

2. Jay has two more sisters than brothers. How many more daughters than sons do Jay’s parents have?

Page 120: 2016 – 2017 STUDENT HANDBOOK Version 2...Lesson Page Number Lesson Page Number PR #1 S1 Alg. 2.5 S189 PR 1.1 S5 Alg. 3.1 S206 PR 2.1 S16 Alg. 3.2 S215 PR 2.2 S21 Alg. 3.3 S220 PR

© 2015 CUNY Collaborative Programs Supported by the NYS Education Department S161

DRAFT – DO NOT DUPLICATE

ALGEBRA LESSON 2.2

Activity 2

3. In his wallet, Luis only carries one-dollar bills, five-dollar bills, and ten-dollar bills. The total amount in his wallet right now is $43.

a) What is the largest number of bills he could have?

b) The smallest?

4. Suppose you also know that Luis has four times as many one-dollar bills as ten-dollar bills, and that his total is still $43. How many five-dollar bills does he have?

Page 121: 2016 – 2017 STUDENT HANDBOOK Version 2...Lesson Page Number Lesson Page Number PR #1 S1 Alg. 2.5 S189 PR 1.1 S5 Alg. 3.1 S206 PR 2.1 S16 Alg. 3.2 S215 PR 2.2 S21 Alg. 3.3 S220 PR

© 2015 CUNY Collaborative Programs Supported by the NYS Education Department S162

DRAFT – DO NOT DUPLICATE

ALGEBRA LESSON 2.2

Problem Set 1

1. Maria sees a sign for the school’s book fair.

She brought $11 to the fair. She bought nothing but books or tote bags. What can you say for sure about this situation?

2. At the same book fair, Maria also sees the following sign.

Write three questions that make sense to ask about this situation. 3. Jing wants to design and sell cell phone covers. It will cost her $80 a day to rent a kiosk in the mall. The

materials to make one cell phone cover cost about 60 cents.

Write 3 questions that make sense to ask about this situation. What additional information might Jing need in order to answer those questions?

Page 122: 2016 – 2017 STUDENT HANDBOOK Version 2...Lesson Page Number Lesson Page Number PR #1 S1 Alg. 2.5 S189 PR 1.1 S5 Alg. 3.1 S206 PR 2.1 S16 Alg. 3.2 S215 PR 2.2 S21 Alg. 3.3 S220 PR

© 2015 CUNY Collaborative Programs Supported by the NYS Education Department S163

DRAFT – DO NOT DUPLICATE

ALGEBRA LESSON 2.3

Activity 11 1. Pick a number.

• Add 3 • Multiply it by 2 • Add 4 • Divide it by 2 • Subtract your original number. • Is your result five?

Briefly explain any ideas you have that might explain the result.

2. Now try this one: Pick a number. • Subtract 1. • Multiply it by 5 • Add 4. • Multiply by 2 • Add 2. • What is your final number?

3. Start with your ending number from problem 2 • Walk through the steps of problem two in reverse. So for example the last step was “Add 2” so I will

take my final number and subtract two. (What is the reverse operation of multiplication?)

• Did you get to your starting number?

1 Some questions taken from COMAP’s Mathematics Modeling Our World and Harold Jacob’s Elementary Algebra.

Page 123: 2016 – 2017 STUDENT HANDBOOK Version 2...Lesson Page Number Lesson Page Number PR #1 S1 Alg. 2.5 S189 PR 1.1 S5 Alg. 3.1 S206 PR 2.1 S16 Alg. 3.2 S215 PR 2.2 S21 Alg. 3.3 S220 PR

© 2015 CUNY Collaborative Programs Supported by the NYS Education Department S164

DRAFT – DO NOT DUPLICATE

ALGEBRA LESSON 2.3

Activity 22 1. Below is a different way of thinking about the problem. Take a couple of minutes to figure out what

the picture is representing. With a partner, take turns explaining the steps:

The number thought of:

Add seven:

Multiply by two:

Subtract four:

Divide by two:

Subtract the number first thought of: 2. Ian, Maria, and Jacob are working through a similar problem. The bag represents their starting number.

Directions Draw it Ian Maria

Jacob

Start with a number

4 0

Add 6

10

Multiply by 3

24

Subtract 12

Divide by 3

Subtract your original number

a. Explain to a partner how to interpret the table. b. Complete the table. c. When Jacob multiplied by 3 he got 24. What was Jacob’s number before he multiplied by 3?

2 Problems adapted from EDC’s Transition to Algebra and Harold Jacob’s Elementary Algebra.

Page 124: 2016 – 2017 STUDENT HANDBOOK Version 2...Lesson Page Number Lesson Page Number PR #1 S1 Alg. 2.5 S189 PR 1.1 S5 Alg. 3.1 S206 PR 2.1 S16 Alg. 3.2 S215 PR 2.2 S21 Alg. 3.3 S220 PR

© 2015 CUNY Collaborative Programs Supported by the NYS Education Department S165

DRAFT – DO NOT DUPLICATE

ALGEBRA LESSON 2.3

Problem Set 1 1. Complete the table.

Directions Draw it Kayla

Raj Ben

Start with a number

7

Multiply by 2

18

Add 8

68

Divide by 2

Subtract your original number

2. If + 1 = 16, what is ? 3. If + 4 = 16, what is ?

Page 125: 2016 – 2017 STUDENT HANDBOOK Version 2...Lesson Page Number Lesson Page Number PR #1 S1 Alg. 2.5 S189 PR 1.1 S5 Alg. 3.1 S206 PR 2.1 S16 Alg. 3.2 S215 PR 2.2 S21 Alg. 3.3 S220 PR

© 2015 CUNY Collaborative Programs Supported by the NYS Education Department S166

DRAFT – DO NOT DUPLICATE

ALGEBRA LESSON 2.3

4. Complete the table below.

Directions Draw it Jing Kelly Ian Start with a number

Multiply by 5

15

Add 8

23 43 58

Subtract your original number

20 36

12

10

5. If + 2 = 34, then = ____?

6. If + 5 = 50, then = ____?

Page 126: 2016 – 2017 STUDENT HANDBOOK Version 2...Lesson Page Number Lesson Page Number PR #1 S1 Alg. 2.5 S189 PR 1.1 S5 Alg. 3.1 S206 PR 2.1 S16 Alg. 3.2 S215 PR 2.2 S21 Alg. 3.3 S220 PR

© 2015 CUNY Collaborative Programs Supported by the NYS Education Department S167

DRAFT – DO NOT DUPLICATE

ALGEBRA LESSON 2.3

Problem Set 2 1. Complete the table.

Directions Draw it Imani Rob Eva Start with a number

2

Add 4

6 14

Multiply by 3

42

Subtract your original number

26

16 13

Subtract your original number

6

2. If Malika also got 13 when the picture was , what was her original number ( )?_____

3. If = 24, what is ?

4. If + 5 = 23, what is ?

Page 127: 2016 – 2017 STUDENT HANDBOOK Version 2...Lesson Page Number Lesson Page Number PR #1 S1 Alg. 2.5 S189 PR 1.1 S5 Alg. 3.1 S206 PR 2.1 S16 Alg. 3.2 S215 PR 2.2 S21 Alg. 3.3 S220 PR

© 2015 CUNY Collaborative Programs Supported by the NYS Education Department S168

DRAFT – DO NOT DUPLICATE

ALGEBRA LESSON 2.3

5. Complete the table.

Directions Draw it Mali Ash Luis Start with a number

2 3

Add 5

16

28 32

30 35 75

Divide by 5

15

Subtract your original number

4

6. If Brandon writes 10 when the picture is , what is his number ( )? 7. Fill in the table

1

7 6 3 14 94 .5

13

10 76 6 5

8. If you were doing math magic with someone in problem 7, what instruction would you give after “start

with a number?”

Page 128: 2016 – 2017 STUDENT HANDBOOK Version 2...Lesson Page Number Lesson Page Number PR #1 S1 Alg. 2.5 S189 PR 1.1 S5 Alg. 3.1 S206 PR 2.1 S16 Alg. 3.2 S215 PR 2.2 S21 Alg. 3.3 S220 PR

© 2015 CUNY Collaborative Programs Supported by the NYS Education Department S169

DRAFT – DO NOT DUPLICATE

ALGEBRA LESSON 2.3

Activity 3 1. Below are directions for another number trick

a. Complete the table b. Will the “trick” here work for any number? c. Create diagrams for the trick using some symbol for the unknown and circles for the ones. d. Do your diagrams prove that the trick will work for any number?

2. The pictures below illustrate the steps of some math magic. Describe what is happening in each step in

words.

STEP 1 STEP 2 STEP 3 STEP 4 STEP 5 STEP 6

3. Below is the beginning of a number trick. Work with a partner to add steps to it that will get a person

to the number 2 from any starting number. Pictures may help. STEP 1: Start with a number STEP 2: Triple it STEP 3: Add Twelve …

4. Create a set of steps for a number trick that ends with the number from the start.

Page 129: 2016 – 2017 STUDENT HANDBOOK Version 2...Lesson Page Number Lesson Page Number PR #1 S1 Alg. 2.5 S189 PR 1.1 S5 Alg. 3.1 S206 PR 2.1 S16 Alg. 3.2 S215 PR 2.2 S21 Alg. 3.3 S220 PR

© 2015 CUNY Collaborative Programs Supported by the NYS Education Department S170

DRAFT – DO NOT DUPLICATE

ALGEBRA LESSON 2.3

Exit Ticket Create a “trick” problem and provide a visual model to explain the solution.

Page 130: 2016 – 2017 STUDENT HANDBOOK Version 2...Lesson Page Number Lesson Page Number PR #1 S1 Alg. 2.5 S189 PR 1.1 S5 Alg. 3.1 S206 PR 2.1 S16 Alg. 3.2 S215 PR 2.2 S21 Alg. 3.3 S220 PR

© 2015 CUNY Collaborative Programs Supported by the NYS Education Department S171

DRAFT – DO NOT DUPLICATE

ALGEBRA LESSON 2.4

Activity 1

1. If = , then = _____ 2. If = 16, then = _____ (HINT: If you don’t know what to do, try a guess and see if it works!) 3. If + 8 = 30, then = _____ 4. If + 1 = + 5, then = _____

5. What number can replace so that the statement “ = ” will be true? Briefly explain your answer.

6a. What number can replace in the statement “ = ?”

6b. What number can replace in the statement “ = ?”

Page 131: 2016 – 2017 STUDENT HANDBOOK Version 2...Lesson Page Number Lesson Page Number PR #1 S1 Alg. 2.5 S189 PR 1.1 S5 Alg. 3.1 S206 PR 2.1 S16 Alg. 3.2 S215 PR 2.2 S21 Alg. 3.3 S220 PR

© 2015 CUNY Collaborative Programs Supported by the NYS Education Department S172

DRAFT – DO NOT DUPLICATE

ALGEBRA LESSON 2.4

7a. This mobile always balances, why?

7b. This mobile balances when the square is replaced by a certain number. What number is that?

7c. This mobile never balances. Why is that?

7d. Does this mobile balance always, sometimes, or never? If it does, when is that?

7e. Draw a mobile that always balances:

Page 132: 2016 – 2017 STUDENT HANDBOOK Version 2...Lesson Page Number Lesson Page Number PR #1 S1 Alg. 2.5 S189 PR 1.1 S5 Alg. 3.1 S206 PR 2.1 S16 Alg. 3.2 S215 PR 2.2 S21 Alg. 3.3 S220 PR

© 2015 CUNY Collaborative Programs Supported by the NYS Education Department S173

DRAFT – DO NOT DUPLICATE

ALGEBRA LESSON 2.4

7f. Create a mobile that never balances: 7g. Draw a mobile that only balances if the square equals 3. 7h. How many moons are in one triangle?

8. If = 4, would the statement “ = ” be correct? Why or why not?

Page 133: 2016 – 2017 STUDENT HANDBOOK Version 2...Lesson Page Number Lesson Page Number PR #1 S1 Alg. 2.5 S189 PR 1.1 S5 Alg. 3.1 S206 PR 2.1 S16 Alg. 3.2 S215 PR 2.2 S21 Alg. 3.3 S220 PR

© 2015 CUNY Collaborative Programs Supported by the NYS Education Department S174

DRAFT – DO NOT DUPLICATE

ALGEBRA LESSON 2.4

Problem Set 1 1. Complete the following questions:

a. If = , then = b. If = , then = c. If = 12, then = d. If = 21, then = e. Kylie starts with a number. If she doubles it, the answer is 24. What was her original number? f. If + 3 = 40, then = g. If - 4 = 5, then =

h. What number can replace so that the statement “ = ” will be true? 2. The mobile in each picture is balanced. Find the weight of each shape.

A.

B.

Page 134: 2016 – 2017 STUDENT HANDBOOK Version 2...Lesson Page Number Lesson Page Number PR #1 S1 Alg. 2.5 S189 PR 1.1 S5 Alg. 3.1 S206 PR 2.1 S16 Alg. 3.2 S215 PR 2.2 S21 Alg. 3.3 S220 PR

© 2015 CUNY Collaborative Programs Supported by the NYS Education Department S175

DRAFT – DO NOT DUPLICATE

ALGEBRA LESSON 2.4

C.

D.

E.

F.

G.

H.

Page 135: 2016 – 2017 STUDENT HANDBOOK Version 2...Lesson Page Number Lesson Page Number PR #1 S1 Alg. 2.5 S189 PR 1.1 S5 Alg. 3.1 S206 PR 2.1 S16 Alg. 3.2 S215 PR 2.2 S21 Alg. 3.3 S220 PR

© 2015 CUNY Collaborative Programs Supported by the NYS Education Department S176

DRAFT – DO NOT DUPLICATE

ALGEBRA LESSON 2.4

I.

J.

K.

L.

M.

N.

Page 136: 2016 – 2017 STUDENT HANDBOOK Version 2...Lesson Page Number Lesson Page Number PR #1 S1 Alg. 2.5 S189 PR 1.1 S5 Alg. 3.1 S206 PR 2.1 S16 Alg. 3.2 S215 PR 2.2 S21 Alg. 3.3 S220 PR

© 2015 CUNY Collaborative Programs Supported by the NYS Education Department S177

DRAFT – DO NOT DUPLICATE

ALGEBRA LESSON 2.4

O.

P.

Q.

R.

Page 137: 2016 – 2017 STUDENT HANDBOOK Version 2...Lesson Page Number Lesson Page Number PR #1 S1 Alg. 2.5 S189 PR 1.1 S5 Alg. 3.1 S206 PR 2.1 S16 Alg. 3.2 S215 PR 2.2 S21 Alg. 3.3 S220 PR

© 2015 CUNY Collaborative Programs Supported by the NYS Education Department S178

DRAFT – DO NOT DUPLICATE

ALGEBRA LESSON 2.4

Activity 2 1. Complete the table:

3 5 9 75 0 2.5

10 22 3000 2b

2a. These two mobiles mean the same thing. Solve them both

3a. These two mobiles also mean the same thing. Finish the second one and solve both.

Translate the picture into algebraic notation: 4. ◊ ◊ + 5 = ◊ + 12 5. □ □ □ □ + 3 = □ □ + 13 Turn the equation into a mobile: 11. 3c+ 1 = c + 9 12. What is the value of □ in question 10?

Page 138: 2016 – 2017 STUDENT HANDBOOK Version 2...Lesson Page Number Lesson Page Number PR #1 S1 Alg. 2.5 S189 PR 1.1 S5 Alg. 3.1 S206 PR 2.1 S16 Alg. 3.2 S215 PR 2.2 S21 Alg. 3.3 S220 PR

© 2015 CUNY Collaborative Programs Supported by the NYS Education Department S179

DRAFT – DO NOT DUPLICATE

ALGEBRA LESSON 2.4

Practice Set 2 1. Fill in the missing parts of the table to see some math magic 2. Fill in the missing parts of the table to see some math magic

Directions Draw it Describe your drawing

Algebraic Expression

Start with a number

A bag b

Add 3

A bag and 3 b + 3

Multiply by 3

3b + 9

Subtract 3

Divide by 3

Subtract your original number

Directions Draw it Describe your drawing

Algebraic Expression

Start with a number

A bag

Add 3

b + 3

Multiply by 2

Add 4

Divide by 2

Subtract your original number

Page 139: 2016 – 2017 STUDENT HANDBOOK Version 2...Lesson Page Number Lesson Page Number PR #1 S1 Alg. 2.5 S189 PR 1.1 S5 Alg. 3.1 S206 PR 2.1 S16 Alg. 3.2 S215 PR 2.2 S21 Alg. 3.3 S220 PR

© 2015 CUNY Collaborative Programs Supported by the NYS Education Department S180

DRAFT – DO NOT DUPLICATE

ALGEBRA LESSON 2.4

3. Start with a number 4. Fill in the table to figure out the pattern. If “n” can be replaced with any number, describe the pattern

using n.

4

7 .5 3 0 10 100 n

16

28 2 20 50 5 4n

5. Fill in the table to figure out the pattern

6

4 10 5 7 3 n

48

32 80 0 64 8 72

Directions Draw it Describe your drawing

Algebraic Expression

Start with a number

A bag

Multiply by 2

2 bags 2b

Add 2

Multiply by 2

Divide by 4

Subtract your original number

Page 140: 2016 – 2017 STUDENT HANDBOOK Version 2...Lesson Page Number Lesson Page Number PR #1 S1 Alg. 2.5 S189 PR 1.1 S5 Alg. 3.1 S206 PR 2.1 S16 Alg. 3.2 S215 PR 2.2 S21 Alg. 3.3 S220 PR

© 2015 CUNY Collaborative Programs Supported by the NYS Education Department S181

DRAFT – DO NOT DUPLICATE

ALGEBRA LESSON 2.4

Translate these equations into algebraic notation. 6. ◊ ◊ ◊ ◊ – 2 = ◊ ◊ ◊ + 3 7. – 5 = + 6

8. 3d – 2 = d + 6 9. + 5 = 20 10. b + 5 = 20

Page 141: 2016 – 2017 STUDENT HANDBOOK Version 2...Lesson Page Number Lesson Page Number PR #1 S1 Alg. 2.5 S189 PR 1.1 S5 Alg. 3.1 S206 PR 2.1 S16 Alg. 3.2 S215 PR 2.2 S21 Alg. 3.3 S220 PR

© 2015 CUNY Collaborative Programs Supported by the NYS Education Department S182

DRAFT – DO NOT DUPLICATE

ALGEBRA LESSON 2.4

Activity 3 1. Do these two math magic tricks always give the same result?

TRICK 1 Start with a number Add 6 Multiply by 2 Subtract 4 Divide by 2 TRICK 2 Start with a number Multiply by 2 Add 6 Subtract 4 Divide by 2

Do they give the same result? _____ Why or why not?

Page 142: 2016 – 2017 STUDENT HANDBOOK Version 2...Lesson Page Number Lesson Page Number PR #1 S1 Alg. 2.5 S189 PR 1.1 S5 Alg. 3.1 S206 PR 2.1 S16 Alg. 3.2 S215 PR 2.2 S21 Alg. 3.3 S220 PR

© 2015 CUNY Collaborative Programs Supported by the NYS Education Department S183

DRAFT – DO NOT DUPLICATE

ALGEBRA LESSON 2.4

2. Using these magic steps to create a sequence that always results in the number you started with. Test your magic on four numbers

ADD 10 DIVIDE BY 2 MULTIPLY BY 2 SUBTRACT 5

Description Test 1 Test 2 Test 3 Test 4 Algebraic Expression

Start with a number

n

n

3. Use the table to figure out the pattern

3

11 5 101 1 10 n

9

33 15 303 30 0

8

32 14 29 98 20 3n – 1

Page 143: 2016 – 2017 STUDENT HANDBOOK Version 2...Lesson Page Number Lesson Page Number PR #1 S1 Alg. 2.5 S189 PR 1.1 S5 Alg. 3.1 S206 PR 2.1 S16 Alg. 3.2 S215 PR 2.2 S21 Alg. 3.3 S220 PR

© 2015 CUNY Collaborative Programs Supported by the NYS Education Department S184

DRAFT – DO NOT DUPLICATE

ALGEBRA LESSON 2.4

4. Akini is describing her work on this problem but part of her answer is missing. Fill in the missing information

What number can replace so that the statement “ = ” is true?

“First, I rewrote the problem with an algebraic expression like this: 3b + 5 = 2b + ____ Then, I crossed out ___ bags from each side so that one side had none So, I simplified the expression by writing: b + 5 = _____ Next I subtracted ________ Finally, I could see that b, the bag, always has to be ____ for the statement to be true.”

5. Which of these three moves will always keep the mobile balanced? A. Move all the diamonds from the left side to the right side. B. Remove a moon from the left side, and a diamond from the right side C. Remove 2 moons from both sides.

Solve these equations:

6. If + 2 = + 7, then = _____? 7. If 2b + 2 = b + 7, then b = _____? 8. If 2b = 22, then b = _____?

9. If + 4 = + 7, then = _____? 10. If 2b + 4 = b + 7

Page 144: 2016 – 2017 STUDENT HANDBOOK Version 2...Lesson Page Number Lesson Page Number PR #1 S1 Alg. 2.5 S189 PR 1.1 S5 Alg. 3.1 S206 PR 2.1 S16 Alg. 3.2 S215 PR 2.2 S21 Alg. 3.3 S220 PR

© 2015 CUNY Collaborative Programs Supported by the NYS Education Department S185

DRAFT – DO NOT DUPLICATE

ALGEBRA LESSON 2.4

Practice Set 3 1. Fill in the table and find the pattern.

2

4 8 6 7 n

12

24 48 18 0 56 30 6

2. If you were doing the same math magic in the first problem with someone else, what would you tell

them to do after “start with a number?” 3.

4. + 5 = + 8, then = 5. 2b + 5 = b + 8, then b =

6. + 2 = + 12 7. 3b + 2 = b + 12, then b =

Page 145: 2016 – 2017 STUDENT HANDBOOK Version 2...Lesson Page Number Lesson Page Number PR #1 S1 Alg. 2.5 S189 PR 1.1 S5 Alg. 3.1 S206 PR 2.1 S16 Alg. 3.2 S215 PR 2.2 S21 Alg. 3.3 S220 PR

© 2015 CUNY Collaborative Programs Supported by the NYS Education Department S186

DRAFT – DO NOT DUPLICATE

ALGEBRA LESSON 2.4

8. Fill in the missing parts of the table 3

11 5 101 1 -3 10 n

6

14 8 104 25 3 0 7

12

28 16 2n + 6

9. Fill in the missing parts 10. Fill in the missing parts

Directions Draw it Algebraic Expression

Value

Start with a number

4b

Add 4

4b + 4 16

4

Subtract 1

Directions Draw it Algebraic Expression

Value

Start with a number

b

Multiply by 2

28

2b + 14 26

b + 7

Subtract your original number

7

Page 146: 2016 – 2017 STUDENT HANDBOOK Version 2...Lesson Page Number Lesson Page Number PR #1 S1 Alg. 2.5 S189 PR 1.1 S5 Alg. 3.1 S206 PR 2.1 S16 Alg. 3.2 S215 PR 2.2 S21 Alg. 3.3 S220 PR

© 2015 CUNY Collaborative Programs Supported by the NYS Education Department S187

DRAFT – DO NOT DUPLICATE

ALGEBRA LESSON 2.4

11. + 8 = 37, then = 12. If + 23 = + 13, then =

13. If ◊ ◊ ◊ = 24, then ◊ = 14. – 5 = 4, then = 15.

16. Fill in the missing parts

3

11 5 101 46 1 -1 10 n

7

15 9 105 3 4

21

45 27 315 18 3n + 12

Page 147: 2016 – 2017 STUDENT HANDBOOK Version 2...Lesson Page Number Lesson Page Number PR #1 S1 Alg. 2.5 S189 PR 1.1 S5 Alg. 3.1 S206 PR 2.1 S16 Alg. 3.2 S215 PR 2.2 S21 Alg. 3.3 S220 PR

© 2015 CUNY Collaborative Programs Supported by the NYS Education Department S188

DRAFT – DO NOT DUPLICATE

ALGEBRA LESSON 2.4

17. Represent this equation using a picture: 3b + 8 = 4b + 6 18. Translate this equation into an algebraic expression: – 8 = + 4

19. Mali starts with a number. If she multiplies her number by 7, the answer is 42. What was her original

number?

Page 148: 2016 – 2017 STUDENT HANDBOOK Version 2...Lesson Page Number Lesson Page Number PR #1 S1 Alg. 2.5 S189 PR 1.1 S5 Alg. 3.1 S206 PR 2.1 S16 Alg. 3.2 S215 PR 2.2 S21 Alg. 3.3 S220 PR

© 2015 CUNY Collaborative Programs Supported by the NYS Education Department S189

DRAFT – DO NOT DUPLICATE

ALGEBRA LESSON 2.5

Activity 1: Who Am I? Puzzles

Algebraic Habits of Mind: Puzzling & Persevering1 To solve “Who Am I?” puzzles you have to play with the digits both separately and together to find the mystery number. When solving puzzles, always start with what you know. These clues will eventually help you narrow the answer, but there can be many ways to get there. Try anything that looks hopeful.

1 Transition to Algebra, EDC, 2014

0 1 4 9 16

Page 149: 2016 – 2017 STUDENT HANDBOOK Version 2...Lesson Page Number Lesson Page Number PR #1 S1 Alg. 2.5 S189 PR 1.1 S5 Alg. 3.1 S206 PR 2.1 S16 Alg. 3.2 S215 PR 2.2 S21 Alg. 3.3 S220 PR

© 2015 CUNY Collaborative Programs Supported by the NYS Education Department S190

DRAFT – DO NOT DUPLICATE

ALGEBRA LESSON 2.5

Activity 2

1. For each pair of numbers figure out the distance between the two. Use the number line to help.

a. 5 and 9 b. -1 ½ and -2 c. 3 ½ and 4 d. -2 and 8 e. 7.5 and 9 f. 7 ¼ and 8 g. 6 and 7 ¼ h. 9 ¾ and 10 i. -1 and 1 j. 2 ½ and 8 k. -4 and 11 l. 5 and 5

8. What is the distance between -3 and 4 ¼ ?

Page 150: 2016 – 2017 STUDENT HANDBOOK Version 2...Lesson Page Number Lesson Page Number PR #1 S1 Alg. 2.5 S189 PR 1.1 S5 Alg. 3.1 S206 PR 2.1 S16 Alg. 3.2 S215 PR 2.2 S21 Alg. 3.3 S220 PR

© 2015 CUNY Collaborative Programs Supported by the NYS Education Department S191

DRAFT – DO NOT DUPLICATE

ALGEBRA LESSON 2.5

9. What is the distance between 5 1/3 and 10?

10. Answer True or False for each statement a-d. If the statement is false give a specific example that proves the statement is false. Since the variable can be any number, all you need is one example to show the statement is false.

a. 5r is always positive (false) EX. If r is -2, 5r =

b. -m is always negative (false)

c. If p is a positive number, then p + 10 is always positive (true)

d. If k is a positive number, then k – 8 is always negative (false)

Page 151: 2016 – 2017 STUDENT HANDBOOK Version 2...Lesson Page Number Lesson Page Number PR #1 S1 Alg. 2.5 S189 PR 1.1 S5 Alg. 3.1 S206 PR 2.1 S16 Alg. 3.2 S215 PR 2.2 S21 Alg. 3.3 S220 PR

© 2015 CUNY Collaborative Programs Supported by the NYS Education Department S192

DRAFT – DO NOT DUPLICATE

ALGEBRA LESSON 2.5

Problem Set 1

Page 152: 2016 – 2017 STUDENT HANDBOOK Version 2...Lesson Page Number Lesson Page Number PR #1 S1 Alg. 2.5 S189 PR 1.1 S5 Alg. 3.1 S206 PR 2.1 S16 Alg. 3.2 S215 PR 2.2 S21 Alg. 3.3 S220 PR

© 2015 CUNY Collaborative Programs Supported by the NYS Education Department S193

DRAFT – DO NOT DUPLICATE

ALGEBRA LESSON 2.5

G. Identify six pairs of numbers that are 5 units apart.

(For example -100 and -105 are 5 units apart; I could also say -3 and 2 are five units apart)

H. Identify two pairs of numbers that are 3.5 units apart. Reflection: Do you feel like you have improved your skills in solving the “Who Am I?” problems? What are your strategies?

Page 153: 2016 – 2017 STUDENT HANDBOOK Version 2...Lesson Page Number Lesson Page Number PR #1 S1 Alg. 2.5 S189 PR 1.1 S5 Alg. 3.1 S206 PR 2.1 S16 Alg. 3.2 S215 PR 2.2 S21 Alg. 3.3 S220 PR

© 2015 CUNY Collaborative Programs Supported by the NYS Education Department S194

DRAFT – DO NOT DUPLICATE

ALGEBRA LESSON 2.5

Algebra 2.5: Activity 32

Try these:

2 Source: Lesson adapted from TTA from EDC.

Page 154: 2016 – 2017 STUDENT HANDBOOK Version 2...Lesson Page Number Lesson Page Number PR #1 S1 Alg. 2.5 S189 PR 1.1 S5 Alg. 3.1 S206 PR 2.1 S16 Alg. 3.2 S215 PR 2.2 S21 Alg. 3.3 S220 PR

© 2015 CUNY Collaborative Programs Supported by the NYS Education Department S195

DRAFT – DO NOT DUPLICATE

ALGEBRA LESSON 2.5

Page 155: 2016 – 2017 STUDENT HANDBOOK Version 2...Lesson Page Number Lesson Page Number PR #1 S1 Alg. 2.5 S189 PR 1.1 S5 Alg. 3.1 S206 PR 2.1 S16 Alg. 3.2 S215 PR 2.2 S21 Alg. 3.3 S220 PR

© 2015 CUNY Collaborative Programs Supported by the NYS Education Department S196

DRAFT – DO NOT DUPLICATE

ALGEBRA LESSON 2.5

Algebra 2.5: Activity 43

In each problem, multiply the middle number by itself and the two outside numbers together. Try to work without a calculator. 1. 2. 3. 4.

5. 6. 7. 8.

3 Source: Lesson adapted from TTA from EDC.

Page 156: 2016 – 2017 STUDENT HANDBOOK Version 2...Lesson Page Number Lesson Page Number PR #1 S1 Alg. 2.5 S189 PR 1.1 S5 Alg. 3.1 S206 PR 2.1 S16 Alg. 3.2 S215 PR 2.2 S21 Alg. 3.3 S220 PR

© 2015 CUNY Collaborative Programs Supported by the NYS Education Department S197

DRAFT – DO NOT DUPLICATE

ALGEBRA LESSON 2.5

Some patterns are easy to describe with words. For example “start with 1, add 2, then add 2 again and again.” Other patterns can be much harder to describe with words. Algebra provides a language that makes it easier to describe mathematical patterns. 9. How can you complete the empty boxes?

10. Set up problems to explore comparing a number squared with the product of the number that is two (2) greater than the center number with the number that is two (2) less than the center number. Below is an example:

a. 1 x 5 = 5 and 3 x 3 = 9: They have a difference of ___. b. 6 x 10 = 60 and 8 x 8= 64: They have a difference of ___. c. Is there a conjecture you might pose?

d. What would explain why these results occur?

Page 157: 2016 – 2017 STUDENT HANDBOOK Version 2...Lesson Page Number Lesson Page Number PR #1 S1 Alg. 2.5 S189 PR 1.1 S5 Alg. 3.1 S206 PR 2.1 S16 Alg. 3.2 S215 PR 2.2 S21 Alg. 3.3 S220 PR

© 2015 CUNY Collaborative Programs Supported by the NYS Education Department S198

DRAFT – DO NOT DUPLICATE

ALGEBRA LESSON 2.5

Algebra 2.5: Problem Set 24 Solve the following:

4 Source: Lesson adapted from TTA from EDC.

Page 158: 2016 – 2017 STUDENT HANDBOOK Version 2...Lesson Page Number Lesson Page Number PR #1 S1 Alg. 2.5 S189 PR 1.1 S5 Alg. 3.1 S206 PR 2.1 S16 Alg. 3.2 S215 PR 2.2 S21 Alg. 3.3 S220 PR

© 2015 CUNY Collaborative Programs Supported by the NYS Education Department S199

DRAFT – DO NOT DUPLICATE

ALGEBRA LESSON 2.5

Complete the problems below: F.

G H. I.

Find the products of the numbers below without a calculator. Use your work from the number lines to help. J. 999 x 1001=

K. 7 x 9=

L. 49 x 51=

Page 159: 2016 – 2017 STUDENT HANDBOOK Version 2...Lesson Page Number Lesson Page Number PR #1 S1 Alg. 2.5 S189 PR 1.1 S5 Alg. 3.1 S206 PR 2.1 S16 Alg. 3.2 S215 PR 2.2 S21 Alg. 3.3 S220 PR

© 2015 CUNY Collaborative Programs Supported by the NYS Education Department S200

DRAFT – DO NOT DUPLICATE

ALGEBRA LESSON 2.5

Solve the MysteryGrid puzzles and Mobile problem:

Page 160: 2016 – 2017 STUDENT HANDBOOK Version 2...Lesson Page Number Lesson Page Number PR #1 S1 Alg. 2.5 S189 PR 1.1 S5 Alg. 3.1 S206 PR 2.1 S16 Alg. 3.2 S215 PR 2.2 S21 Alg. 3.3 S220 PR

© 2015 CUNY Collaborative Programs Supported by the NYS Education Department S206

DRAFT – DO NOT DUPLICATE

ALGEBRA LESSON 3.1

Warm-up Activity

Task: Dae gives directions from the baseball field to her house:

• You should be on Clark right now, heading south. • Turn right on Addison • After about 4 blocks, turn left on Western. • At the next street, turn right on Belmont. • When you see a police station on the corner, turn right. • My housed is the fourth building on the left.

Create a map and directions to return to the baseball field from Dae’s house.

Page 161: 2016 – 2017 STUDENT HANDBOOK Version 2...Lesson Page Number Lesson Page Number PR #1 S1 Alg. 2.5 S189 PR 1.1 S5 Alg. 3.1 S206 PR 2.1 S16 Alg. 3.2 S215 PR 2.2 S21 Alg. 3.3 S220 PR

© 2015 CUNY Collaborative Programs Supported by the NYS Education Department S207

DRAFT – DO NOT DUPLICATE

ALGEBRA LESSON 3.1

Activity 1 Another way to represent equations is through arrow diagrams. Consider the equation 2x + 1 = 17. It can be represented with the following arrow diagram:

1. Explain why this arrow diagram is equivalent to the given equation.

To solve this equation using the arrow diagram, you need to work in reverse beginning with the 17: a. What is the opposite of adding 1?

b. What is the opposite of multiplying by 2? Is anything else considered the opposite of multiplying by 2?

c. What would be the bucket and circles picture corresponding to this?

Page 162: 2016 – 2017 STUDENT HANDBOOK Version 2...Lesson Page Number Lesson Page Number PR #1 S1 Alg. 2.5 S189 PR 1.1 S5 Alg. 3.1 S206 PR 2.1 S16 Alg. 3.2 S215 PR 2.2 S21 Alg. 3.3 S220 PR

© 2015 CUNY Collaborative Programs Supported by the NYS Education Department S208

DRAFT – DO NOT DUPLICATE

ALGEBRA LESSON 3.1

2. Consider the following: a. Write the expression 3(a + 2) – 1 as a sequence of steps describing the operation. b. Write the steps to reverse the operations.

3. What about a problem such as the following: 5(3x+2)-1 = 69 a. Create an arrow diagram for the equation. b. Solve the equation by working through the arrow diagram in reverse.

Page 163: 2016 – 2017 STUDENT HANDBOOK Version 2...Lesson Page Number Lesson Page Number PR #1 S1 Alg. 2.5 S189 PR 1.1 S5 Alg. 3.1 S206 PR 2.1 S16 Alg. 3.2 S215 PR 2.2 S21 Alg. 3.3 S220 PR

© 2015 CUNY Collaborative Programs Supported by the NYS Education Department S209

DRAFT – DO NOT DUPLICATE

ALGEBRA LESSON 3.1

4. Which step can you use to undo the operation in the equation Error! Bookmark not defined.

? Select A, B, C, or D.

I. Multiply by II. Multiply by III. Divide by IV. Divide by

A. I only B. III only C. II or III D. I or IV

5. Jasmine asks you to choose a number, add 10 and then find the remainder when you divide by 7. When you tell her your ending number, can Jasmine always find your starting number? Explain.

Page 164: 2016 – 2017 STUDENT HANDBOOK Version 2...Lesson Page Number Lesson Page Number PR #1 S1 Alg. 2.5 S189 PR 1.1 S5 Alg. 3.1 S206 PR 2.1 S16 Alg. 3.2 S215 PR 2.2 S21 Alg. 3.3 S220 PR

© 2015 CUNY Collaborative Programs Supported by the NYS Education Department S210

DRAFT – DO NOT DUPLICATE

ALGEBRA LESSON 3.1

Problem Set 1 Solve the following equations in at least 3 ways: a) using arrow diagrams, b) using buckets and circles, c)

using only equations, d) staring and thinking about it.

1. 36 = 2x-10

2. 3(x-6)+2=38

3. Consider the following equation: c = 5(p + 2) – 3 Create an arrow diagram for it.

Write an equation solving for p. Let your initial arrow diagram begin with p.

Page 165: 2016 – 2017 STUDENT HANDBOOK Version 2...Lesson Page Number Lesson Page Number PR #1 S1 Alg. 2.5 S189 PR 1.1 S5 Alg. 3.1 S206 PR 2.1 S16 Alg. 3.2 S215 PR 2.2 S21 Alg. 3.3 S220 PR

© 2015 CUNY Collaborative Programs Supported by the NYS Education Department S211

DRAFT – DO NOT DUPLICATE

ALGEBRA LESSON 3.1

4. Solve each of the following equations:

a. 3(a + 2) – 1 = 17 b. 3(a + 2) – 1 = 8 c. 3(a + 2) – 1 = 19 d. 3(a + 2) – 1 = 0

5. Problem 3 involved two variables, p and c. The four equations in problem 4 involved only one variable in each. What kinds of differences does this create?

6. Andrew explains, “I choose a number. I add 1 and multiply by -4. Then I add 2. My ending number is 22.” What is Andrew’s starting number?

Page 166: 2016 – 2017 STUDENT HANDBOOK Version 2...Lesson Page Number Lesson Page Number PR #1 S1 Alg. 2.5 S189 PR 1.1 S5 Alg. 3.1 S206 PR 2.1 S16 Alg. 3.2 S215 PR 2.2 S21 Alg. 3.3 S220 PR

© 2015 CUNY Collaborative Programs Supported by the NYS Education Department S212

DRAFT – DO NOT DUPLICATE

ALGEBRA LESSON 3.1

7. Create arrow diagrams for the following equations and then solve them: a. b. 3(a — 1) — 5 = 34

8. Explain how working backwards with the arrows can simplify solving an equation.

Page 167: 2016 – 2017 STUDENT HANDBOOK Version 2...Lesson Page Number Lesson Page Number PR #1 S1 Alg. 2.5 S189 PR 1.1 S5 Alg. 3.1 S206 PR 2.1 S16 Alg. 3.2 S215 PR 2.2 S21 Alg. 3.3 S220 PR

© 2015 CUNY Collaborative Programs Supported by the NYS Education Department S213

DRAFT – DO NOT DUPLICATE

ALGEBRA LESSON 3.1

Problem Set 2

1. For each of the following, create an arrow diagram to represent the given equation. Then solve the equation using the arrow backward method:

a. –5x + 13 = 93 c. –7x + 12 = –45 e. –3x – 17 = 4 b. 13 – 5x = 93 d. 12 – 7x = –45 f. –17x – 3x = 4

Hint for b. What if you rewrite it as 13 + -5x = 93. What was the change made? Would that always work?

Does it look familiar?

Page 168: 2016 – 2017 STUDENT HANDBOOK Version 2...Lesson Page Number Lesson Page Number PR #1 S1 Alg. 2.5 S189 PR 1.1 S5 Alg. 3.1 S206 PR 2.1 S16 Alg. 3.2 S215 PR 2.2 S21 Alg. 3.3 S220 PR

© 2015 CUNY Collaborative Programs Supported by the NYS Education Department S214

DRAFT – DO NOT DUPLICATE

ALGEBRA LESSON 3.1

2. Create an arrow diagram to represent the given equation. Then solve the equation using the arrow backward method:

a. 10(x + 3) = 73 b. 10x + 3 = 73

c. 73 = 10(x + 3) d. 73 = 10x + 3

e. f.

g. h. 73(3x) = 10

Page 169: 2016 – 2017 STUDENT HANDBOOK Version 2...Lesson Page Number Lesson Page Number PR #1 S1 Alg. 2.5 S189 PR 1.1 S5 Alg. 3.1 S206 PR 2.1 S16 Alg. 3.2 S215 PR 2.2 S21 Alg. 3.3 S220 PR

© 2015 CUNY Collaborative Programs Supported by the NYS Education Department S220

DRAFT – DO NOT DUPLICATE

ALGEBRA LESSON 3.3

Activity 1 Use the area model to solve each problem 1. 7 x 13 = _____ + _____ = ______

2. 15 * 24 = ______

Use the area models to help fill in the blanks in the problems below. 3.

25 * 14 = _____

4.

15 * 44 = _____

Page 170: 2016 – 2017 STUDENT HANDBOOK Version 2...Lesson Page Number Lesson Page Number PR #1 S1 Alg. 2.5 S189 PR 1.1 S5 Alg. 3.1 S206 PR 2.1 S16 Alg. 3.2 S215 PR 2.2 S21 Alg. 3.3 S220 PR

© 2015 CUNY Collaborative Programs Supported by the NYS Education Department S221

DRAFT – DO NOT DUPLICATE

ALGEBRA LESSON 3.3

5.

26 * 51 = ______

6.

541 * 62 = _______

7. Which of the following expressions corresponds to the diagram? Circle all that apply

A. (3 + 3) (5 + 7) B. 15 + 21 + 15 + 21 C. (3 + 5) (3 + 7)

8. What do these three expressions have in common? i. (6 + 3) (4 + 5) ii. (7 + 2)2 iii. 9 * (4 + 5)

A They all have the same final answer B They are just different ways of writing 9 * 9 C They have nothing in common

Page 171: 2016 – 2017 STUDENT HANDBOOK Version 2...Lesson Page Number Lesson Page Number PR #1 S1 Alg. 2.5 S189 PR 1.1 S5 Alg. 3.1 S206 PR 2.1 S16 Alg. 3.2 S215 PR 2.2 S21 Alg. 3.3 S220 PR

© 2015 CUNY Collaborative Programs Supported by the NYS Education Department S222

DRAFT – DO NOT DUPLICATE

ALGEBRA LESSON 3.3

Use the area models to complete the following. 9.

2 * (30 + 4) = ______

10.

2 * (3x + 4) = _____

11.

4 * (20 + 6) = _____

12.

4 * (2b + 6) = _____

The rectangles below are made of smaller rectangles. Fill in the missing parts as shown in the example. Then find the base, height, and area of the large rectangle. Note: The drawings are not to scale. Example:

Area = 7 (x + 2) (base x height) = 7x+14 (total) 13.

Area = 6 * (2x + 5) (base x height) = _____________ (total)

Page 172: 2016 – 2017 STUDENT HANDBOOK Version 2...Lesson Page Number Lesson Page Number PR #1 S1 Alg. 2.5 S189 PR 1.1 S5 Alg. 3.1 S206 PR 2.1 S16 Alg. 3.2 S215 PR 2.2 S21 Alg. 3.3 S220 PR

© 2015 CUNY Collaborative Programs Supported by the NYS Education Department S223

DRAFT – DO NOT DUPLICATE

ALGEBRA LESSON 3.3

Fill in the missing pieces in these multiplication problems.

14.

-6 (b + 5) = ________________

15.

-5 (3b + 5) = __________________

16.

7 (y – 2) = __________________

17.

7 (4k + 2) = __________________

Page 173: 2016 – 2017 STUDENT HANDBOOK Version 2...Lesson Page Number Lesson Page Number PR #1 S1 Alg. 2.5 S189 PR 1.1 S5 Alg. 3.1 S206 PR 2.1 S16 Alg. 3.2 S215 PR 2.2 S21 Alg. 3.3 S220 PR

© 2015 CUNY Collaborative Programs Supported by the NYS Education Department S224

DRAFT – DO NOT DUPLICATE

ALGEBRA LESSON 3.3

Fill in the missing pieces in these multiplication problems. 18.

(b – 5)(3c – 4) = _____________________ 19.

(2b – 5)(3c – 4) = _____________________

Page 174: 2016 – 2017 STUDENT HANDBOOK Version 2...Lesson Page Number Lesson Page Number PR #1 S1 Alg. 2.5 S189 PR 1.1 S5 Alg. 3.1 S206 PR 2.1 S16 Alg. 3.2 S215 PR 2.2 S21 Alg. 3.3 S220 PR

© 2015 CUNY Collaborative Programs Supported by the NYS Education Department S225

DRAFT – DO NOT DUPLICATE

ALGEBRA LESSON 3.3

Problem Set 1

Fill these in completely. 1.

32 * 101 = _____ + _____ + _____ + _____ = _______

2.

= __________________

3.

10 * 63= __________________

4.

5 * (30 + -1) = __________________

Page 175: 2016 – 2017 STUDENT HANDBOOK Version 2...Lesson Page Number Lesson Page Number PR #1 S1 Alg. 2.5 S189 PR 1.1 S5 Alg. 3.1 S206 PR 2.1 S16 Alg. 3.2 S215 PR 2.2 S21 Alg. 3.3 S220 PR

© 2015 CUNY Collaborative Programs Supported by the NYS Education Department S226

DRAFT – DO NOT DUPLICATE

ALGEBRA LESSON 3.3

5.

10 (y + 3) = __________________

6.

2 (4x – 3) = __________________

7.

h (7 – k) = __________________

8.

h (k – 7) = __________________

9.

(y – 3)(x + 6) = __________________

10.

(2a + 5)(b – 3) = __________________

Page 176: 2016 – 2017 STUDENT HANDBOOK Version 2...Lesson Page Number Lesson Page Number PR #1 S1 Alg. 2.5 S189 PR 1.1 S5 Alg. 3.1 S206 PR 2.1 S16 Alg. 3.2 S215 PR 2.2 S21 Alg. 3.3 S220 PR

© 2015 CUNY Collaborative Programs Supported by the NYS Education Department S227

DRAFT – DO NOT DUPLICATE

ALGEBRA LESSON 3.3

11. Use an area model (on paper or in your head) to solve the problems below:

a. 2 x 43 b. 31 x 52

12. What number am I?

• I am a multiple of 6 • I am a two digit number with t as my tens digit and u as my ones digit. • t=2u • I am between 52 and 82 but I am not a perfect square.

Page 177: 2016 – 2017 STUDENT HANDBOOK Version 2...Lesson Page Number Lesson Page Number PR #1 S1 Alg. 2.5 S189 PR 1.1 S5 Alg. 3.1 S206 PR 2.1 S16 Alg. 3.2 S215 PR 2.2 S21 Alg. 3.3 S220 PR

© 2015 CUNY Collaborative Programs Supported by the NYS Education Department S228

DRAFT – DO NOT DUPLICATE

ALGEBRA LESSON 3.4

Activity 1: Rewriting expressions1

One way to visualize distribution for a problem is by writing it out. For example, 5(x+1) can be written out as a repeated addition problem and then rearranged. 5(x + 1) = (x + 1) + (x + 1) + (x + 1) + (x + 1) + (x + 1) = x + x + x + x + x + 1 + 1 + 1 + 1 + 1 = 5x + 5

1. Use the method shown above to prove that:

a. 2(x + 6) = 2x + 12

b. 4(x + y) = 4x + 4y

c. 3(x2 + 2) = 3x2 + 6

1 Sources: Jacob Algebra I; TTA

Page 178: 2016 – 2017 STUDENT HANDBOOK Version 2...Lesson Page Number Lesson Page Number PR #1 S1 Alg. 2.5 S189 PR 1.1 S5 Alg. 3.1 S206 PR 2.1 S16 Alg. 3.2 S215 PR 2.2 S21 Alg. 3.3 S220 PR

© 2015 CUNY Collaborative Programs Supported by the NYS Education Department S229

DRAFT – DO NOT DUPLICATE

ALGEBRA LESSON 3.4

Another way to show the result is through an area model. 5(x+1) could be the area of a rectangle with sides 5 and (x+1).

2a. Express the area of the given rectangle. (We express a rectangle’s area as length x width.)

i. ii.

iii. iv.

2b. Use the distributive property (or its reverse) to express the areas above in alternative ways.

Page 179: 2016 – 2017 STUDENT HANDBOOK Version 2...Lesson Page Number Lesson Page Number PR #1 S1 Alg. 2.5 S189 PR 1.1 S5 Alg. 3.1 S206 PR 2.1 S16 Alg. 3.2 S215 PR 2.2 S21 Alg. 3.3 S220 PR

© 2015 CUNY Collaborative Programs Supported by the NYS Education Department S230

DRAFT – DO NOT DUPLICATE

ALGEBRA LESSON 3.4

Problem Set 1

1. Draw a rectangle for each of the following and rewrite the area of the rectangle in an expression without parentheses.

a) 3(w + 5) b) 2(x + y) c) 4(x2 + 2)

2. Use the method from the first example in Activity 1 to justify a version of the following without parentheses.

a) 3(w - 5) b) 2(x - y) c) 4(x2 + - 2) d) 3(x - 20)

Page 180: 2016 – 2017 STUDENT HANDBOOK Version 2...Lesson Page Number Lesson Page Number PR #1 S1 Alg. 2.5 S189 PR 1.1 S5 Alg. 3.1 S206 PR 2.1 S16 Alg. 3.2 S215 PR 2.2 S21 Alg. 3.3 S220 PR

© 2015 CUNY Collaborative Programs Supported by the NYS Education Department S231

DRAFT – DO NOT DUPLICATE

ALGEBRA LESSON 3.4

e) 3(-x - 20) f) 3(x + - 20) g) -3(x - 20)

You may be familiar with the results above as coming from the distributive property. By visualizing it with the area model, your work above is another way to see why it is true.

Page 181: 2016 – 2017 STUDENT HANDBOOK Version 2...Lesson Page Number Lesson Page Number PR #1 S1 Alg. 2.5 S189 PR 1.1 S5 Alg. 3.1 S206 PR 2.1 S16 Alg. 3.2 S215 PR 2.2 S21 Alg. 3.3 S220 PR

© 2015 CUNY Collaborative Programs Supported by the NYS Education Department S232

DRAFT – DO NOT DUPLICATE

ALGEBRA LESSON 3.4

Activity 2 We know that 2(x + y) = 2x + 2y. Is it also true that (x + y)2 = x2 + y2? To answer this it is helpful to consider the following cases.

1. Evaluate (x + y)2

a) if x is 2 and y is 0 b) if x is 0 and y is 6 c) if x is 3 and y is 4 d) if x is 9 and y is 1

2. Now evaluate x2 + y2

a) if x is 2 and y is 0 b) if x is 0 and y is 6 c) if x is 3 and y is 4 d) if x is 9 and y is 1.

3. What can you conclude about (x + y)2 and x2 + y2?

Might checking only two cases mislead you?

Page 182: 2016 – 2017 STUDENT HANDBOOK Version 2...Lesson Page Number Lesson Page Number PR #1 S1 Alg. 2.5 S189 PR 1.1 S5 Alg. 3.1 S206 PR 2.1 S16 Alg. 3.2 S215 PR 2.2 S21 Alg. 3.3 S220 PR

© 2015 CUNY Collaborative Programs Supported by the NYS Education Department S233

DRAFT – DO NOT DUPLICATE

ALGEBRA LESSON 3.4

4. Find the number of times you need to repeat an operation to get to the ending number. Keep track of

your trials and thinking. If you cannot get to the ending number, explain why.

Starting Number Repeated Operation Ending Number a. 7 Add 4 91 b. 1 Multiply by 2 2,048 c. 15 Subtract 5 -100 d. 0 Multiply by 8 0 e. 12 Divide by 2 3/32 f. 4 Multiply by -1 4 g. 7 Multiply by 7 more than 1000

Page 183: 2016 – 2017 STUDENT HANDBOOK Version 2...Lesson Page Number Lesson Page Number PR #1 S1 Alg. 2.5 S189 PR 1.1 S5 Alg. 3.1 S206 PR 2.1 S16 Alg. 3.2 S215 PR 2.2 S21 Alg. 3.3 S220 PR

© 2015 CUNY Collaborative Programs Supported by the NYS Education Department S241

DRAFT – DO NOT DUPLICATE

ALGEBRA LESSON 3.6

Activity 1 1. Each expression below is the left side of an equation. Write an expression for the right side so that x =

3 is a solution of the equation.

Hints: Think of the problem in a couple of ways. What do you want your last step to be? Would you want to use arrows and working backwards? Could there be more than one solution? Would simplifying what is given first help?

a. 2(x + 1)

b. 3x — 1

c. 7x + 5 + 2x — 1

d. Make up your own expression

Page 184: 2016 – 2017 STUDENT HANDBOOK Version 2...Lesson Page Number Lesson Page Number PR #1 S1 Alg. 2.5 S189 PR 1.1 S5 Alg. 3.1 S206 PR 2.1 S16 Alg. 3.2 S215 PR 2.2 S21 Alg. 3.3 S220 PR

© 2015 CUNY Collaborative Programs Supported by the NYS Education Department S242

DRAFT – DO NOT DUPLICATE

ALGEBRA LESSON 3.6

2. Re-do problems a thru c from the first problem by writing an expression for the right side so that x = 10.

Page 185: 2016 – 2017 STUDENT HANDBOOK Version 2...Lesson Page Number Lesson Page Number PR #1 S1 Alg. 2.5 S189 PR 1.1 S5 Alg. 3.1 S206 PR 2.1 S16 Alg. 3.2 S215 PR 2.2 S21 Alg. 3.3 S220 PR

© 2015 CUNY Collaborative Programs Supported by the NYS Education Department S243

DRAFT – DO NOT DUPLICATE

ALGEBRA LESSON 3.6

3. Solve each equation: a. 5d — 2 = 2d + 10 b. 5d — 2 = 3d + 10 c. 5d — 2 = 4d + 10 d. 5d — 2 = 5d + 10 e. 5d — 2 = 6d + 10 f. 5d — 2 = 7d + 10 g. 5d — 2 = 8d + 10 h. Which of the above equations has a different number of solutions? i. Describe any other pattern you see in the solutions from a-g.

Page 186: 2016 – 2017 STUDENT HANDBOOK Version 2...Lesson Page Number Lesson Page Number PR #1 S1 Alg. 2.5 S189 PR 1.1 S5 Alg. 3.1 S206 PR 2.1 S16 Alg. 3.2 S215 PR 2.2 S21 Alg. 3.3 S220 PR

© 2015 CUNY Collaborative Programs Supported by the NYS Education Department S244

DRAFT – DO NOT DUPLICATE

ALGEBRA LESSON 3.6

4. Solve each equation: a. 4c + 2 = 4c — 1 b. 4c + 2 = 4c

c. 4c + 2 = 4c + 1 d. 4c + 2 = 4c + 2 e. Which of the above equations has a different number of solutions? f. Describe any other pattern you see in the solutions

Page 187: 2016 – 2017 STUDENT HANDBOOK Version 2...Lesson Page Number Lesson Page Number PR #1 S1 Alg. 2.5 S189 PR 1.1 S5 Alg. 3.1 S206 PR 2.1 S16 Alg. 3.2 S215 PR 2.2 S21 Alg. 3.3 S220 PR

© 2015 CUNY Collaborative Programs Supported by the NYS Education Department S245

DRAFT – DO NOT DUPLICATE

ALGEBRA LESSON 3.6

Activity 2

Here are two basic moves in solving equations:

Assumption: The Basic Moves of Solving Equations

1. If you start with an equation and add the same number to each side, you do not change the solutions of that equation. In symbols, for any three numbers a, b, and c a = b if, and only if, a + c = b + c

2. If you start with an equation and multiply each side of the equation by the same nonzero number, you do not change the solutions of that equation. In symbols, for any three numbers a, b, and c, where c =/= 0 a = b, if an only if, ac = bc

1. Provide the steps for solving the equation below using the “basic moves” described above:

73x – 15 = 48x + 99

Page 188: 2016 – 2017 STUDENT HANDBOOK Version 2...Lesson Page Number Lesson Page Number PR #1 S1 Alg. 2.5 S189 PR 1.1 S5 Alg. 3.1 S206 PR 2.1 S16 Alg. 3.2 S215 PR 2.2 S21 Alg. 3.3 S220 PR

© 2015 CUNY Collaborative Programs Supported by the NYS Education Department S246

DRAFT – DO NOT DUPLICATE

ALGEBRA LESSON 3.6

2. Describe the one basic move you can use to transform the equation 3t + 13 = 5t + 6 into each given equation below:

a. 3t + 7 = 5t b. 2t + 13 = 4t + 6 c. 3t + 113 = 5t + 106 d. 13 = 2t + 6 e. - 2t + 13 = 6 f. 15t + 65 = 25t + 30

3. Choose three equations from the six above in number 2 and solve them. How do you explain the results?

Page 189: 2016 – 2017 STUDENT HANDBOOK Version 2...Lesson Page Number Lesson Page Number PR #1 S1 Alg. 2.5 S189 PR 1.1 S5 Alg. 3.1 S206 PR 2.1 S16 Alg. 3.2 S215 PR 2.2 S21 Alg. 3.3 S220 PR

© 2015 CUNY Collaborative Programs Supported by the NYS Education Department S247

DRAFT – DO NOT DUPLICATE

ALGEBRA LESSON 3.6

4. Solve the equation below first using the arrow method and then using the basic moves method. 4(x – 7) + 13 = 27

5. Determine whether the given solution is correct or whether it involves a mistake. If there is a mistake, explain the mistake.

a.

b.

c.

Page 190: 2016 – 2017 STUDENT HANDBOOK Version 2...Lesson Page Number Lesson Page Number PR #1 S1 Alg. 2.5 S189 PR 1.1 S5 Alg. 3.1 S206 PR 2.1 S16 Alg. 3.2 S215 PR 2.2 S21 Alg. 3.3 S220 PR

© 2015 CUNY Collaborative Programs Supported by the NYS Education Department S248

DRAFT – DO NOT DUPLICATE

ALGEBRA LESSON 3.6

Problem Set 21

1. Describe the one basic move you need to make in order to change the equation 2x + 17 = 36 into each equation below:

a. 2x + 13 = 32 b. 2x — 12 = 7 c. 2x = 19 d. 6x + 51 = 108 e. x + 8.5 = 18 f. 5x + 17 = 3x + 36 g. 2x — 19 = 0 h. x + 17 = 36 — x i. What can you predict will be true if you solve the eight equations above?

1 Source: (CME , page 155)

Page 191: 2016 – 2017 STUDENT HANDBOOK Version 2...Lesson Page Number Lesson Page Number PR #1 S1 Alg. 2.5 S189 PR 1.1 S5 Alg. 3.1 S206 PR 2.1 S16 Alg. 3.2 S215 PR 2.2 S21 Alg. 3.3 S220 PR

© 2015 CUNY Collaborative Programs Supported by the NYS Education Department S249

DRAFT – DO NOT DUPLICATE

ALGEBRA LESSON 3.6

2. Here is one of Maya the Magnificent’s number tricks: Choose any number. Multiply by 3. Add 5. Multiply by 4. Add 16. Divide by 12. Subtract the starting number. Maya says, “I know what your final answer is!” a. Let your starting number equal x. Record the result and simplify the expression after each step. b. Does Maya know for sure what your final answer is? Explain. 3a. For how many numbers n is (5n + 12) equal to (5n + 13)? Explain. 3b. Solve the equation 5x + 12 = 5x + 13. What are your results? c. What does the resulting equation tell you about the solutions to the starting equation?

Page 192: 2016 – 2017 STUDENT HANDBOOK Version 2...Lesson Page Number Lesson Page Number PR #1 S1 Alg. 2.5 S189 PR 1.1 S5 Alg. 3.1 S206 PR 2.1 S16 Alg. 3.2 S215 PR 2.2 S21 Alg. 3.3 S220 PR

© 2015 CUNY Collaborative Programs Supported by the NYS Education Department S250

DRAFT – DO NOT DUPLICATE

ALGEBRA LESSON 3.6

4. STANDARDIZED TEST PREP: Solve the equation 17 — (5 — p) = 2(5p — 16). What is the value of p? a. b. 4 c. d. 5

5. Solve the equation 5(x+1) = 5x+5. What does your result indicate?

Page 193: 2016 – 2017 STUDENT HANDBOOK Version 2...Lesson Page Number Lesson Page Number PR #1 S1 Alg. 2.5 S189 PR 1.1 S5 Alg. 3.1 S206 PR 2.1 S16 Alg. 3.2 S215 PR 2.2 S21 Alg. 3.3 S220 PR

© 2015 CUNY Collaborative Programs Supported by the NYS Education Department S251

DRAFT – DO NOT DUPLICATE

ALGEBRA LESSON 3.6

Activity 3

1. Solve each equation. a. 5x = 2x + 21 b. 5(x — 90) = 2(x — 90) + 21 c. 5(x — 100) = 2(x — 100) + 21 d. 5(x — 8) = 2(x — 8) + 21 e. 5(x — 40) = 2(x — 40) + 21 f. 5(x + 100) = 2(x + 100) + 21

g. What is a pattern in your calculations and the result?

Page 194: 2016 – 2017 STUDENT HANDBOOK Version 2...Lesson Page Number Lesson Page Number PR #1 S1 Alg. 2.5 S189 PR 1.1 S5 Alg. 3.1 S206 PR 2.1 S16 Alg. 3.2 S215 PR 2.2 S21 Alg. 3.3 S220 PR

© 2015 CUNY Collaborative Programs Supported by the NYS Education Department S252

DRAFT – DO NOT DUPLICATE

ALGEBRA LESSON 3.6

Activity 4: Multi-step to Two-step Multi-step to Two-step A multi-step process can be thought of as a two-step process in disguise. Below is an example of how a

multi-step process can be expressed as a simple two-step process using the distributive property:

Consider the expression: 3(2x + 8) – 12 Distribute the 3 by multiplying: 3(2x) + 3(8) – 12 Simplify multiplications 6x + 24 – 12 Combine 24 – 12 to get 12 6x + 12

So we have shown that the multistep process 3(2x + 8) – 12 is really equivalent to 6x + 12. Use this in

working on the problems below.

1. Simply each expression: a. x + 2x + 3x + 4x + 5x — 12x d. x + 2x + 3x + 4x + 5x — 15x b. x + 2x + 3x + 4x + 5x — 13x e. x + 2x + 3x + 4x + 5x — 16x c. x + 2x + 3x + 4x + 5x — 14x f. x + 2x + 3x + 4x + 5x — 17x

Page 195: 2016 – 2017 STUDENT HANDBOOK Version 2...Lesson Page Number Lesson Page Number PR #1 S1 Alg. 2.5 S189 PR 1.1 S5 Alg. 3.1 S206 PR 2.1 S16 Alg. 3.2 S215 PR 2.2 S21 Alg. 3.3 S220 PR

© 2015 CUNY Collaborative Programs Supported by the NYS Education Department S253

DRAFT – DO NOT DUPLICATE

ALGEBRA LESSON 3.6

2. Use the distributive property to convert the multistep processes below into two-step processes. a. y = 3(5x + 4) — 6 b. y = 2(2x + 12) + 15 c. y = 5(x + 3) — 9 d. y = 8(10x — 3) — 12

3. Simplify the following into two-step expressions. a. 4(x + 2) + 11 b. x + 2(5 + 2x) c. 9(2x — 5) — 3 d. 5(x — 1) + 8(x + 1)

Page 196: 2016 – 2017 STUDENT HANDBOOK Version 2...Lesson Page Number Lesson Page Number PR #1 S1 Alg. 2.5 S189 PR 1.1 S5 Alg. 3.1 S206 PR 2.1 S16 Alg. 3.2 S215 PR 2.2 S21 Alg. 3.3 S220 PR

© 2015 CUNY Collaborative Programs Supported by the NYS Education Department S254

DRAFT – DO NOT DUPLICATE

ALGEBRA LESSON 3.6

e. 7(x + 1) + (7x + 7) f. 7(x + 1) + (—1)(7x + 7)

4. Simplify the following: a. 2(x + 4) + 7 b. 13 + 3(1 + 2x) c. 3(2x — 5) — 8 d. 4(x + 3) + 7(x + 3) e. 6(3 — 2x) — 3(x + 1) f. 4(x — 7) — 2(2 — 3x)

Page 197: 2016 – 2017 STUDENT HANDBOOK Version 2...Lesson Page Number Lesson Page Number PR #1 S1 Alg. 2.5 S189 PR 1.1 S5 Alg. 3.1 S206 PR 2.1 S16 Alg. 3.2 S215 PR 2.2 S21 Alg. 3.3 S220 PR

© 2015 CUNY Collaborative Programs Supported by the NYS Education Department S255

DRAFT – DO NOT DUPLICATE

ALGEBRA LESSON 3.6

Exit Ticket

Solve the given equation using the two “basic” moves where appropriate. Explain your steps in solving the equation.

-3(x + 2) + 6 = x - 40

Page 198: 2016 – 2017 STUDENT HANDBOOK Version 2...Lesson Page Number Lesson Page Number PR #1 S1 Alg. 2.5 S189 PR 1.1 S5 Alg. 3.1 S206 PR 2.1 S16 Alg. 3.2 S215 PR 2.2 S21 Alg. 3.3 S220 PR

© 2015 CUNY Collaborative Programs Supported by the NYS Education Department S256

DRAFT – DO NOT DUPLICATE

ALGEBRA LESSON 3.7

Activity 11: If this mobile balances…

If the mobile in the first column balances, does the mobile in the second column also balance? How do you know?

This mobile DOES BALANCE. Will this one balance? How do you know A

B

C

D

1 Transition to Algebra, Educational Development Center, 2014.

Page 199: 2016 – 2017 STUDENT HANDBOOK Version 2...Lesson Page Number Lesson Page Number PR #1 S1 Alg. 2.5 S189 PR 1.1 S5 Alg. 3.1 S206 PR 2.1 S16 Alg. 3.2 S215 PR 2.2 S21 Alg. 3.3 S220 PR

© 2015 CUNY Collaborative Programs Supported by the NYS Education Department S257

DRAFT – DO NOT DUPLICATE

ALGEBRA LESSON 3.7

E

F

G

H

Page 200: 2016 – 2017 STUDENT HANDBOOK Version 2...Lesson Page Number Lesson Page Number PR #1 S1 Alg. 2.5 S189 PR 1.1 S5 Alg. 3.1 S206 PR 2.1 S16 Alg. 3.2 S215 PR 2.2 S21 Alg. 3.3 S220 PR

© 2015 CUNY Collaborative Programs Supported by the NYS Education Department S258

DRAFT – DO NOT DUPLICATE

ALGEBRA LESSON 3.7

Activity 2

In each problem, the first mobile is balanced. Figure out whether or not the second mobile must balance and why. This mobile DOES BALANCE. Will this one balance? How do you know

1

2

3

4

Page 201: 2016 – 2017 STUDENT HANDBOOK Version 2...Lesson Page Number Lesson Page Number PR #1 S1 Alg. 2.5 S189 PR 1.1 S5 Alg. 3.1 S206 PR 2.1 S16 Alg. 3.2 S215 PR 2.2 S21 Alg. 3.3 S220 PR

© 2015 CUNY Collaborative Programs Supported by the NYS Education Department S259

DRAFT – DO NOT DUPLICATE

ALGEBRA LESSON 3.7

Translate each mobile into an algebraic expression. Use c for the circle, s for the square, and m for the moon.

5.

6.

7.

8. Which of the following moves would keep the mobile balanced?

a. Add a triangle to both sides b. Add 5 droplets to both sides c. Move all the triangles to the right side d. Switch the droplet and the circle e. Add a circle to the right side f. Remove one triangle from both sides

Page 202: 2016 – 2017 STUDENT HANDBOOK Version 2...Lesson Page Number Lesson Page Number PR #1 S1 Alg. 2.5 S189 PR 1.1 S5 Alg. 3.1 S206 PR 2.1 S16 Alg. 3.2 S215 PR 2.2 S21 Alg. 3.3 S220 PR

© 2015 CUNY Collaborative Programs Supported by the NYS Education Department S260

DRAFT – DO NOT DUPLICATE

ALGEBRA LESSON 3.7

14. Look over your answers. What are moves allowed on a mobile? How do they compare to what is allowed with an equation? What are moves you can’t make?

Page 203: 2016 – 2017 STUDENT HANDBOOK Version 2...Lesson Page Number Lesson Page Number PR #1 S1 Alg. 2.5 S189 PR 1.1 S5 Alg. 3.1 S206 PR 2.1 S16 Alg. 3.2 S215 PR 2.2 S21 Alg. 3.3 S220 PR

© 2015 CUNY Collaborative Programs Supported by the NYS Education Department S261

DRAFT – DO NOT DUPLICATE

ALGEBRA LESSON 3.7

Problem Set 1

1. Which of the following moves would keep the mobile balanced? Circle all that apply

a. Add 3 circles to the right side b. Add 2 rhombuses to both sides

c. Move the shapes so that all 5 circles are on the left side and both squares are on the right side

d. Subtract a circle from both sides e. Cross out both squares

f. Subtract 3 circles from the left side

2. Which of the following moves would keep the mobile balanced? Circle all that apply

a. Add 4 drops to both sides b. Remove a square from both sides

c. Move all the buckets to the left side and the droplet to the right side

d. Add a bucket to both sides e. Switch the rhombus and the circle

f. Switch the rhombus and the droplet

3. Which of the following equations must also be balanced? Circle all that apply

a. c + s + s + c = m + m + c b. 2s + c = 2m

c. 6c + 6s = 6m + 3c d. 2m + c = c + 2s + c

e. 3s + 2c = 2m + c + s f. 3c = 2m + 2s

Page 204: 2016 – 2017 STUDENT HANDBOOK Version 2...Lesson Page Number Lesson Page Number PR #1 S1 Alg. 2.5 S189 PR 1.1 S5 Alg. 3.1 S206 PR 2.1 S16 Alg. 3.2 S215 PR 2.2 S21 Alg. 3.3 S220 PR

© 2015 CUNY Collaborative Programs Supported by the NYS Education Department S262

DRAFT – DO NOT DUPLICATE

ALGEBRA LESSON 3.7

4.

5. 6.

7.

Page 205: 2016 – 2017 STUDENT HANDBOOK Version 2...Lesson Page Number Lesson Page Number PR #1 S1 Alg. 2.5 S189 PR 1.1 S5 Alg. 3.1 S206 PR 2.1 S16 Alg. 3.2 S215 PR 2.2 S21 Alg. 3.3 S220 PR

© 2015 CUNY Collaborative Programs Supported by the NYS Education Department S263

DRAFT – DO NOT DUPLICATE

ALGEBRA LESSON 3.7

Activity 3 What is your first step?

Page 206: 2016 – 2017 STUDENT HANDBOOK Version 2...Lesson Page Number Lesson Page Number PR #1 S1 Alg. 2.5 S189 PR 1.1 S5 Alg. 3.1 S206 PR 2.1 S16 Alg. 3.2 S215 PR 2.2 S21 Alg. 3.3 S220 PR

© 2015 CUNY Collaborative Programs Supported by the NYS Education Department S264

DRAFT – DO NOT DUPLICATE

ALGEBRA LESSON 3.7

Activity 4

1-4. Solve both the mobile and the equation and check that you get the same answer:

Page 207: 2016 – 2017 STUDENT HANDBOOK Version 2...Lesson Page Number Lesson Page Number PR #1 S1 Alg. 2.5 S189 PR 1.1 S5 Alg. 3.1 S206 PR 2.1 S16 Alg. 3.2 S215 PR 2.2 S21 Alg. 3.3 S220 PR

© 2015 CUNY Collaborative Programs Supported by the NYS Education Department S265

DRAFT – DO NOT DUPLICATE

ALGEBRA LESSON 3.7

5. Which of the following would work as a first step to solving this equation (use s for square).

a. Subtract s from both sides b. Subtract 9 from both sides c. Add 12 and 27 so the right side becomes 39 + s d. Move all the squares to the left and all the numbers to the

right to get 5s = 48 e. Combine all the squares on the left side to get 4s + 9 = 12 +

27 + s

6. Read the box below and complete the questions that follow.

Algebraic Habits of Mind: Using Tools Strategically • Mobiles are useful tools for visualizing balance. They help make sense of algebra since solving

algebra problems always requires the equation to stay balanced. • Mobiles are not always useful, however. For instance, how would you represent ½ or -5 on a

mobile? • You can’t draw a mobile for every equation. But every equation balances. And anything you do to

an equation has to keep the balance.

a. Create a problem with a negative number and show how you might solve it. b. Solve the following: Donald uses a clicker to help him figure out costs. Every time a student walks into

the gym, he clicks. Every student will receive a coupon for a burger costing $4.59, and Donald buys these at face value. If there were 28 students that came in, how much will Donald need for all for all of the coupons?

Page 208: 2016 – 2017 STUDENT HANDBOOK Version 2...Lesson Page Number Lesson Page Number PR #1 S1 Alg. 2.5 S189 PR 1.1 S5 Alg. 3.1 S206 PR 2.1 S16 Alg. 3.2 S215 PR 2.2 S21 Alg. 3.3 S220 PR

© 2015 CUNY Collaborative Programs Supported by the NYS Education Department S266

DRAFT – DO NOT DUPLICATE

ALGEBRA LESSON 3.7

Page 209: 2016 – 2017 STUDENT HANDBOOK Version 2...Lesson Page Number Lesson Page Number PR #1 S1 Alg. 2.5 S189 PR 1.1 S5 Alg. 3.1 S206 PR 2.1 S16 Alg. 3.2 S215 PR 2.2 S21 Alg. 3.3 S220 PR

© 2015 CUNY Collaborative Programs Supported by the NYS Education Department S267

DRAFT – DO NOT DUPLICATE

ALGEBRA LESSON 3.7

Problem Set 2

1.

2.

Page 210: 2016 – 2017 STUDENT HANDBOOK Version 2...Lesson Page Number Lesson Page Number PR #1 S1 Alg. 2.5 S189 PR 1.1 S5 Alg. 3.1 S206 PR 2.1 S16 Alg. 3.2 S215 PR 2.2 S21 Alg. 3.3 S220 PR

© 2015 CUNY Collaborative Programs Supported by the NYS Education Department S268

DRAFT – DO NOT DUPLICATE

ALGEBRA LESSON 3.7

3. a. Which of the following would work as a first step to solving this equation:

10 + 3d + 2 = 6 + 5d

i. Add 10 + 2 = 12 on the left ii. Subtract 3d from both sides iii. Subtract 6 from both sides iv. Subtract 2 from both sides

b. Solve the equation for d.

4. Think of a number

Directions Draw it Algebraic Expression

Ian Maria Jacob

Start with a number

Multiply by 3

Add 5 3b + 5 29

Multiply by 2 -2

Subtract 8 20

5. Complete the number line below by filling in the missing spaces. The number line is drawn to scale.

Page 211: 2016 – 2017 STUDENT HANDBOOK Version 2...Lesson Page Number Lesson Page Number PR #1 S1 Alg. 2.5 S189 PR 1.1 S5 Alg. 3.1 S206 PR 2.1 S16 Alg. 3.2 S215 PR 2.2 S21 Alg. 3.3 S220 PR

© 2015 CUNY Collaborative Programs Supported by the NYS Education Department S269

DRAFT – DO NOT DUPLICATE

ALGEBRA LESSON 3.7

6. Use an area model to multiply these expressions.

a. b.

c. d.

7. Solve the given Mystery Grid. Explain why you can be certain of your answers to various boxes.

Page 212: 2016 – 2017 STUDENT HANDBOOK Version 2...Lesson Page Number Lesson Page Number PR #1 S1 Alg. 2.5 S189 PR 1.1 S5 Alg. 3.1 S206 PR 2.1 S16 Alg. 3.2 S215 PR 2.2 S21 Alg. 3.3 S220 PR

© 2015 CUNY Collaborative Programs Supported by the NYS Education Department S270

DRAFT – DO NOT DUPLICATE

ALGEBRA LESSON 3.7

Exit Ticket Which of the following would work as a first step to solving this equation:

5c + 4 = 2c + 18 + c

a. On the right side, turn 2c + c into 3c b. Subtract 2 from both sides c. Subtract 3c from both sides d. Combine all the c’s and all the numbers to get 8c = 22 e. Subtract c from the right and add it to the left side to get 6c + 4 = 2c + 18 f. Subtract c from the left side and move it to the right to get the same number of c’s on both sides.

4c + 4 = 4c + 18

Page 213: 2016 – 2017 STUDENT HANDBOOK Version 2...Lesson Page Number Lesson Page Number PR #1 S1 Alg. 2.5 S189 PR 1.1 S5 Alg. 3.1 S206 PR 2.1 S16 Alg. 3.2 S215 PR 2.2 S21 Alg. 3.3 S220 PR

© 2015 CUNY Collaborative Programs Supported by the NYS Education Department S271

DRAFT – DO NOT DUPLICATE

ALGEBRA LESSON 3.8

Activity 1

1. Create expressions for each of the following:

a. 10 is less than x

b. 10 less than x

c. x less than 10

d. x is less than 10

Let x = 50. How can you think about and evaluate a-d above? Which statements become impossible?

Fill in the missing information. 2.

Instructions Result Start with a number c 3c (3c – 6) Multiply by 4 4(3c – 6) 4(3c – 6) + 13

3.

Page 214: 2016 – 2017 STUDENT HANDBOOK Version 2...Lesson Page Number Lesson Page Number PR #1 S1 Alg. 2.5 S189 PR 1.1 S5 Alg. 3.1 S206 PR 2.1 S16 Alg. 3.2 S215 PR 2.2 S21 Alg. 3.3 S220 PR

© 2015 CUNY Collaborative Programs Supported by the NYS Education Department S272

DRAFT – DO NOT DUPLICATE

ALGEBRA LESSON 3.8

Instructions Result

Start with a number m

Add 2

Multiply by 7 7(

Divide by 2 7( ) 2

Subtract 8 from the result 7( ) 2

4. Instructions Result

Start g

g - 3

Divide by 4 g – 3 4

5. Instructions Result

Start with a number v

Multiply by 3

Subtract the result from 8

Multiply that by 2 (use parentheses)

Add 11

*Test out the language to see the difference between “Subtract from 8” and “Subtract 8”

Page 215: 2016 – 2017 STUDENT HANDBOOK Version 2...Lesson Page Number Lesson Page Number PR #1 S1 Alg. 2.5 S189 PR 1.1 S5 Alg. 3.1 S206 PR 2.1 S16 Alg. 3.2 S215 PR 2.2 S21 Alg. 3.3 S220 PR

© 2015 CUNY Collaborative Programs Supported by the NYS Education Department S273

DRAFT – DO NOT DUPLICATE

ALGEBRA LESSON 3.8

6. Answer the problems below.

7.

Instructions Result

Start n

Add 11

8.

Instructions

Result

Start with a number z

Subtract 3

Multiply by 4

Add 10

Divide by 5

Page 216: 2016 – 2017 STUDENT HANDBOOK Version 2...Lesson Page Number Lesson Page Number PR #1 S1 Alg. 2.5 S189 PR 1.1 S5 Alg. 3.1 S206 PR 2.1 S16 Alg. 3.2 S215 PR 2.2 S21 Alg. 3.3 S220 PR

© 2015 CUNY Collaborative Programs Supported by the NYS Education Department S274

DRAFT – DO NOT DUPLICATE

ALGEBRA LESSON 3.8

Problem Set 1

Fill in the missing information. 1.

Instructions Result

r

r + 3

Divide 23 by the result

* Test the language to see the difference between “Divide 23 by the result” and “Divide by 23” 2.

Instructions Result

j

Divide 30 by the result

Subtract 24

Multiply by 6

Add 72

Page 217: 2016 – 2017 STUDENT HANDBOOK Version 2...Lesson Page Number Lesson Page Number PR #1 S1 Alg. 2.5 S189 PR 1.1 S5 Alg. 3.1 S206 PR 2.1 S16 Alg. 3.2 S215 PR 2.2 S21 Alg. 3.3 S220 PR

© 2015 CUNY Collaborative Programs Supported by the NYS Education Department S275

DRAFT – DO NOT DUPLICATE

ALGEBRA LESSON 3.8

3. Work with a partner to place the following numbers on the number-line:

1.5, 1.05, 0.5, 0.05, , , , , ,

4.

5. Write an algebraic expression corresponding with the area model below.

Page 218: 2016 – 2017 STUDENT HANDBOOK Version 2...Lesson Page Number Lesson Page Number PR #1 S1 Alg. 2.5 S189 PR 1.1 S5 Alg. 3.1 S206 PR 2.1 S16 Alg. 3.2 S215 PR 2.2 S21 Alg. 3.3 S220 PR

© 2015 CUNY Collaborative Programs Supported by the NYS Education Department S276

DRAFT – DO NOT DUPLICATE

ALGEBRA LESSON 3.8

6.

Page 219: 2016 – 2017 STUDENT HANDBOOK Version 2...Lesson Page Number Lesson Page Number PR #1 S1 Alg. 2.5 S189 PR 1.1 S5 Alg. 3.1 S206 PR 2.1 S16 Alg. 3.2 S215 PR 2.2 S21 Alg. 3.3 S220 PR

© 2015 CUNY Collaborative Programs Supported by the NYS Education Department S277

DRAFT – DO NOT DUPLICATE

ALGEBRA LESSON 3.8

Activity 2 Blank Start with a Number Table. (Instructions from teacher)

Instructions Result

Start with a number n

Page 220: 2016 – 2017 STUDENT HANDBOOK Version 2...Lesson Page Number Lesson Page Number PR #1 S1 Alg. 2.5 S189 PR 1.1 S5 Alg. 3.1 S206 PR 2.1 S16 Alg. 3.2 S215 PR 2.2 S21 Alg. 3.3 S220 PR

© 2015 CUNY Collaborative Programs Supported by the NYS Education Department S278

DRAFT – DO NOT DUPLICATE

ALGEBRA LESSON 3.8

Activity 3 Arrange the steps below to create the correct sequence that will produce the final result (in the last row). The steps for both problems 1 and 2 are listed below. Add 12 Divide by 5 Multiply by 7 Subtract 3 1.

Instructions Result

Start with a number

w

Page 221: 2016 – 2017 STUDENT HANDBOOK Version 2...Lesson Page Number Lesson Page Number PR #1 S1 Alg. 2.5 S189 PR 1.1 S5 Alg. 3.1 S206 PR 2.1 S16 Alg. 3.2 S215 PR 2.2 S21 Alg. 3.3 S220 PR

© 2015 CUNY Collaborative Programs Supported by the NYS Education Department S279

DRAFT – DO NOT DUPLICATE

ALGEBRA LESSON 3.8

Add 12 Divide by 5 Multiply by 7 Subtract 3 2.

Instructions Result

Start with a number

d

The steps for problems 3 and 4 are listed below. Divide by 7 Subtract 31 Add 4 Multiply by 5 3.

Instructions Result

Start with a number m

4.

Page 222: 2016 – 2017 STUDENT HANDBOOK Version 2...Lesson Page Number Lesson Page Number PR #1 S1 Alg. 2.5 S189 PR 1.1 S5 Alg. 3.1 S206 PR 2.1 S16 Alg. 3.2 S215 PR 2.2 S21 Alg. 3.3 S220 PR

© 2015 CUNY Collaborative Programs Supported by the NYS Education Department S280

DRAFT – DO NOT DUPLICATE

ALGEBRA LESSON 3.8

Instructions Result Start with a number f

For 5-7 Write out the steps needed to arrive at the algebraic expression 5. 6. 7.

__________________

___________________

___________________

__________________

___________________

___________________

__________________

___________________

___________________

__________________

___________________

___________________

Page 223: 2016 – 2017 STUDENT HANDBOOK Version 2...Lesson Page Number Lesson Page Number PR #1 S1 Alg. 2.5 S189 PR 1.1 S5 Alg. 3.1 S206 PR 2.1 S16 Alg. 3.2 S215 PR 2.2 S21 Alg. 3.3 S220 PR

© 2015 CUNY Collaborative Programs Supported by the NYS Education Department S281

DRAFT – DO NOT DUPLICATE

ALGEBRA LESSON 3.8

Match each algebraic expression on the left with the set of directions on the right. (Hint: Use B twice)8. 9. 10. 11.

A. Start with a number Multiply by 5 Divide by 3 Add 14 B. Start with a number Multiply by 5 Add 14 Divide by 3 C. Start with a number Add 14 Multiply by 5 Divide by 3 D. None of the above

12. 13. 14. 15. 16.

E. Start with a number Subtract 2 Multiply by -7 Add 11 Divide by 4 F. Start with a number Subtract 2 Multiply by -7 Divide by 4 Add 11 G. Start with a number Multiply by -7 Subtract 2 Divide by 4 Add 11 H. None of the above

Page 224: 2016 – 2017 STUDENT HANDBOOK Version 2...Lesson Page Number Lesson Page Number PR #1 S1 Alg. 2.5 S189 PR 1.1 S5 Alg. 3.1 S206 PR 2.1 S16 Alg. 3.2 S215 PR 2.2 S21 Alg. 3.3 S220 PR

© 2015 CUNY Collaborative Programs Supported by the NYS Education Department S282

DRAFT – DO NOT DUPLICATE

ALGEBRA LESSON 3.8

Problem Set 2 Write an algebraic expression to match the given sequence of steps. 1. Start with a number. Multiply by 4. Add 8. Divide by 3.

2. Start with a number. Add 5. Divide by 12. Subtract 18. Multiply by -6

3-6. Complete the blanks on each of the following:

3.

4.

5.

6.

Page 225: 2016 – 2017 STUDENT HANDBOOK Version 2...Lesson Page Number Lesson Page Number PR #1 S1 Alg. 2.5 S189 PR 1.1 S5 Alg. 3.1 S206 PR 2.1 S16 Alg. 3.2 S215 PR 2.2 S21 Alg. 3.3 S220 PR

© 2015 CUNY Collaborative Programs Supported by the NYS Education Department S283

DRAFT – DO NOT DUPLICATE

ALGEBRA LESSON 3.8

7. 8.

(4y – 8)(7 – y) = (x + 4)(x + 5) = 9. Complete the puzzle by using each numbers 1 through 5 only onetime in each column and row. Your

clues are in each section bordered by a thick line: The numbers in those sections will be combined using the given arithmetic sign (+, -, x, ÷) in order to equal the resulting number that is provided. For example, in the upper-left corner, the clue is “40, x” and you have 3 squares (the corner square shares a row with a second square and a column with the third square). What combinations of three numbers would fit this scenario? How about 4 x 5 x 1? Or 2 x 2 x 5, which would work only if the 5 is in the corner square so that the two 2s are in separate rows and columns.

Page 226: 2016 – 2017 STUDENT HANDBOOK Version 2...Lesson Page Number Lesson Page Number PR #1 S1 Alg. 2.5 S189 PR 1.1 S5 Alg. 3.1 S206 PR 2.1 S16 Alg. 3.2 S215 PR 2.2 S21 Alg. 3.3 S220 PR
Page 227: 2016 – 2017 STUDENT HANDBOOK Version 2...Lesson Page Number Lesson Page Number PR #1 S1 Alg. 2.5 S189 PR 1.1 S5 Alg. 3.1 S206 PR 2.1 S16 Alg. 3.2 S215 PR 2.2 S21 Alg. 3.3 S220 PR

© 2015 CUNY Collaborative Programs Supported by the NYS Education Department S284

DRAFT – DO NOT DUPLICATE

ALGEBRA LESSON 3.8

Activity 4

Sort each of the following expressions by the indicated final instruction. For example, in expression A, the final instruction is “Multiply by 4.”

Page 228: 2016 – 2017 STUDENT HANDBOOK Version 2...Lesson Page Number Lesson Page Number PR #1 S1 Alg. 2.5 S189 PR 1.1 S5 Alg. 3.1 S206 PR 2.1 S16 Alg. 3.2 S215 PR 2.2 S21 Alg. 3.3 S220 PR
Page 229: 2016 – 2017 STUDENT HANDBOOK Version 2...Lesson Page Number Lesson Page Number PR #1 S1 Alg. 2.5 S189 PR 1.1 S5 Alg. 3.1 S206 PR 2.1 S16 Alg. 3.2 S215 PR 2.2 S21 Alg. 3.3 S220 PR

© 2015 CUNY Collaborative Programs Supported by the NYS Education Department S286

DRAFT – DO NOT DUPLICATE

ALGEBRA LESSON 3.8

Activity 4: Alternative Problems

7(8m – 6)

(m + 3)/9 – 7

(7m + 6)/8

7(m/3 + 8)

7(m + 3) + 8

6(4m + 1) – 7

(m – 7)/3 + 8

(7(m – 2) + 6) / 8

2 – 8m

8 + 6/(m – 2)

(2 – (m + 8))/6 – 7

7(8 + (2m + 6)/3)

2 – 7(m + 9)

6 / (7(m + 8) – 7)

Page 230: 2016 – 2017 STUDENT HANDBOOK Version 2...Lesson Page Number Lesson Page Number PR #1 S1 Alg. 2.5 S189 PR 1.1 S5 Alg. 3.1 S206 PR 2.1 S16 Alg. 3.2 S215 PR 2.2 S21 Alg. 3.3 S220 PR

© 2015 CUNY Collaborative Programs Supported by the NYS Education Department S287

DRAFT – DO NOT DUPLICATE

ALGEBRA LESSON 3.8

Activity 5

Can you figure out the last step? For problems 1 and 2 below, state what the last instruction had to be. Write the last instruction for each Start with a Number problem 1.

Instructions Result

Start with a number d

2. Instructions Result

Start with a number z

Page 231: 2016 – 2017 STUDENT HANDBOOK Version 2...Lesson Page Number Lesson Page Number PR #1 S1 Alg. 2.5 S189 PR 1.1 S5 Alg. 3.1 S206 PR 2.1 S16 Alg. 3.2 S215 PR 2.2 S21 Alg. 3.3 S220 PR

© 2015 CUNY Collaborative Programs Supported by the NYS Education Department S288

DRAFT – DO NOT DUPLICATE

ALGEBRA LESSON 3.8

For 3-6 write the last instruction for the Start with a Number problems and use the words “the result” to refer to the rest of the expression. Remember to think about the language for subtraction and division (“from/by the result” and “the result from/by …”)

Example: ___Divide 15 by the result____

3. 9 – 4k __________________________

4. 3(7r – 5) – 4 __________________________

5. 3 + 6(y – 7) __________________________

6. __________________________

7. Make up an expression with the variable m and with at least 3 steps and with the final instruction being “Add 25 to the result.”

Page 232: 2016 – 2017 STUDENT HANDBOOK Version 2...Lesson Page Number Lesson Page Number PR #1 S1 Alg. 2.5 S189 PR 1.1 S5 Alg. 3.1 S206 PR 2.1 S16 Alg. 3.2 S215 PR 2.2 S21 Alg. 3.3 S220 PR

© 2015 CUNY Collaborative Programs Supported by the NYS Education Department S289

DRAFT – DO NOT DUPLICATE

ALGEBRA LESSON 3.8

Activity 6 1-18 Match the expression on the left with the description on the right

1. 10 - h

2. h - 10

3. h + 10

4. h < 10

5. 10 < h

a. 10 less than h

b. 10 more than h

c. h is less than 10

d. h less than 10

e. 10 is less than h

6. 6 – r2

7. (r – 6)2

8. r2 – 6

9. (r – 6)2

a. Subtract 6 from r and then square the result

b. Square r, then subtract 6

c. Square r, then subtract the result from 6

d. Subtract r from 6, then square the result

10. 2s – 8

11. s – 8

12. 8 – 2s

13. 8 – s

14. s – 16

a. Subtract 6 from r and then square the result

b. Square r, then subtract 6

c. Square r, then subtract the result from 6

d. Subtract r from 6, then square the result

Page 233: 2016 – 2017 STUDENT HANDBOOK Version 2...Lesson Page Number Lesson Page Number PR #1 S1 Alg. 2.5 S189 PR 1.1 S5 Alg. 3.1 S206 PR 2.1 S16 Alg. 3.2 S215 PR 2.2 S21 Alg. 3.3 S220 PR

© 2015 CUNY Collaborative Programs Supported by the NYS Education Department S290

DRAFT – DO NOT DUPLICATE

ALGEBRA LESSON 3.8

15. 25/(c + 4)

16. (25/c) + 4

17. (c/25) + 4

18. (c + 4)/25

a. Divide 25 by c, then add 4 to the result

b. Divide c by 25, then add 4 to the result

c. Add 4 to c, then divide by 25

d. Add 4 to c, then divide 25 by the result

Write the expression for the following statements: 19. Four less than twice some number n. 20. Four minus twice some number n. 21. Subtract 3 from half some number n. 22. One less than the square of some number. 23. Sujiter’s age is twice that of his sister. If Sujiter is 16, how old is his sister? 24. Prasanna’s age is twice that of his brother. If his brother is 16, then how old is Prasanna?

Page 234: 2016 – 2017 STUDENT HANDBOOK Version 2...Lesson Page Number Lesson Page Number PR #1 S1 Alg. 2.5 S189 PR 1.1 S5 Alg. 3.1 S206 PR 2.1 S16 Alg. 3.2 S215 PR 2.2 S21 Alg. 3.3 S220 PR

© 2015 CUNY Collaborative Programs Supported by the NYS Education Department S291

DRAFT – DO NOT DUPLICATE

ALGEBRA LESSON 3.8

Problem Set 3 Write the last instruction for each Start with a Number problem. Use the words “the result” to refer to the rest of the expression.

1. ____________________________

2. ____________________________

3. ____________________________

4. ____________________________

5. 7(n + 1) ____________________________

6. ____________________________

7. ____________________________

8. ____________________________

Page 235: 2016 – 2017 STUDENT HANDBOOK Version 2...Lesson Page Number Lesson Page Number PR #1 S1 Alg. 2.5 S189 PR 1.1 S5 Alg. 3.1 S206 PR 2.1 S16 Alg. 3.2 S215 PR 2.2 S21 Alg. 3.3 S220 PR

© 2015 CUNY Collaborative Programs Supported by the NYS Education Department S292

DRAFT – DO NOT DUPLICATE

ALGEBRA LESSON 3.8

Match the algebraic expression on the left with the description on the right

A.

B.

C.

D.

9. Add 40 to x, then divide the result by 16

10. Divide x by 16, then add 40 to the result

11. Divide 16 by x, then add 40 to the result

12. Add 40 to x, then divide 16 by the result

Page 236: 2016 – 2017 STUDENT HANDBOOK Version 2...Lesson Page Number Lesson Page Number PR #1 S1 Alg. 2.5 S189 PR 1.1 S5 Alg. 3.1 S206 PR 2.1 S16 Alg. 3.2 S215 PR 2.2 S21 Alg. 3.3 S220 PR

© 2015 CUNY Collaborative Programs Supported by the NYS Education Department S293

DRAFT – DO NOT DUPLICATE

ALGEBRA LESSON 3.8

Write an algebraic expression to match each sentence, using n for the unknown number 13. Think of a number n, divide it by 7, then add 2

14. Think of a number n, multiply it by -6, then add 11 to the result

15. Think of a number n, subtract 5 from it, then multiply the result by -2

16.

17. Use the balances below to figure out a-c:

a. b.

c.

Page 237: 2016 – 2017 STUDENT HANDBOOK Version 2...Lesson Page Number Lesson Page Number PR #1 S1 Alg. 2.5 S189 PR 1.1 S5 Alg. 3.1 S206 PR 2.1 S16 Alg. 3.2 S215 PR 2.2 S21 Alg. 3.3 S220 PR

© 2015 CUNY Collaborative Programs Supported by the NYS Education Department S294

DRAFT – DO NOT DUPLICATE

ALGEBRA LESSON 3.8

18. Complete the puzzle by using each numbers 1 through 4 only onetime in each column and row. Your clues are in each section bordered by a thick line: The numbers in those sections will be combined using the given arithmetic sign (+, -, x, ÷) in order to equal the resulting number that is provided.

Page 238: 2016 – 2017 STUDENT HANDBOOK Version 2...Lesson Page Number Lesson Page Number PR #1 S1 Alg. 2.5 S189 PR 1.1 S5 Alg. 3.1 S206 PR 2.1 S16 Alg. 3.2 S215 PR 2.2 S21 Alg. 3.3 S220 PR

© 2015 CUNY Collaborative Programs Supported by the NYS Education Department S295

DRAFT – DO NOT DUPLICATE

ALGEBRA LESSON 3.9

Activity 1 1. 17 – = 2, What is ?

2. 17 – 3x = 2 3. 17 – (b + 8) = 2

4. 15⨁

= 3, What is ⨁?

5. 15𝑏𝑏+2

= 3

6. 155𝑦𝑦

= 3

Solve 7-14 and show your process. 7. 15 – (k – 2) = 10 k - 2 = _____ k = _____

8. 54𝑦𝑦+2

= 9

y+2 = _____ y= _____

9. 3 + 4(y – 3) = 23 4(y - 3) = _____ y - 3 = _____ y = _____

10. 27/(2n – 11) = 3

Page 239: 2016 – 2017 STUDENT HANDBOOK Version 2...Lesson Page Number Lesson Page Number PR #1 S1 Alg. 2.5 S189 PR 1.1 S5 Alg. 3.1 S206 PR 2.1 S16 Alg. 3.2 S215 PR 2.2 S21 Alg. 3.3 S220 PR

© 2015 CUNY Collaborative Programs Supported by the NYS Education Department S296

DRAFT – DO NOT DUPLICATE

ALGEBRA LESSON 3.9

11. Think of a number, subtract 7, multiply by 5, add 3. Tanuja followed these instructions and got 28 as her final result. What number did she think of?

12. 16 − 24𝑎𝑎−5

= 10

13. 3𝑘𝑘+64

= 9

14. Think of a number, double it, add six, multiply the result by 3. Kavita followed these instructions and got 72 as her final result. What number did she start with?

Page 240: 2016 – 2017 STUDENT HANDBOOK Version 2...Lesson Page Number Lesson Page Number PR #1 S1 Alg. 2.5 S189 PR 1.1 S5 Alg. 3.1 S206 PR 2.1 S16 Alg. 3.2 S215 PR 2.2 S21 Alg. 3.3 S220 PR

© 2015 CUNY Collaborative Programs Supported by the NYS Education Department S297

DRAFT – DO NOT DUPLICATE

ALGEBRA LESSON 3.9

15-16. Work with a partner to solve the following:

17. Now create your own equation to solve using the chunking or blob strategy and then show your

solution.

Page 241: 2016 – 2017 STUDENT HANDBOOK Version 2...Lesson Page Number Lesson Page Number PR #1 S1 Alg. 2.5 S189 PR 1.1 S5 Alg. 3.1 S206 PR 2.1 S16 Alg. 3.2 S215 PR 2.2 S21 Alg. 3.3 S220 PR

© 2015 CUNY Collaborative Programs Supported by the NYS Education Department S298

DRAFT – DO NOT DUPLICATE

ALGEBRA LESSON 3.9

Problem Set 1 Solve each equation. Show your process.

A. 14 – 5x = 4

B. 6 + (m – 3) = 20

C. 30𝑎𝑎+4

= 5

D. 𝑝𝑝+45

= 12

E 24 – (y + 8) = 12

F. 1003𝑏𝑏+7

= 4

G. 6(10 – k) + 7 = 13

H. 7 − 8ℎ

= 3

Page 242: 2016 – 2017 STUDENT HANDBOOK Version 2...Lesson Page Number Lesson Page Number PR #1 S1 Alg. 2.5 S189 PR 1.1 S5 Alg. 3.1 S206 PR 2.1 S16 Alg. 3.2 S215 PR 2.2 S21 Alg. 3.3 S220 PR

© 2015 CUNY Collaborative Programs Supported by the NYS Education Department S299

DRAFT – DO NOT DUPLICATE

ALGEBRA LESSON 3.9

I. 1 + 4(3c + 2) = 81

J. 7 − 108−6𝑦𝑦

= 2

K.

L.

M. Draw an area model and solve the equation below: ( ___ + ___ ) ( ___ + ___ ) = x2+11x+30

Page 243: 2016 – 2017 STUDENT HANDBOOK Version 2...Lesson Page Number Lesson Page Number PR #1 S1 Alg. 2.5 S189 PR 1.1 S5 Alg. 3.1 S206 PR 2.1 S16 Alg. 3.2 S215 PR 2.2 S21 Alg. 3.3 S220 PR

© 2015 CUNY Collaborative Programs Supported by the NYS Education Department S300

DRAFT – DO NOT DUPLICATE

ALGEBRA LESSON 3.9

N. Write an algebraic expression to match each sentence, using u for the unknown number.

Subtract a number u from 12 _______________________

12 minus a number u ________________________

12 less than a number u _______________________

O.

Draw a number line to answer P and Q. P. I am exactly halfway between 16 and 34. Who am I? Q. I am exactly halfway between -0.03 and 0.07

Page 244: 2016 – 2017 STUDENT HANDBOOK Version 2...Lesson Page Number Lesson Page Number PR #1 S1 Alg. 2.5 S189 PR 1.1 S5 Alg. 3.1 S206 PR 2.1 S16 Alg. 3.2 S215 PR 2.2 S21 Alg. 3.3 S220 PR

© 2015 CUNY Collaborative Programs Supported by the NYS Education Department S301

DRAFT – DO NOT DUPLICATE

ALGEBRA LESSON 3.9

Activity 2 Solve each of the following and show your process. 1. (c + 2)2 = 36 c + 2 = _____ OR c +2 = _____ c = _____ OR c = _____

2. (y – 1)2 = 81

3. (10 – n)2 = 64 10 - n = ____ OR 10 - n = ____ n = ____ OR n = ____

4. (3x + 4)2 = 100

5. 3(h + 2)2 = 75 (h + 2)2 = ____ h + 2 = ____ OR h + 2 = ____ h = ____ OR h = ____

6. Think of a number, subtract 3, square the result. If you end up with 9, what are the only two numbers you could have started with?

Page 245: 2016 – 2017 STUDENT HANDBOOK Version 2...Lesson Page Number Lesson Page Number PR #1 S1 Alg. 2.5 S189 PR 1.1 S5 Alg. 3.1 S206 PR 2.1 S16 Alg. 3.2 S215 PR 2.2 S21 Alg. 3.3 S220 PR

© 2015 CUNY Collaborative Programs Supported by the NYS Education Department S302

DRAFT – DO NOT DUPLICATE

ALGEBRA LESSON 3.9

Problem Set 2

Solve and show your process. A. (a + 8)2 = 100

B. (w – 7)2 = 64

C. (11 – b)2 = 36

D. (2n – 3)2 = 49

E. (h – 12)2 + 7 = 88

F. 32 – (m + 1)2 = 7

G. 9(8 – x)2 = 36

H. (𝑏𝑏+4)2

3= 27

Page 246: 2016 – 2017 STUDENT HANDBOOK Version 2...Lesson Page Number Lesson Page Number PR #1 S1 Alg. 2.5 S189 PR 1.1 S5 Alg. 3.1 S206 PR 2.1 S16 Alg. 3.2 S215 PR 2.2 S21 Alg. 3.3 S220 PR

© 2015 CUNY Collaborative Programs Supported by the NYS Education Department S303

DRAFT – DO NOT DUPLICATE

ALGEBRA LESSON 3.9

J. 17 – (c + 7)2 = 16

K. 4(9 – k)2 – 11 = 25

L. Directions Result Ian Maria Jacob Start with a number

Add 6

Multiply by 3 30

Subtract 12 6 9

M.

N.

Page 247: 2016 – 2017 STUDENT HANDBOOK Version 2...Lesson Page Number Lesson Page Number PR #1 S1 Alg. 2.5 S189 PR 1.1 S5 Alg. 3.1 S206 PR 2.1 S16 Alg. 3.2 S215 PR 2.2 S21 Alg. 3.3 S220 PR

© 2015 CUNY Collaborative Programs Supported by the NYS Education Department S304

DRAFT – DO NOT DUPLICATE

ALGEBRA LESSON 3.9

O.

P.

Page 248: 2016 – 2017 STUDENT HANDBOOK Version 2...Lesson Page Number Lesson Page Number PR #1 S1 Alg. 2.5 S189 PR 1.1 S5 Alg. 3.1 S206 PR 2.1 S16 Alg. 3.2 S215 PR 2.2 S21 Alg. 3.3 S220 PR

NAME DATE ALGEBRA LESSON 4.0

S305

© 2016 CUNY Collaborative Programs Supported by the NYS Education Department

Algebra Lesson 4.0 Activity 1, Part 1 Sitting around the pond in central park, my friend and I found ourselves surrounded by squirrels and ducks. My friend asked me to count the heads while he counted the feet. He counted 70 feet and I counted 19 heads. Then some kids came by and scared all the ducks and squirrels away. How many ducks and how many squirrels had there been?

Page 249: 2016 – 2017 STUDENT HANDBOOK Version 2...Lesson Page Number Lesson Page Number PR #1 S1 Alg. 2.5 S189 PR 1.1 S5 Alg. 3.1 S206 PR 2.1 S16 Alg. 3.2 S215 PR 2.2 S21 Alg. 3.3 S220 PR

NAME DATE ALGEBRA LESSON 4.0

S306

© 2016 CUNY Collaborative Programs Supported by the NYS Education Department

Activity 1, Part 2 Sharing solutions

Page 250: 2016 – 2017 STUDENT HANDBOOK Version 2...Lesson Page Number Lesson Page Number PR #1 S1 Alg. 2.5 S189 PR 1.1 S5 Alg. 3.1 S206 PR 2.1 S16 Alg. 3.2 S215 PR 2.2 S21 Alg. 3.3 S220 PR

NAME DATE ALGEBRA LESSON 4.1

S307

© 2016 CUNY Collaborative Programs Supported by the NYS Education Department

Algebra Lesson 4.1 Mini-Lesson Tamika bought 4 pairs of jeans and 2 sweaters on sale for $116. Pose a few questions from the statement given above.

Page 251: 2016 – 2017 STUDENT HANDBOOK Version 2...Lesson Page Number Lesson Page Number PR #1 S1 Alg. 2.5 S189 PR 1.1 S5 Alg. 3.1 S206 PR 2.1 S16 Alg. 3.2 S215 PR 2.2 S21 Alg. 3.3 S220 PR

NAME DATE ALGEBRA LESSON 4.1

S308

© 2016 CUNY Collaborative Programs Supported by the NYS Education Department

Activity 1, Part 1 In Mr. Tomatoehead’s garden, there are three times as many broccoli plants as there are corn plants. Individually generate three questions based on the statement above. Rotate questions and wait for teacher instructions.

Page 252: 2016 – 2017 STUDENT HANDBOOK Version 2...Lesson Page Number Lesson Page Number PR #1 S1 Alg. 2.5 S189 PR 1.1 S5 Alg. 3.1 S206 PR 2.1 S16 Alg. 3.2 S215 PR 2.2 S21 Alg. 3.3 S220 PR

NAME DATE ALGEBRA LESSON 4.1

S309

© 2016 CUNY Collaborative Programs Supported by the NYS Education Department

Activity 1, Part 2 In Mr. Tomatoehead’s garden, there are three times as many broccoli plants as there are corn plants. Who set up a table? What did your table look like? What is a rule for the table’s pattern?

Page 253: 2016 – 2017 STUDENT HANDBOOK Version 2...Lesson Page Number Lesson Page Number PR #1 S1 Alg. 2.5 S189 PR 1.1 S5 Alg. 3.1 S206 PR 2.1 S16 Alg. 3.2 S215 PR 2.2 S21 Alg. 3.3 S220 PR

NAME DATE ALGEBRA LESSON 4.1

S310

© 2016 CUNY Collaborative Programs Supported by the NYS Education Department

Activity 2

In Mr. Tomatoehead’s garden, there are three times as many broccoli plants as there are corn plants. His garden has 108 plants altogether from the broccoli and corn. Pose 1 or 2 questions and work on answering them.

Page 254: 2016 – 2017 STUDENT HANDBOOK Version 2...Lesson Page Number Lesson Page Number PR #1 S1 Alg. 2.5 S189 PR 1.1 S5 Alg. 3.1 S206 PR 2.1 S16 Alg. 3.2 S215 PR 2.2 S21 Alg. 3.3 S220 PR

NAME DATE ALGEBRA LESSON 4.1

S311

© 2016 CUNY Collaborative Programs Supported by the NYS Education Department

Exit Ticket

Tamika bought 4 pairs of jeans and 2 sweaters on sale for $116. Rosa paid $107 for 3 of the same types of jeans and 4 of the same sweaters. How much did a pair of jeans cost? How much did a sweater cost? Show your work in determining your solutions.

Page 255: 2016 – 2017 STUDENT HANDBOOK Version 2...Lesson Page Number Lesson Page Number PR #1 S1 Alg. 2.5 S189 PR 1.1 S5 Alg. 3.1 S206 PR 2.1 S16 Alg. 3.2 S215 PR 2.2 S21 Alg. 3.3 S220 PR

NAME DATE ALGEBRA LESSON 4.2

S312

© 2016 CUNY Collaborative Programs Supported by the NYS Education Department

Algebra Lesson 4.2 Warm-Up Activity Carl drove his Prius 55 miles per hour from noon to 2pm: How many hours was he driving? How far did he go? If Carl had kept driving until 5pm, how far would he travel?

Page 256: 2016 – 2017 STUDENT HANDBOOK Version 2...Lesson Page Number Lesson Page Number PR #1 S1 Alg. 2.5 S189 PR 1.1 S5 Alg. 3.1 S206 PR 2.1 S16 Alg. 3.2 S215 PR 2.2 S21 Alg. 3.3 S220 PR

NAME DATE ALGEBRA LESSON 4.2

S313

© 2016 CUNY Collaborative Programs Supported by the NYS Education Department

Activity 1 Michael is a faster runner than Tahira. They decide to have a race. To be fair, Michael gives Tahira a head start.

• Tahira starts at noon and runs three miles per hour. • Michael runs four miles per hour; he starts one hour later.

Will Michael ever catch up to Tahira? If so, when? If not, why not? Directions1

1. Work on the problem for 2-3 minutes on your own. 2. After your independent time have some idea of what you are doing, or have a question 3. Talk with a partner:

First ask any questions you have. Make the questions as specific as possible. If there are no questions—and you have some idea of a direction to take—explain your method to your partner.

4. Work alone for another 2 minutes. 5. Come back and share with your group. 6. Decide how you are going to proceed as a group.

1 Edited from New Design High School Lesson Study

Page 257: 2016 – 2017 STUDENT HANDBOOK Version 2...Lesson Page Number Lesson Page Number PR #1 S1 Alg. 2.5 S189 PR 1.1 S5 Alg. 3.1 S206 PR 2.1 S16 Alg. 3.2 S215 PR 2.2 S21 Alg. 3.3 S220 PR

NAME DATE ALGEBRA LESSON 4.2

S314

© 2016 CUNY Collaborative Programs Supported by the NYS Education Department

Poster Feedback Directions With your group look at the poster and try to understand the thinking of the group. Look at each part of the poster and make sure you understand what the group did and why. Wherever you do not understand, or wherever you think the group is being unclear, write down a question or comment on a post-it and put it on the poster.

Page 258: 2016 – 2017 STUDENT HANDBOOK Version 2...Lesson Page Number Lesson Page Number PR #1 S1 Alg. 2.5 S189 PR 1.1 S5 Alg. 3.1 S206 PR 2.1 S16 Alg. 3.2 S215 PR 2.2 S21 Alg. 3.3 S220 PR

NAME DATE ALGEBRA LESSON 4.2

S315

© 2016 CUNY Collaborative Programs Supported by the NYS Education Department

Activity 2 Consider the original problem with Michael and Tahira: Michael is a faster runner than Tahira. They decide to have a race. To be fair, Michael gives Tahira a head start. Tahira starts at noon and runs three miles per hour. Michael runs four miles per hour; he starts one hour later.

Will Michael ever catch up to Tahira? If so, when? If not, why not? Questions:

• How can we change the question so that Michael never catches up to Tahira? • How can we change the problem so that the distance between Michael and Tahira stays the

same? • How can we change the problem so that Michael catches up to Tahira more quickly?

Page 259: 2016 – 2017 STUDENT HANDBOOK Version 2...Lesson Page Number Lesson Page Number PR #1 S1 Alg. 2.5 S189 PR 1.1 S5 Alg. 3.1 S206 PR 2.1 S16 Alg. 3.2 S215 PR 2.2 S21 Alg. 3.3 S220 PR

NAME DATE ALGEBRA LESSON 4.2

S316

© 2016 CUNY Collaborative Programs Supported by the NYS Education Department

Problem Set 1

Solve each of the following problems in at least two different ways. 1. Scott takes off from New Design High School on his bicycle at 9 in the morning. He bikes at 6

miles per hour. Laurie takes off two hours later, biking at 10 miles per hour.

Will Laurie ever catch up to Scott? If so, when?

2. A truck traveling at a constant rate of 45 miles per hour leaves Albany. One hour later a car

traveling at a constant rate of 60 miles per hour also leaves Albany traveling in the same direction on the same highway. How long will it take for the car to catch up to the truck, if both vehicles continue in the same direction on the highway?

Page 260: 2016 – 2017 STUDENT HANDBOOK Version 2...Lesson Page Number Lesson Page Number PR #1 S1 Alg. 2.5 S189 PR 1.1 S5 Alg. 3.1 S206 PR 2.1 S16 Alg. 3.2 S215 PR 2.2 S21 Alg. 3.3 S220 PR

NAME DATE ALGEBRA LESSON 4.3

S317

© 2016 CUNY Collaborative Programs Supported by the NYS Education Department

Algebra Lesson 4.3 Activity 11 When you are pricked with a pin, there is a short time delay before you say, “Ouch!” This reaction time varies linearly with the distance between your brain and the place you are pricked.

Dr. Hollers pricks Leslie Morley’s finger and toe, and measures reaction times of 15.2 and 22.9 milliseconds, respectively. Leslie’s finger is 100 cm from the brain, and her toe is 170 cm from the brain.

a. Pose a few questions. b. Work with a partner on answering your questions and your partner’s questions. c. Create a table with Reaction time and Distance from brain. Which measure should be the

“input” variable? (The output variable would be a function of the input variable.) d. Sketch a graph of Reaction time versus Distance from brain.

For E-G, keep track of all of your work as you solve each problem and think about using proportional reasoning.

e. How long would it take Leslie to say “Ouch!” if pricked in the neck, 10 cm from the brain? f. How long would it take Leslie to say “Ouch!” if pricked in the shoulder, 15 cm from the brain? g. How long would it take Leslie to say “Ouch!” if pricked in the knee, 110 cm from the brain? h. Express the pattern of the table as a rule. i. With a partner work on interpreting your rule. What do the numbers in your rule indicate? j. How fast do impulses travel in centimeters per second? (You may need to do some

conversions. A millisecond is 𝟏𝟏𝟏𝟏𝟏𝟏𝟏𝟏𝟏𝟏

of a second.)

1 Source: Edited from Foerster, Paul A. (1994). Algebra I: Expressions, Equations, and Applications. Addison-Wesley, New York.

Page 261: 2016 – 2017 STUDENT HANDBOOK Version 2...Lesson Page Number Lesson Page Number PR #1 S1 Alg. 2.5 S189 PR 1.1 S5 Alg. 3.1 S206 PR 2.1 S16 Alg. 3.2 S215 PR 2.2 S21 Alg. 3.3 S220 PR

NAME DATE ALGEBRA LESSON 4.3

S318

© 2016 CUNY Collaborative Programs Supported by the NYS Education Department

Activity 22

What does a calorie mean? How far would you have to run to burn off a Big Mac? Take a guess • Consider LeBron James: How long do you think LeBron James would have to play basketball

to burn off all the calories in a Big Mac? • The number of calories you burn depends on two things: the exercise you perform and your

weight. • Sitting for one minute, for example, burns 0.009 calories for every pound of body weight

(see the table below). • A Big Mac has about 550 calories. • LeBron James weighs about 250 pounds.

Calories Burned in One Minute of Exercise

Sitting 0.009 cal/lb Ice Skating 0.053 cal/lb Walking 0.019 cal/lb Tennis 0.061 cal/lb Bowling 0.023 cal/lb Basketball 0.063 cal/lb Biking, slow 0.029 cal/lb Jogging 0.063 cal/lb Golf 0.033 cal/lb Swimming 0.064 cal/lb Soft-Baseball 0.038 cal/lb Soccer 0.076 cal/lb Weight Training 0.039 cal/lb Jump Rope 0.083 cal/lb

Biking, fast 0.045 cal/lb

1. Pose three questions to help yourself think about this problem.

2 Source: Edited from http://pblu.org/projects/new-tritional-info

Page 262: 2016 – 2017 STUDENT HANDBOOK Version 2...Lesson Page Number Lesson Page Number PR #1 S1 Alg. 2.5 S189 PR 1.1 S5 Alg. 3.1 S206 PR 2.1 S16 Alg. 3.2 S215 PR 2.2 S21 Alg. 3.3 S220 PR

NAME DATE ALGEBRA LESSON 4.3

S319

© 2016 CUNY Collaborative Programs Supported by the NYS Education Department

2. Work with a partner to answer each other’s questions. 3. Work with a partner to figure out how long it would take for LeBron James to burn off the Big

Mac playing basketball

Page 263: 2016 – 2017 STUDENT HANDBOOK Version 2...Lesson Page Number Lesson Page Number PR #1 S1 Alg. 2.5 S189 PR 1.1 S5 Alg. 3.1 S206 PR 2.1 S16 Alg. 3.2 S215 PR 2.2 S21 Alg. 3.3 S220 PR

NAME DATE ALGEBRA LESSON 4.3

S320

© 2016 CUNY Collaborative Programs Supported by the NYS Education Department

Problem Set 13

1. Use the information below to determine how long Justin Timberlake would have to walk to burn off a Big Mac.

Calories Burned in One Minute of Exercise Walking 0.019 cal/lb

• Justin Timberlake weighs about 160 pounds. • A Big Mac has about 550 calories.

2. Determine how long it would take for the following people to walk off a Big Mac.

• LeBron James, 250 pounds _________________

• Selena Gomez, 125 pounds _________________

• A 10 year old weighing 75 pounds _________________

3. Calories per minute: Complete the table below to find out how many calories each person burns in one minute of exercise.

3 Problems and images from Mathalicious: http://www.mathalicious.com/

Page 264: 2016 – 2017 STUDENT HANDBOOK Version 2...Lesson Page Number Lesson Page Number PR #1 S1 Alg. 2.5 S189 PR 1.1 S5 Alg. 3.1 S206 PR 2.1 S16 Alg. 3.2 S215 PR 2.2 S21 Alg. 3.3 S220 PR

NAME DATE ALGEBRA LESSON 4.3

S321

© 2016 CUNY Collaborative Programs Supported by the NYS Education Department

4. Your friend, Anita, is designing a website to promote Jumping Rope. She wants to include a

chart of calories burned per 10 minutes of exercise versus weight so that users can enter their weight and see the calories burned.

a. Consider a few different weights and determine the calories burned per ten minutes. A

table may be helpful. b. Find a general rule for calories burned in ten minutes given weight. [Use C(w) ]

Page 265: 2016 – 2017 STUDENT HANDBOOK Version 2...Lesson Page Number Lesson Page Number PR #1 S1 Alg. 2.5 S189 PR 1.1 S5 Alg. 3.1 S206 PR 2.1 S16 Alg. 3.2 S215 PR 2.2 S21 Alg. 3.3 S220 PR

NAME DATE ALGEBRA LESSON 4.3

S322

© 2016 CUNY Collaborative Programs Supported by the NYS Education Department

Activity 3 Different types of exercise burn different numbers of calories.

1. Choose one of the celebrities below and three types of exercise. For each activity, how long

would it take to burn off each of the McDonald’s items below? Keep track of and show all of your work.

Page 266: 2016 – 2017 STUDENT HANDBOOK Version 2...Lesson Page Number Lesson Page Number PR #1 S1 Alg. 2.5 S189 PR 1.1 S5 Alg. 3.1 S206 PR 2.1 S16 Alg. 3.2 S215 PR 2.2 S21 Alg. 3.3 S220 PR

NAME DATE ALGEBRA LESSON 4.3

S323

© 2016 CUNY Collaborative Programs Supported by the NYS Education Department

2. In 2012, McDonald’s began posting calorie information in all of its restaurants in the United

States. Do you think it makes a difference in people’s purchasing?

Page 267: 2016 – 2017 STUDENT HANDBOOK Version 2...Lesson Page Number Lesson Page Number PR #1 S1 Alg. 2.5 S189 PR 1.1 S5 Alg. 3.1 S206 PR 2.1 S16 Alg. 3.2 S215 PR 2.2 S21 Alg. 3.3 S220 PR

NAME DATE ALGEBRA LESSON 4.3

S324

© 2016 CUNY Collaborative Programs Supported by the NYS Education Department

Activity 4 Shoe Size Problem. On the planet Grog, a person’s shoe size varies linearly with the length of his or her foot. The smallest adult shoe is a size 5 and fits a 9-inch long foot. A size 11 shoe fits an 11-inch long foot.

a. Write the particular equation expressing shoe size in terms of foot length.

b. If Gizmo’s foot is one foot long, what size shoe does he need?

c. Imagine your own shoe was made on the planet Grog. Figure out the length of your foot in inches based on the size you now wear.

Page 268: 2016 – 2017 STUDENT HANDBOOK Version 2...Lesson Page Number Lesson Page Number PR #1 S1 Alg. 2.5 S189 PR 1.1 S5 Alg. 3.1 S206 PR 2.1 S16 Alg. 3.2 S215 PR 2.2 S21 Alg. 3.3 S220 PR

NAME DATE ALGEBRA LESSON 4.3

S325

© 2016 CUNY Collaborative Programs Supported by the NYS Education Department

d. Bob Lanier, who once played basketball for the Detroit Pistons, wears a Size 22 shoe. If his

shoe was made on Grog, how long is his foot?

e. Plot the graph of adult shoe size versus foot length.

Page 269: 2016 – 2017 STUDENT HANDBOOK Version 2...Lesson Page Number Lesson Page Number PR #1 S1 Alg. 2.5 S189 PR 1.1 S5 Alg. 3.1 S206 PR 2.1 S16 Alg. 3.2 S215 PR 2.2 S21 Alg. 3.3 S220 PR

NAME DATE ALGEBRA LESSON 4.3

S326

© 2016 CUNY Collaborative Programs Supported by the NYS Education Department

f. Gadget’s foot grew two inches over the past year. By how much will her shoe size change?

Activity 5: Skill Review The following lists some approximations of √126.

To the nearest tenth 11.2 To the nearest hundredth 11.22 To the nearest thousandth 11.225

1. Square each of the numbers below. Use your calculator if you like. Write your answers in

the space beside. Which decimal values are smaller and which are larger than √126?

(11.2)2 =

(11.22)2 =

(11.225)2 =

2. Find √200 rounded to two decimal places with your calculator. Record your answer in the

space below.

Page 270: 2016 – 2017 STUDENT HANDBOOK Version 2...Lesson Page Number Lesson Page Number PR #1 S1 Alg. 2.5 S189 PR 1.1 S5 Alg. 3.1 S206 PR 2.1 S16 Alg. 3.2 S215 PR 2.2 S21 Alg. 3.3 S220 PR

NAME DATE ALGEBRA LESSON 4.3

S327

© 2016 CUNY Collaborative Programs Supported by the NYS Education Department

3. Find √2 rounded to two decimal places with your calculator. Record your answer in the space below.

4. Using the fact that √200 = √2 ⋅ √100, simplify √200, keeping it in its radical form. (No decimals).

5. Describe how you could determine what √200 is, rounded to two decimal places, if you knew only (a) but not part (b).

Problem Set 2

1. What number should replace the blank space in each of the following equations to make it true?

a. √4 ⋅ 13 = ____√13

b. √5 ⋅ 81 = ____√5

c. √9 ⋅ 49 = ____

Page 271: 2016 – 2017 STUDENT HANDBOOK Version 2...Lesson Page Number Lesson Page Number PR #1 S1 Alg. 2.5 S189 PR 1.1 S5 Alg. 3.1 S206 PR 2.1 S16 Alg. 3.2 S215 PR 2.2 S21 Alg. 3.3 S220 PR

NAME DATE ALGEBRA LESSON 4.3

S328

© 2016 CUNY Collaborative Programs Supported by the NYS Education Department

d. √64 ⋅ 64 = ____

e. √3 ⋅ 3 ⋅ 7 = ____√7

f. √15 ⋅ 11 ⋅ 15 = 15√____

g. √16 ⋅ 5 ⋅ 100 = ____√5

h. √2 ⋅ 2 ⋅ 2 ⋅ 23 = 2√_____

2. What expression should replace the blank space in each of the following equations to make it true? Assume that 𝑥𝑥 > 0.

a. √36𝑥𝑥 = ____√𝑥𝑥

b. √10𝑥𝑥2 = ____√10

c. √5𝑥𝑥3 ⋅ 5𝑥𝑥3 = ____

d. √𝑥𝑥6 = _____

e. √𝑥𝑥11 = ____√𝑥𝑥

f. √9𝑥𝑥16 = ____

Page 272: 2016 – 2017 STUDENT HANDBOOK Version 2...Lesson Page Number Lesson Page Number PR #1 S1 Alg. 2.5 S189 PR 1.1 S5 Alg. 3.1 S206 PR 2.1 S16 Alg. 3.2 S215 PR 2.2 S21 Alg. 3.3 S220 PR

NAME DATE ALGEBRA LESSON 4.4

S329

© 2016 CUNY Collaborative Programs Supported by the NYS Education Department

Algebra Lesson 4.41 Activity 12 1. Measure and record your height and arm span in centimeters: height: ____ arm span: _____ 2. Mark your arm span on the number line below.

3. On the graph below Maria place a point to represent her arm span which is 166 cm and her

height which is 160 cm. Place another point on the graph to represent your arm span and height.

1 Materials in this lesson are taken from: Education Development Center, Inc. (2011 & 2013.) Transition to Algebra materials, Unit 6. 2 Source: Edited from TTA Unit 6 page 8.

Page 273: 2016 – 2017 STUDENT HANDBOOK Version 2...Lesson Page Number Lesson Page Number PR #1 S1 Alg. 2.5 S189 PR 1.1 S5 Alg. 3.1 S206 PR 2.1 S16 Alg. 3.2 S215 PR 2.2 S21 Alg. 3.3 S220 PR

NAME DATE ALGEBRA LESSON 4.4

S330

© 2016 CUNY Collaborative Programs Supported by the NYS Education Department

4. Imagine a person whose point on the graph above is lower and to the right of your point.

What could you say about their arm span and height? 5. Imagine an alien planet where everyone is exactly the same height, but the aliens have all

different arm spans. What might a graph of arm spans and heights look like on that planet? Describe what their graph would look like or sketch one.

6. If you were to graph the measures from 3 of your friends, would you expect points to lie on a

line? Why or why not? 7. Lazy Larry fusses to get out of his seat in class. He knew that he is 5 feet 9 inches tall and he

knew that there are about 2.5 centimeters in an inch. How tall is he in centimeters? How could he figure it out?

8. Yudelca tells Larry that there are actually about 2.54 centimeters in an inch and that he needs

to go check his work with a real measure. Will he find that his result from 6 is less or more than what it should be?

Just a note: Does it matter whether we label the graphs used as “Height versus Arm Span” or the switch, “Arm Span versus Height”? The convention on earth is that we place the often-dependent and vertical axis measure first. To communicate effectively, we continue the convention.

Page 274: 2016 – 2017 STUDENT HANDBOOK Version 2...Lesson Page Number Lesson Page Number PR #1 S1 Alg. 2.5 S189 PR 1.1 S5 Alg. 3.1 S206 PR 2.1 S16 Alg. 3.2 S215 PR 2.2 S21 Alg. 3.3 S220 PR

NAME DATE ALGEBRA LESSON 4.4

S331

© 2016 CUNY Collaborative Programs Supported by the NYS Education Department

Activity 2

Page 275: 2016 – 2017 STUDENT HANDBOOK Version 2...Lesson Page Number Lesson Page Number PR #1 S1 Alg. 2.5 S189 PR 1.1 S5 Alg. 3.1 S206 PR 2.1 S16 Alg. 3.2 S215 PR 2.2 S21 Alg. 3.3 S220 PR

NAME DATE ALGEBRA LESSON 4.4

S332

© 2016 CUNY Collaborative Programs Supported by the NYS Education Department

5. Ricardo, Sam, Tyrell, Ursula and Vinny measure their heights and forearm spans. The results are displayed in the graph at the bottom.

a. Who is the shortest person? What is that person's height? b. Who has the longest forearm? How long is that person's forearm? c. Put the five students in order from tallest to shortest. If any students are the same height,

show that in your answer. d. Put the five students in order from longest to shortest forearm. If any students are have

the same length forearm, show that in your answer. e. Which students have a forearm length that appears to be greater than their height based

on the graph? Make up two more students, "W" and "X", whose forearms appear longer than their height based on the graph.

Page 276: 2016 – 2017 STUDENT HANDBOOK Version 2...Lesson Page Number Lesson Page Number PR #1 S1 Alg. 2.5 S189 PR 1.1 S5 Alg. 3.1 S206 PR 2.1 S16 Alg. 3.2 S215 PR 2.2 S21 Alg. 3.3 S220 PR

NAME DATE ALGEBRA LESSON 4.4

S333

© 2016 CUNY Collaborative Programs Supported by the NYS Education Department

Problem Set 1 Where Am I? Use the hints to figure out the location of each point. Fill your answers in, then plot and label your solutions on the graph below.

1.

I am point G. My horizontal position is 2. My vertical position is 3. Where am I? ( , )

4. I am point J. My horizontal position is -2. My vertical is -5. Where am I? ( , )

2. I am point H. My x-coordinate is -4. My y-coordinate is 3. Where am I? ( , )

5. I am point K. My horizontal position is 1. My y-coordinate is triple my horizontal position (y = 3x). Where am I? ( , )

3. I am point I. My x-coordinate is 5. My vertical position is equal to my horizontal position (y = x). Where am I? ( , )

6. I am point L. My x-coordinate is 5. My y-coordinate is one half the value of my x- coordinate (y = ½x) Where am I? ( , )

Page 277: 2016 – 2017 STUDENT HANDBOOK Version 2...Lesson Page Number Lesson Page Number PR #1 S1 Alg. 2.5 S189 PR 1.1 S5 Alg. 3.1 S206 PR 2.1 S16 Alg. 3.2 S215 PR 2.2 S21 Alg. 3.3 S220 PR

NAME DATE ALGEBRA LESSON 4.4

S334

© 2016 CUNY Collaborative Programs Supported by the NYS Education Department

7. I am point M. My x-coordinate is 3. My y-coordinate is the opposite of my x-coordinate (y = -x). Where am I? ( , )

The table below shows real data from a 'hybrid' algebra class (half the class was online, half in a classroom). The study recorded how many hours students spent studying online during the whole course, and their grade at the end of it.

1. Plot the data.

2. In general, does the graph show a relationship between amount of time studying online and grade in the course?

Page 278: 2016 – 2017 STUDENT HANDBOOK Version 2...Lesson Page Number Lesson Page Number PR #1 S1 Alg. 2.5 S189 PR 1.1 S5 Alg. 3.1 S206 PR 2.1 S16 Alg. 3.2 S215 PR 2.2 S21 Alg. 3.3 S220 PR

NAME DATE ALGEBRA LESSON 4.4

S335

© 2016 CUNY Collaborative Programs Supported by the NYS Education Department

3. Based on this graph, what amount of time would you spend online if you wanted to score higher than 80% in the course?

4. A discussion of the value of the graph:

Do you agree with the Michael and Jay? Why or why not?

Page 279: 2016 – 2017 STUDENT HANDBOOK Version 2...Lesson Page Number Lesson Page Number PR #1 S1 Alg. 2.5 S189 PR 1.1 S5 Alg. 3.1 S206 PR 2.1 S16 Alg. 3.2 S215 PR 2.2 S21 Alg. 3.3 S220 PR

NAME DATE ALGEBRA LESSON 4.4

S336

© 2016 CUNY Collaborative Programs Supported by the NYS Education Department

Imagine that your favorite television show has just been made valuable to download online at $4 per episode. 5. Use the table to list sample scenarios. Wherever the number of episodes downloaded is

missing, fill in a number, and then determine the number of dollars spent. Then, plot each sample scenario on the graph.

6. How many episodes would you have bought if you spent $240? 7. Would the point (81, 324) be on the graph if the grid were large enough to plot it? Why or

why not?

Page 280: 2016 – 2017 STUDENT HANDBOOK Version 2...Lesson Page Number Lesson Page Number PR #1 S1 Alg. 2.5 S189 PR 1.1 S5 Alg. 3.1 S206 PR 2.1 S16 Alg. 3.2 S215 PR 2.2 S21 Alg. 3.3 S220 PR

NAME DATE ALGEBRA LESSON 4.4

S337

© 2016 CUNY Collaborative Programs Supported by the NYS Education Department

8. Would the point (101, 408) be on the graph if the grid were large enough to plot it? Why or why not?

Page 281: 2016 – 2017 STUDENT HANDBOOK Version 2...Lesson Page Number Lesson Page Number PR #1 S1 Alg. 2.5 S189 PR 1.1 S5 Alg. 3.1 S206 PR 2.1 S16 Alg. 3.2 S215 PR 2.2 S21 Alg. 3.3 S220 PR

NAME DATE ALGEBRA LESSON 4.4

S338

© 2016 CUNY Collaborative Programs Supported by the NYS Education Department

Problem Set 2 Part 1: Use the hints to figure out the location of each point. Fill your answers in, then plot and label your solutions on the graph below.

1. I am point A. My horizontal position is -1. My vertical position is 2. Where am I? ( , )

5. I am point E. I have the same y-coordinate as (4,-4) and the same x-coordinate as (3,5). Where am I? ( , )

2. I am point B. My x-coordinate is 2. My y-coordinate is -4. Where am I? ( , )

6. I am point F. My x-coordinate is -2. My y-coordinate is triple my x-coordinate (y = 3x). Where am I? ( , )

3. I am point C. My horizontal position is -3. My vertical position is -2. Where am I? ( , )

7. I am point G. I am halfway between (2,2) and (6,6). Where am I? ( , )

4. I am point D. My x-coordinate is 3. My y-coordinate is double my x-coordinate. Where am I? ( , )

8. I am point H. I am halfway between (-1,0) and (-1,6) Where am I? ( , )

Page 282: 2016 – 2017 STUDENT HANDBOOK Version 2...Lesson Page Number Lesson Page Number PR #1 S1 Alg. 2.5 S189 PR 1.1 S5 Alg. 3.1 S206 PR 2.1 S16 Alg. 3.2 S215 PR 2.2 S21 Alg. 3.3 S220 PR

NAME DATE ALGEBRA LESSON 4.4

S339

© 2016 CUNY Collaborative Programs Supported by the NYS Education Department

Part 2: Use the number lines to answer each of the questions. 9. Finish labeling this number line.

10. What is the distance between -10 and 41?

11. How far apart are -17 and 40?

12. How far apart are -55 and -24?

Page 283: 2016 – 2017 STUDENT HANDBOOK Version 2...Lesson Page Number Lesson Page Number PR #1 S1 Alg. 2.5 S189 PR 1.1 S5 Alg. 3.1 S206 PR 2.1 S16 Alg. 3.2 S215 PR 2.2 S21 Alg. 3.3 S220 PR

NAME DATE ALGEBRA LESSON 4.4

S340

© 2016 CUNY Collaborative Programs Supported by the NYS Education Department

13. What is the distance between 97 and 509?

14. What is the distance between -4 and 405?

15. How far apart are 2 and -4?

Page 284: 2016 – 2017 STUDENT HANDBOOK Version 2...Lesson Page Number Lesson Page Number PR #1 S1 Alg. 2.5 S189 PR 1.1 S5 Alg. 3.1 S206 PR 2.1 S16 Alg. 3.2 S215 PR 2.2 S21 Alg. 3.3 S220 PR

NAME DATE ALGEBRA LESSON 4.4

S341

© 2016 CUNY Collaborative Programs Supported by the NYS Education Department

Activity 3: Skill Review Radical expressions, like variable expressions, can only be simplified if they have like terms. For example:

5𝑥𝑥 + 11𝑥𝑥 = 16𝑥𝑥

5√2 + 11√2 = 16√2 Both of the above equations follow the same algebra rules. Just like with variables, when an expression doesn’t have like terms, you cannot simplify it. For example:

7𝑥𝑥 + 13𝑦𝑦

7√2 + 13√5

Both of the above equations cannot put together into one term to be simplified. Many of the same rules that work with variables also work with radicals. One big difference with radicals though, is that sometimes the number inside the square root can be simplified, which can then let you simplify the expression. For example:

6√28 − 3√7 The 28 in this problem can be factored so that one of its factors is a perfect square. In other words:

28 = 4 ⋅ 7 If you replace the 28 in the problem with these two factors, then you can write the expression out as:

6√4 ⋅ 7 − 3√7 Since √4 = 2, then you can also rewrite the expression as:

6 ⋅ 2√7 − 3√7 And now you can multiply 6 times 2 to get 12.

12√7 − 3√7 This is a radical expression that now has the same radicals being subtracted! So it can be combined together and simplify to:

9√7

Page 285: 2016 – 2017 STUDENT HANDBOOK Version 2...Lesson Page Number Lesson Page Number PR #1 S1 Alg. 2.5 S189 PR 1.1 S5 Alg. 3.1 S206 PR 2.1 S16 Alg. 3.2 S215 PR 2.2 S21 Alg. 3.3 S220 PR

NAME DATE ALGEBRA LESSON 4.4

S342

© 2016 CUNY Collaborative Programs Supported by the NYS Education Department

Problem Set 3

1. If possible simplify each of the sums and differences listed below. a. 6√2 + 5√2

b. 6√2 − 5√2

c. 6√2 + √2

d. √6 + √7

e. √7 − √6

f. 6√2 − √2

Page 286: 2016 – 2017 STUDENT HANDBOOK Version 2...Lesson Page Number Lesson Page Number PR #1 S1 Alg. 2.5 S189 PR 1.1 S5 Alg. 3.1 S206 PR 2.1 S16 Alg. 3.2 S215 PR 2.2 S21 Alg. 3.3 S220 PR

NAME DATE ALGEBRA LESSON 4.4

S343

© 2016 CUNY Collaborative Programs Supported by the NYS Education Department

2. Simplify each of the sums and differences below by simplifying the radical terms first. a. √12 + 3√3

b. √20 + √5

c. 8√2 − √8

d. √11 + √99

e. √54 − √24

f. √24 − √54

Page 287: 2016 – 2017 STUDENT HANDBOOK Version 2...Lesson Page Number Lesson Page Number PR #1 S1 Alg. 2.5 S189 PR 1.1 S5 Alg. 3.1 S206 PR 2.1 S16 Alg. 3.2 S215 PR 2.2 S21 Alg. 3.3 S220 PR

NAME DATE ALGEBRA LESSON 4.4

S344

© 2016 CUNY Collaborative Programs Supported by the NYS Education Department

3. Write a multiplication problem equivalent to each of the following addition problems.

a. √5 + √5 + √5

b. √3 + √3 + √3 + √3 + √3

c. √𝑥𝑥 + √𝑥𝑥 + √𝑥𝑥 + √𝑥𝑥 + √𝑥𝑥 + √𝑥𝑥 + √𝑥𝑥

d. √11𝑥𝑥 + √11𝑥𝑥 + √11𝑥𝑥 + √11𝑥𝑥

Page 288: 2016 – 2017 STUDENT HANDBOOK Version 2...Lesson Page Number Lesson Page Number PR #1 S1 Alg. 2.5 S189 PR 1.1 S5 Alg. 3.1 S206 PR 2.1 S16 Alg. 3.2 S215 PR 2.2 S21 Alg. 3.3 S220 PR

NAME DATE ALGEBRA LESSON 4.5

S345

© 2016 CUNY Collaborative Programs Supported by the NYS Education Department

Algebra Lesson 4.5 Mini- Lesson1

Sketched graph A sketched graph can show the relationship between two quantities without specifying actual

numerical quantity precisely.

Handout

1 Edited from EDC’s Transition to Algebra

Page 289: 2016 – 2017 STUDENT HANDBOOK Version 2...Lesson Page Number Lesson Page Number PR #1 S1 Alg. 2.5 S189 PR 1.1 S5 Alg. 3.1 S206 PR 2.1 S16 Alg. 3.2 S215 PR 2.2 S21 Alg. 3.3 S220 PR

NAME DATE ALGEBRA LESSON 4.5

S346

© 2016 CUNY Collaborative Programs Supported by the NYS Education Department

Handout

Page 290: 2016 – 2017 STUDENT HANDBOOK Version 2...Lesson Page Number Lesson Page Number PR #1 S1 Alg. 2.5 S189 PR 1.1 S5 Alg. 3.1 S206 PR 2.1 S16 Alg. 3.2 S215 PR 2.2 S21 Alg. 3.3 S220 PR

NAME DATE ALGEBRA LESSON 4.5

S347

© 2016 CUNY Collaborative Programs Supported by the NYS Education Department

Activity 1 Cut out card sets A and B. Then match the scenarios from the handouts by grouping them together.

Page 291: 2016 – 2017 STUDENT HANDBOOK Version 2...Lesson Page Number Lesson Page Number PR #1 S1 Alg. 2.5 S189 PR 1.1 S5 Alg. 3.1 S206 PR 2.1 S16 Alg. 3.2 S215 PR 2.2 S21 Alg. 3.3 S220 PR

NAME DATE ALGEBRA LESSON 4.5

S348

© 2016 CUNY Collaborative Programs Supported by the NYS Education Department

Page 292: 2016 – 2017 STUDENT HANDBOOK Version 2...Lesson Page Number Lesson Page Number PR #1 S1 Alg. 2.5 S189 PR 1.1 S5 Alg. 3.1 S206 PR 2.1 S16 Alg. 3.2 S215 PR 2.2 S21 Alg. 3.3 S220 PR

NAME DATE ALGEBRA LESSON 4.5

S349

© 2016 CUNY Collaborative Programs Supported by the NYS Education Department

Page 293: 2016 – 2017 STUDENT HANDBOOK Version 2...Lesson Page Number Lesson Page Number PR #1 S1 Alg. 2.5 S189 PR 1.1 S5 Alg. 3.1 S206 PR 2.1 S16 Alg. 3.2 S215 PR 2.2 S21 Alg. 3.3 S220 PR

NAME DATE ALGEBRA LESSON 4.5

S350

© 2016 CUNY Collaborative Programs Supported by the NYS Education Department

Journey Home

Samantha bikes home along a straight road from her friend’s house, a distance of 8 miles. The graph shows her journey.2

1. Describe what may have happened. You should include details like how fast Samantha rides her bike.

__________________________________________________________________________________________ __________________________________________________________________________________________ __________________________________________________________________________________________ __________________________________________________________________________________________ __________________________________________________________________________________________

2. Are all sections of the graph realistic? Fully explain your answer.

__________________________________________________________________________________________ __________________________________________________________________________________________ __________________________________________________________________________________________

2 Mars Shell Center, Interpreting Distance-Time Graphs, http://map.mathshell.org/download.php?fileid=1680

Page 294: 2016 – 2017 STUDENT HANDBOOK Version 2...Lesson Page Number Lesson Page Number PR #1 S1 Alg. 2.5 S189 PR 1.1 S5 Alg. 3.1 S206 PR 2.1 S16 Alg. 3.2 S215 PR 2.2 S21 Alg. 3.3 S220 PR

NAME DATE ALGEBRA LESSON 4.5

S351

© 2016 CUNY Collaborative Programs Supported by the NYS Education Department

__________________________________________________________________________________________

Page 295: 2016 – 2017 STUDENT HANDBOOK Version 2...Lesson Page Number Lesson Page Number PR #1 S1 Alg. 2.5 S189 PR 1.1 S5 Alg. 3.1 S206 PR 2.1 S16 Alg. 3.2 S215 PR 2.2 S21 Alg. 3.3 S220 PR

NAME DATE ALGEBRA LESSON 4.5

S352

© 2016 CUNY Collaborative Programs Supported by the NYS Education Department

Problem Set 1 1. Circle the graph that best matches the given situation.

“When Jenny planted her orange tree, it was two feet tall. After planting, the tree continued to grow every year at a constant rate.”

2. Sketch your own graph to match each of the given situations below.

a. Jane was driving her car on the highway. She slowed down to exit the highway, and then sped back up again.

b. A scuba diver jumps into the water and starts to descend. Once he reaches a certain depth, he begins to ascend back to the surface.

Page 296: 2016 – 2017 STUDENT HANDBOOK Version 2...Lesson Page Number Lesson Page Number PR #1 S1 Alg. 2.5 S189 PR 1.1 S5 Alg. 3.1 S206 PR 2.1 S16 Alg. 3.2 S215 PR 2.2 S21 Alg. 3.3 S220 PR

NAME DATE ALGEBRA LESSON 4.5

S353

© 2016 CUNY Collaborative Programs Supported by the NYS Education Department

3. Choose the situation that best matches the graph. Then, label the vertical axis to match whichever situation you select.

a. Jon turned on the water to fill up the bathtub. Once the bathtub was full, he turned off the water. b. Aisha's sunflower didn't grow much in the cool springtime weather, but grew very rapidly when the warm summer weather arrived. c. The flu virus began with just a few patients. Soon patients began spreading the virus to friends and family members until almost the entire town had the flu.

4. Use the graph below to answer the questions.

a. Draw a graph to represent your commute home from school each day. Be sure to include any stops you make on your way home.

b. Compare your graph with Samantha's graph from Journey Home. c. Imagine that you are traveling home from a friend’s house instead of from school. How

might your graph look different?

Page 297: 2016 – 2017 STUDENT HANDBOOK Version 2...Lesson Page Number Lesson Page Number PR #1 S1 Alg. 2.5 S189 PR 1.1 S5 Alg. 3.1 S206 PR 2.1 S16 Alg. 3.2 S215 PR 2.2 S21 Alg. 3.3 S220 PR

NAME DATE ALGEBRA LESSON 4.5

S354

© 2016 CUNY Collaborative Programs Supported by the NYS Education Department

Activity 2 Olivia and Cynthia debate how to work with Integers Olivia Hey, Cynthia. How did you solve problem #3? It says:

−7 − 3(−4 − 9)

Cynthia Oh, I think I distributed the −3 first. So after I did that I wrote out this:

−7 − 3(−4) − 3(−9)

And then this:

−7 + 12 + 27

Olivia How did you get that −3(−9) in the first part?

Cynthia Mr. Diller told us that when we distribute, we have to multiply by the outside number

that’s right next to the parentheses by every number that shows up on the inside. In

this problem, the outside part is the −3. So that’s where the −3 comes from and the

−9 was from the inside.

Olivia Oh I see it now. I did it differently though.

Cynthia Well when I finished mine up, I got the answer of 32. How did you do it?

Olivia I just followed PEMDAS and made the inside easier first. So first I wrote the problem

down:

−7 − 3(−4 − 9)

Then I combined the −4 and the −9 on the inside to get this:

−7 − 3(−13)

Cynthia How did you get −13? I thought two negatives made a positive.

Olivia That’s only when you multiply. When it’s addition or subtraction, I think of the number

line. We start at −4 and then go to the left 9 spots. That would land me even

deeper into the negative numbers. When I plugged just the inside part into my

calculator, so just the −4 − 9 and it said it was −13, it made sense to me that way.

Cynthia Oh okay. That makes sense to me.

Olivia Yeah, so then I multiplied the −3 by the −13 and got this:

−7 + 39

Page 298: 2016 – 2017 STUDENT HANDBOOK Version 2...Lesson Page Number Lesson Page Number PR #1 S1 Alg. 2.5 S189 PR 1.1 S5 Alg. 3.1 S206 PR 2.1 S16 Alg. 3.2 S215 PR 2.2 S21 Alg. 3.3 S220 PR

NAME DATE ALGEBRA LESSON 4.5

S355

© 2016 CUNY Collaborative Programs Supported by the NYS Education Department

Cynthia And that equals 32 also! Which is the same as my answer.

Olivia I think then it doesn’t matter how we do it, as long as we get the same final answer.

Use the conversation above to recreate the work that both Olivia and Cynthia did on their worksheets.

Olivia Cynthia −7 − 3(−4 − 9) −7 − 3(−4 − 9)

Problem Set 2 Use Olivia and Cynthia’s discussion and your own knowledge to simplify the following expressions.

1. −5 − 4

2. −9(−5)

Page 299: 2016 – 2017 STUDENT HANDBOOK Version 2...Lesson Page Number Lesson Page Number PR #1 S1 Alg. 2.5 S189 PR 1.1 S5 Alg. 3.1 S206 PR 2.1 S16 Alg. 3.2 S215 PR 2.2 S21 Alg. 3.3 S220 PR

NAME DATE ALGEBRA LESSON 4.5

S356

© 2016 CUNY Collaborative Programs Supported by the NYS Education Department

3. −7 + −8 5. −8 ÷ −4 7. 5(−7) 9. −(−25 + 6) 11. −4 + 5(−3) 13. −7(11)(13) − 13(11)(7)

4. −14(−2) 6. −9 + 3 8. 5 − (3 − 18) 10. 2(3 − 9) − 3(2 − 9) 12. 7(2 − 11) + 2(7 − 11) 14. 7 − (2 − 12)

Page 300: 2016 – 2017 STUDENT HANDBOOK Version 2...Lesson Page Number Lesson Page Number PR #1 S1 Alg. 2.5 S189 PR 1.1 S5 Alg. 3.1 S206 PR 2.1 S16 Alg. 3.2 S215 PR 2.2 S21 Alg. 3.3 S220 PR

NAME DATE ALGEBRA LESSON 4.5

S357

© 2016 CUNY Collaborative Programs Supported by the NYS Education Department

15. −4−9−5

17. −(1 − 61 − 13)

16. (2 − 5)(2)3

Page 301: 2016 – 2017 STUDENT HANDBOOK Version 2...Lesson Page Number Lesson Page Number PR #1 S1 Alg. 2.5 S189 PR 1.1 S5 Alg. 3.1 S206 PR 2.1 S16 Alg. 3.2 S215 PR 2.2 S21 Alg. 3.3 S220 PR

NAME DATE ALGEBRA LESSON 4.6

S358

© 2016 CUNY Collaborative Programs Supported by the NYS Education Department

Algebra Lesson 4.61

Mini-Lesson My equation: __________________

1 Some materials in this lesson are adapted and edited from: Education Development Center, Inc. (2011 & 2013.) Transition to Algebra, Unit 6.

Page 302: 2016 – 2017 STUDENT HANDBOOK Version 2...Lesson Page Number Lesson Page Number PR #1 S1 Alg. 2.5 S189 PR 1.1 S5 Alg. 3.1 S206 PR 2.1 S16 Alg. 3.2 S215 PR 2.2 S21 Alg. 3.3 S220 PR

NAME DATE ALGEBRA LESSON 4.6

S359

© 2016 CUNY Collaborative Programs Supported by the NYS Education Department

Activity 12 1. Circle the points that make the hint true. If the points fit, plot them on the grid below. There

are multiple solutions, so be sure to check each point.

Hint: y= x + -3

*Don’t forget the y-coordinate always equals x+ -3 in this problem. 2. Find five more solution points for this equation. You might not be able to plot them all on the

graph.

2 Materials adapted from: Education Development Center, Inc. (2011 & 2013.) Transition to Algebra, Unit 6.

Page 303: 2016 – 2017 STUDENT HANDBOOK Version 2...Lesson Page Number Lesson Page Number PR #1 S1 Alg. 2.5 S189 PR 1.1 S5 Alg. 3.1 S206 PR 2.1 S16 Alg. 3.2 S215 PR 2.2 S21 Alg. 3.3 S220 PR

NAME DATE ALGEBRA LESSON 4.6

S360

© 2016 CUNY Collaborative Programs Supported by the NYS Education Department

3. Connecting your solution points may help you notice that there are other solution points in between the ones you found and plotted. List two such points, and check to see if they are solutions.

( __, __ ) ( __, __ )

Circle the points that make each equation true and plot them if possible. Then, find five of your own solutions, plot them if possible, and connect all of the solutions points. 4. y= 2x + 2

Page 304: 2016 – 2017 STUDENT HANDBOOK Version 2...Lesson Page Number Lesson Page Number PR #1 S1 Alg. 2.5 S189 PR 1.1 S5 Alg. 3.1 S206 PR 2.1 S16 Alg. 3.2 S215 PR 2.2 S21 Alg. 3.3 S220 PR

NAME DATE ALGEBRA LESSON 4.6

S361

© 2016 CUNY Collaborative Programs Supported by the NYS Education Department

5. y= x2 + 2

Page 305: 2016 – 2017 STUDENT HANDBOOK Version 2...Lesson Page Number Lesson Page Number PR #1 S1 Alg. 2.5 S189 PR 1.1 S5 Alg. 3.1 S206 PR 2.1 S16 Alg. 3.2 S215 PR 2.2 S21 Alg. 3.3 S220 PR

NAME DATE ALGEBRA LESSON 4.6

S362

© 2016 CUNY Collaborative Programs Supported by the NYS Education Department

Problem Set 13 Circle the points that make each equation true and plot them if possible. Then, find five of your own solutions, plot them if possible, and connect all of the solution points.

1. y = -x + 2

2. y = 2x2 - 4

3 Materials adapted from: Education Development Center, Inc. (2011 & 2013.) Transition to Algebra, Unit 6.

Page 306: 2016 – 2017 STUDENT HANDBOOK Version 2...Lesson Page Number Lesson Page Number PR #1 S1 Alg. 2.5 S189 PR 1.1 S5 Alg. 3.1 S206 PR 2.1 S16 Alg. 3.2 S215 PR 2.2 S21 Alg. 3.3 S220 PR

NAME DATE ALGEBRA LESSON 4.6

S363

© 2016 CUNY Collaborative Programs Supported by the NYS Education Department

Activity 24

1. I am point X.

◊ My y-coordinate satisfies y=x+-5.

◊ My x-coordinate is 4.

What is my coordinate address?

2. I am point Y.

◊ y=x+-5 ◊ x=-3 What is my coordinate address?

3. I am point Z.

◊ y=x+-5 ◊ x is 12. What is my coordinate address?

4. A, B, and C are all solution points for the equation y=x+-5 because each point gives a pair of

numbers that make the equation true. What would be a point that is not a solution for y=x+-5?

5. Which of the following points are also solution points for y = x + -5? Circle the solution points

and cross out the non-solution points.

(45, 40) (1, -4) (½, -4½) (-6, 1) (2, -3)

(3, -2) (5 , ) (-15, -10) (10, 5) (5, 0)

4 Materials adapted from: Education Development Center, Inc. (2011 & 2013.) Transition to Algebra, Unit 6.

Page 307: 2016 – 2017 STUDENT HANDBOOK Version 2...Lesson Page Number Lesson Page Number PR #1 S1 Alg. 2.5 S189 PR 1.1 S5 Alg. 3.1 S206 PR 2.1 S16 Alg. 3.2 S215 PR 2.2 S21 Alg. 3.3 S220 PR

NAME DATE ALGEBRA LESSON 4.6

S364

© 2016 CUNY Collaborative Programs Supported by the NYS Education Department

6. Plot all the solution point from problems 1-5 that fit on the grid:

7. There are infinitely many more solution points for y=x+-5. Find six more, record them in the table and plot them too if they fit on the graph above.

(x,y)

(0, -5)

8. From simply looking at the graph, these points look like they might be solution points to the

equation in number 6. Are they?

a. (1.2, -3.7) b. (-0.5, -5.5)

9. The graph of y = x+-5 is a line connecting all the solution points. Explain why it makes sense to

connect the points when graphing the relationship.

Page 308: 2016 – 2017 STUDENT HANDBOOK Version 2...Lesson Page Number Lesson Page Number PR #1 S1 Alg. 2.5 S189 PR 1.1 S5 Alg. 3.1 S206 PR 2.1 S16 Alg. 3.2 S215 PR 2.2 S21 Alg. 3.3 S220 PR

NAME DATE ALGEBRA LESSON 4.6

S365

© 2016 CUNY Collaborative Programs Supported by the NYS Education Department

10. (x,y) pairs that make x+y=6 true are solution points for that equation. a. Find a solution if x=1. (1, __ )

b. Find a solution point if x = -3.

c. Find a solution point if y=0.

d. Find a solution point if x=100.

e. Find three more solution points.

f. You know have seven solution points for this equation. Some of them don’t fit on the graph paper shown here. Plot the ones that do and use them to draw the graph of x+y=6

11. y= -2x + 3

a. Find a solution point if x = 0.

b. Circle the solution points; cross out non-solution points.

(4, -5) (2 ,0) (-2, 7)

(10, -17) (-1, 5) (-10, 17)

c. Use the solution points to draw the graph

of y=-2x+3. Check more solution points, if necessary.

Page 309: 2016 – 2017 STUDENT HANDBOOK Version 2...Lesson Page Number Lesson Page Number PR #1 S1 Alg. 2.5 S189 PR 1.1 S5 Alg. 3.1 S206 PR 2.1 S16 Alg. 3.2 S215 PR 2.2 S21 Alg. 3.3 S220 PR

NAME DATE ALGEBRA LESSON 4.6

S366

© 2016 CUNY Collaborative Programs Supported by the NYS Education Department

12. The graph of y = x2 - 5 is not a straight line. a. Find a solution point if x = 0.

b. Circle the solution points; cross out non-solution points.

(-2,-1) (3,4) (4,9) (1,-4)

(2,-1) (5,-20) (2,0) (-1,-4)

(-6,31) (-5,20) (-3,4) (10,95)

13. Solve for x

a. 2x + 5 = 7 b. 2x + 5 = 1 c. 2x + 5 =-3 (hint: If blob + 5 = 7, What is blob?) d. These equations are all specific cases of

2x+5 = y. By solving the equations above, you have found 3 solutions points. What are they?

(___, 7) (___, 1) ( ___, ___ )

e. Use these points (and more if you want) to

graph 2x+5 = y.

f. Use the graph to find what seems to be the solution point if y = -1.

g. You’ve found a possible solution point from the graph. Solve the equation 2x+5=-1 to know for sure.

h. What point can help you solve 2x+5=5?

i. Find x: 2x+5=5

Page 310: 2016 – 2017 STUDENT HANDBOOK Version 2...Lesson Page Number Lesson Page Number PR #1 S1 Alg. 2.5 S189 PR 1.1 S5 Alg. 3.1 S206 PR 2.1 S16 Alg. 3.2 S215 PR 2.2 S21 Alg. 3.3 S220 PR

NAME DATE ALGEBRA LESSON 4.6

S367

© 2016 CUNY Collaborative Programs Supported by the NYS Education Department

14.

Page 311: 2016 – 2017 STUDENT HANDBOOK Version 2...Lesson Page Number Lesson Page Number PR #1 S1 Alg. 2.5 S189 PR 1.1 S5 Alg. 3.1 S206 PR 2.1 S16 Alg. 3.2 S215 PR 2.2 S21 Alg. 3.3 S220 PR

NAME DATE ALGEBRA LESSON 4.6

S368

© 2016 CUNY Collaborative Programs Supported by the NYS Education Department

Problem Set 25 Use the hints to determine the coordinate point in each question.

1. I am point Q. My x-coordinate is 0. I lie on y = x – 4. You can find me at ( , )

2. I am point S. My y-coordinate is 0. I lie on y = x – 4. You can find me at ( , )

3. I am point R. My x-coordinate is 0. I lie on y = x – 4. You can find me at ( , )

4. I am point T. I lie on y = x – 4. You can find me at ( , ) *How many answers are there to number 4?*

5. Find pairs of points, (x,y), that make the equation y = -x + 2 true. These are the solution points. a. Find a solution point where x = 0. b. Find a solution point where x = -3. c. Find a solution point where y = 0. d. Find a solution point where y = -10. e. Find three more solution points. f. Plot the solutions points that fit on the graph. Connect them to draw the graph of y = -x + 2.

5 Materials adapted from: Education Development Center, Inc. (2011 & 2013.) Transition to Algebra, Unit 6.

Page 312: 2016 – 2017 STUDENT HANDBOOK Version 2...Lesson Page Number Lesson Page Number PR #1 S1 Alg. 2.5 S189 PR 1.1 S5 Alg. 3.1 S206 PR 2.1 S16 Alg. 3.2 S215 PR 2.2 S21 Alg. 3.3 S220 PR

NAME DATE ALGEBRA LESSON 4.6

S369

© 2016 CUNY Collaborative Programs Supported by the NYS Education Department

Activity 36 Fill in the tables with the solution points for each equation. Then, cut out each card and match up each of the cards from Set A with its corresponding card from Set B.

Card Set A 1.

y = x + 3

x -3 0 1

y

2.

y = 2x - 2

x 0 1 4

y

3.

y = 3

x -3 0 1

y

4.

y = -3x - 1

x -2 0

y

5.

x = -2

x

y -2 0 2

6.

y = x2 - 4

x -2 0 2

y

7.

y = −12

x2 + 2

x -2 0 4

y

8.

y = -x2 + 4

x -1 0 2

y

6 Materials adapted from: Education Development Center, Inc. (2011 & 2013.) Transition to Algebra, Unit 6.

Page 313: 2016 – 2017 STUDENT HANDBOOK Version 2...Lesson Page Number Lesson Page Number PR #1 S1 Alg. 2.5 S189 PR 1.1 S5 Alg. 3.1 S206 PR 2.1 S16 Alg. 3.2 S215 PR 2.2 S21 Alg. 3.3 S220 PR

NAME DATE ALGEBRA LESSON 4.6

S370

© 2016 CUNY Collaborative Programs Supported by the NYS Education Department

Card Set B

A. B.

C. D.

E. F.

G.

H.

Page 314: 2016 – 2017 STUDENT HANDBOOK Version 2...Lesson Page Number Lesson Page Number PR #1 S1 Alg. 2.5 S189 PR 1.1 S5 Alg. 3.1 S206 PR 2.1 S16 Alg. 3.2 S215 PR 2.2 S21 Alg. 3.3 S220 PR

NAME DATE ALGEBRA LESSON 4.6

S371

© 2016 CUNY Collaborative Programs Supported by the NYS Education Department

Activity 47 Based on the following graphs, write a scenario that describes the duration of a trip and the speed of travel and/or how much distance was covered. The first graph is done for you as an example. 1. Graph I shows the distance traveled on a trip from home to the beach and back. What can you

say about the trip from the graph? Make up a scenario to correspond with the graph.

2. Graph II shows a slightly different trip. What does Graph II show compared to Graph I?

7 Edited from EDC's Transition to Algebra

Page 315: 2016 – 2017 STUDENT HANDBOOK Version 2...Lesson Page Number Lesson Page Number PR #1 S1 Alg. 2.5 S189 PR 1.1 S5 Alg. 3.1 S206 PR 2.1 S16 Alg. 3.2 S215 PR 2.2 S21 Alg. 3.3 S220 PR

NAME DATE ALGEBRA LESSON 4.6

S372

© 2016 CUNY Collaborative Programs Supported by the NYS Education Department

3. How does the trip that Graph III describes differ from the other trips?

4. Say what might have been doing on during the trip that Graph IV represents.

Page 316: 2016 – 2017 STUDENT HANDBOOK Version 2...Lesson Page Number Lesson Page Number PR #1 S1 Alg. 2.5 S189 PR 1.1 S5 Alg. 3.1 S206 PR 2.1 S16 Alg. 3.2 S215 PR 2.2 S21 Alg. 3.3 S220 PR

NAME DATE ALGEBRA LESSON 4.6

S373

© 2016 CUNY Collaborative Programs Supported by the NYS Education Department

Page 317: 2016 – 2017 STUDENT HANDBOOK Version 2...Lesson Page Number Lesson Page Number PR #1 S1 Alg. 2.5 S189 PR 1.1 S5 Alg. 3.1 S206 PR 2.1 S16 Alg. 3.2 S215 PR 2.2 S21 Alg. 3.3 S220 PR

NAME DATE ALGEBRA LESSON 4.6

S374

© 2016 CUNY Collaborative Programs Supported by the NYS Education Department

Problem Set 38 Solve for x. 1. x2 – 9 = -8 2. x2 – 9 = -5 3. x2 – 9 = 0 4. These equations are all special cases of x2 – 9 = y. By solving the equations above, you

should have found six solution points to the equation x2 – 9 = y. What are they? ( , -8 ) ( , -5 ) ( , ) ( , -8 ) ( , -5 ) ( , ) 5. Solve x2 – 9 = -9. Why do you get only one solution point? 6.

Use these points (and more if necessary) to graph x2 – 9 = y.

8 Materials adapted from: Education Development Center, Inc. (2011 & 2013.) Transition to Algebra, Unit 6.

Page 318: 2016 – 2017 STUDENT HANDBOOK Version 2...Lesson Page Number Lesson Page Number PR #1 S1 Alg. 2.5 S189 PR 1.1 S5 Alg. 3.1 S206 PR 2.1 S16 Alg. 3.2 S215 PR 2.2 S21 Alg. 3.3 S220 PR

NAME DATE ALGEBRA LESSON 4.6

S375

© 2016 CUNY Collaborative Programs Supported by the NYS Education Department

7. Explain why it makes sense from this problem that a graph of an equation with x2 must curve back on itself.

8. x2 – 9 = -10 has no solution. That means there is no solution point for x2 - 4 = y that has a y-

value of -10. How does this fact show up in the graph?

Page 319: 2016 – 2017 STUDENT HANDBOOK Version 2...Lesson Page Number Lesson Page Number PR #1 S1 Alg. 2.5 S189 PR 1.1 S5 Alg. 3.1 S206 PR 2.1 S16 Alg. 3.2 S215 PR 2.2 S21 Alg. 3.3 S220 PR

NAME DATE ALGEBRA LESSON 4.6

S376

© 2016 CUNY Collaborative Programs Supported by the NYS Education Department

Lesson Formative Assessment

Use solution points to draw the graph of y = x2 - 5. Check more solution points if necessary.

Page 320: 2016 – 2017 STUDENT HANDBOOK Version 2...Lesson Page Number Lesson Page Number PR #1 S1 Alg. 2.5 S189 PR 1.1 S5 Alg. 3.1 S206 PR 2.1 S16 Alg. 3.2 S215 PR 2.2 S21 Alg. 3.3 S220 PR

NAME DATE ALGEBRA LESSON 4.6

S377

© 2016 CUNY Collaborative Programs Supported by the NYS Education Department

Page 321: 2016 – 2017 STUDENT HANDBOOK Version 2...Lesson Page Number Lesson Page Number PR #1 S1 Alg. 2.5 S189 PR 1.1 S5 Alg. 3.1 S206 PR 2.1 S16 Alg. 3.2 S215 PR 2.2 S21 Alg. 3.3 S220 PR

NAME DATE ALGEBRA LESSON 4.7

S378

© 2016 CUNY Collaborative Programs Supported by the NYS Education Department

Algebra Lesson 4.71 Activity 12 1. Look at each of the lines below. As you look from left to right along each line, does it go up,

down or neither? The answer to this question tells us if the slope of each line. When a line goes up from left to right, it has a positive slope, and when a line goes down from left to right, it has a negative slope. The slope is zero if the line is horizontal, meaning it shows no increase or decrease from left to right. Determine if the slopes of the lines below are positive, negative, or zero.

2. Now put lines A-G in order of steepness, from steepest in the negative direction to steepest in the positive direction.

Steepest Negative Steepest Positive

3. To make precise comparisons, we can measure steepness of a line using slope. You already

know how to find the sign of the slope of a line. To measure the slope, find two points on the line and use the ratio of the y-distance to the x-distance of the points.

1 Materials in this lesson are adapted from: Education Development Center, Inc. (2012.) Transition to Algebra, Unit 9. 2 Materials in this lesson are adapted from: Education Development Center, Inc. (2012.) Transition to Algebra, Unit 9.

Page 322: 2016 – 2017 STUDENT HANDBOOK Version 2...Lesson Page Number Lesson Page Number PR #1 S1 Alg. 2.5 S189 PR 1.1 S5 Alg. 3.1 S206 PR 2.1 S16 Alg. 3.2 S215 PR 2.2 S21 Alg. 3.3 S220 PR

NAME DATE ALGEBRA LESSON 4.7

S379

© 2016 CUNY Collaborative Programs Supported by the NYS Education Department

Use the slope ratio to find the slope of each line. Don’t forget the sign of each slope!

A B C D E

x-distance: ______ x-distance: ______ x-distance: ______ x-distance: ______ x-distance: ______ y-distance: ______ y-distance: ______ y-distance: ______ y-distance: ______ y-distance: ______ slope: ______ slope: ______ slope: ______ slope: ______ slope: ______ For problems 4-6, imagine a line with two points, P and Q marked on it. 4. Imagine the line has a very steep positive slope. Which distance between P and Q is greater,

the x-distance or the y-distance? How do you know? 5. What is true about the x-distance and y-distance between P and Q when the slope is zero?

How do you know? 6. What is true about the x-distance and y-distance between P and Q when the slope is one?

How do you know? 7. Imagine 4 new lines, each with one of the four following slopes:

𝟏𝟏𝟑𝟑, 𝟏𝟏𝟒𝟒, 𝟏𝟏𝟓𝟓, 𝟏𝟏𝟔𝟔

Which line is the steepest? Explain how you know, using x-distances and y-distances.

Page 323: 2016 – 2017 STUDENT HANDBOOK Version 2...Lesson Page Number Lesson Page Number PR #1 S1 Alg. 2.5 S189 PR 1.1 S5 Alg. 3.1 S206 PR 2.1 S16 Alg. 3.2 S215 PR 2.2 S21 Alg. 3.3 S220 PR

NAME DATE ALGEBRA LESSON 4.7

S380

© 2016 CUNY Collaborative Programs Supported by the NYS Education Department

8. Imagine a that goes through the points (-3,2) and (7,6). Determine the x-distance, y-distance, and slope, including the sign of the slope.

x-distance: ______ y-distance: ______ slope: ______

9. Imagine a that goes through the points (5,7) and (2,-6). Determine the x-distance, y-distance, and slope, including the sign of the slope.

x-distance: ______ y-distance: ______ slope: ______ 10. Imagine a that goes through the points (9,26) and (39,86). Determine the x-distance, y-

distance, and slope, including the sign of the slope.

x-distance: ______ y-distance: ______ slope: ______ 11. Imagine a that goes through the points (-50,50) and (-100,250). Determine the x-distance, y-

distance, and slope, including the sign of the slope.

x-distance: ______ y-distance: ______ slope: ______ 12. Next, imagine a line with a slope of zero. Name three points on the line. What do they have

in common?

( , ) ( , ) ( , )

13. Tahir and Bella are discussing the line that passes through points B and T. Tahir says, “I think

this line has a negative slope. If you start at point T and move to point B, the line goes down.” Bella responds, “That’s not how you read a graph. I think the slope of this line is positive.” Who is correct? What is the correct way to read the graph?

Page 324: 2016 – 2017 STUDENT HANDBOOK Version 2...Lesson Page Number Lesson Page Number PR #1 S1 Alg. 2.5 S189 PR 1.1 S5 Alg. 3.1 S206 PR 2.1 S16 Alg. 3.2 S215 PR 2.2 S21 Alg. 3.3 S220 PR

NAME DATE ALGEBRA LESSON 4.7

S381

© 2016 CUNY Collaborative Programs Supported by the NYS Education Department

Practice Set 13 Determine the answers to the questions based on the information given. 1. 2. 3.

x-distance: ______ x-distance: ______ x-distance: ______ y-distance: ______ y-distance: ______ y-distance: ______

slope: ______ slope: ______ slope: ______ 4. The points (0, 0) and (-3, 6) lie on the same line. What is the sign of the slope of the line? 5. The points (0, 0) and (-401,-296) lie on the same line. What is the sign of the slope of the line? 6. The points (11, 4) and (2, 11) lie on the same line. What is the sign of the slope of the line? 7. The points (-5,-100) and (4,-50) lie on the same line. What is the sign of the slope of the line? 8. The points (-5, 50) and (-15,250) lie on the same line. Find the:

sign of the slope: ______ x-distance: ______ y-distance: ______ slope: ______

3 Materials in this lesson are adapted from: Education Development Center, Inc. (2012.) Transition to Algebra, Unit 9.

Page 325: 2016 – 2017 STUDENT HANDBOOK Version 2...Lesson Page Number Lesson Page Number PR #1 S1 Alg. 2.5 S189 PR 1.1 S5 Alg. 3.1 S206 PR 2.1 S16 Alg. 3.2 S215 PR 2.2 S21 Alg. 3.3 S220 PR

NAME DATE ALGEBRA LESSON 4.7

S382

© 2016 CUNY Collaborative Programs Supported by the NYS Education Department

9. The points (10, 80) and (-2,88) lie on the same line. Find the:

sign of the slope: ______ x-distance: ______ y-distance: ______ slope: ______

10. The points (-64, 22) and (-54, 722) lie on the same line. Find the:

sign of the slope: ______ x-distance: ______ y-distance: ______ slope: ______

11. Find the missing quantities in the mobile.

Page 326: 2016 – 2017 STUDENT HANDBOOK Version 2...Lesson Page Number Lesson Page Number PR #1 S1 Alg. 2.5 S189 PR 1.1 S5 Alg. 3.1 S206 PR 2.1 S16 Alg. 3.2 S215 PR 2.2 S21 Alg. 3.3 S220 PR

NAME DATE ALGEBRA LESSON 4.7

S383

© 2016 CUNY Collaborative Programs Supported by the NYS Education Department

12. Complete the MysteryGrid

Page 327: 2016 – 2017 STUDENT HANDBOOK Version 2...Lesson Page Number Lesson Page Number PR #1 S1 Alg. 2.5 S189 PR 1.1 S5 Alg. 3.1 S206 PR 2.1 S16 Alg. 3.2 S215 PR 2.2 S21 Alg. 3.3 S220 PR

NAME DATE ALGEBRA LESSON 4.7

S384

© 2016 CUNY Collaborative Programs Supported by the NYS Education Department

Activity 24 Determine the answers to the questions based on the information given. 1. 2. 3. Which line is steeper?

a) Line 1 b) Line 2 c) Both lines are equally steep d) Cannot be determined from

the given information

x-distance: ______ x-distance: ______ y-distance: ______ y-distance: ______

slope: ______ slope: ______ 4. This line has a slope of 𝟒𝟒

𝟏𝟏𝟏𝟏. Write 5 other names for 𝟒𝟒

𝟏𝟏𝟏𝟏.

5. Draw two lines on the grid that have the same slope as number 4.

4 Materials in this lesson are adapted from: Education Development Center, Inc. (2012.) Transition to Algebra, Unit 9.

Page 328: 2016 – 2017 STUDENT HANDBOOK Version 2...Lesson Page Number Lesson Page Number PR #1 S1 Alg. 2.5 S189 PR 1.1 S5 Alg. 3.1 S206 PR 2.1 S16 Alg. 3.2 S215 PR 2.2 S21 Alg. 3.3 S220 PR

NAME DATE ALGEBRA LESSON 4.7

S385

© 2016 CUNY Collaborative Programs Supported by the NYS Education Department

6. Draw two lines on the grid that have the same slope as the given line. Numbers 7-9 below look like they have the same slope, but they don’t! Find each slope. *Hint: Notice the scale of the axes *

7. 8. 9. slope: ______ slope: ______ slope: ______

Page 329: 2016 – 2017 STUDENT HANDBOOK Version 2...Lesson Page Number Lesson Page Number PR #1 S1 Alg. 2.5 S189 PR 1.1 S5 Alg. 3.1 S206 PR 2.1 S16 Alg. 3.2 S215 PR 2.2 S21 Alg. 3.3 S220 PR

NAME DATE ALGEBRA LESSON 4.7

S386

© 2016 CUNY Collaborative Programs Supported by the NYS Education Department

Practice Set 25 1. Draw a line through point A with a slope of 𝟑𝟑

𝟓𝟓.

Draw a line through point A with a slope of 𝟓𝟓

𝟔𝟔.

Which is greater, 𝟑𝟑

𝟓𝟓 or 𝟓𝟓

𝟔𝟔?

Write two more names for the slope of the steeper line.

2. Draw a line through point B with a slope of 𝟒𝟒𝟑𝟑.

Draw a line through point B with a slope of 𝟐𝟐

𝟏𝟏.

Which is greater, 𝟒𝟒

𝟑𝟑 or 𝟐𝟐

𝟏𝟏?

Write two more names for the slope of the steeper line.

3. This line has a slope of −𝟔𝟔𝟗𝟗

.

Write five other names for −𝟔𝟔𝟗𝟗

. 4. Draw two more lines on the graph that have the same slope.

5 Materials in this lesson are adapted from: Education Development Center, Inc. (2012.) Transition to Algebra, Unit 9.

Page 330: 2016 – 2017 STUDENT HANDBOOK Version 2...Lesson Page Number Lesson Page Number PR #1 S1 Alg. 2.5 S189 PR 1.1 S5 Alg. 3.1 S206 PR 2.1 S16 Alg. 3.2 S215 PR 2.2 S21 Alg. 3.3 S220 PR

NAME DATE ALGEBRA LESSON 4.7

S387

© 2016 CUNY Collaborative Programs Supported by the NYS Education Department

Activity 36

1. How many lines can you draw through the point (5, 3) that have a slope of −23

? Draw every line you can that has these properties.

You should have found out that there is only one line like that, which is useful to know and understand. It means that you know exactly where the line is, and it also means you can determine if a given point is on the line or off the line.

2. By drawing that one line, you are connection all of the solution points for a line that runs through (5,3) and has a slope of −2

3. Since this line extends infinitely (forever) in both directions,

there are an infinite (unlimited) number of points on the line. List six points on the line here. 3. Are points L, M, and N collinear (on the same line)? How do you know? 6 Materials in this lesson are adapted from: Education Development Center, Inc. (2012.) Transition to Algebra, Unit 9.

Page 331: 2016 – 2017 STUDENT HANDBOOK Version 2...Lesson Page Number Lesson Page Number PR #1 S1 Alg. 2.5 S189 PR 1.1 S5 Alg. 3.1 S206 PR 2.1 S16 Alg. 3.2 S215 PR 2.2 S21 Alg. 3.3 S220 PR

NAME DATE ALGEBRA LESSON 4.7

S388

© 2016 CUNY Collaborative Programs Supported by the NYS Education Department

4. Imagine a line between points F and G that has a slope of 3. Now, imagine a line between points J and K that also has a slope of 3. Does that mean that points F, G, J and K are all collinear?

5. Imagine a line between points A and B that has a slope of -4. Now, imagine a line between

points B and C that also has a slope -4. Does that mean that points A, B and C are collinear? 6. Imagine a line between points P and Q that has a slope of 1

2. Does that mean that points P, Q

and R are all collinear? 7. Imagine a line between points L and M that has a slope of −4

6. Now imagine a line between

points M and O that also has a slope of −1218

. Does that mean that points L, M and O are all collinear?

8. Imagine three points: X (5,920), Y (35,720) and Z (65,520). Do X, Y and Z all lie on the same

line? How do you know? 9. Imagine three points: S (-20,-400), U (20,100) and N (60,350). Do S, U and N all lie on the

same line? How do you know?

Page 332: 2016 – 2017 STUDENT HANDBOOK Version 2...Lesson Page Number Lesson Page Number PR #1 S1 Alg. 2.5 S189 PR 1.1 S5 Alg. 3.1 S206 PR 2.1 S16 Alg. 3.2 S215 PR 2.2 S21 Alg. 3.3 S220 PR

NAME DATE ALGEBRA LESSON 4.7

S389

© 2016 CUNY Collaborative Programs Supported by the NYS Education Department

Activity 47

7 Materials in this lesson are adapted from: Education Development Center, Inc. (2012.) Transition to Algebra, Unit 9.

Page 333: 2016 – 2017 STUDENT HANDBOOK Version 2...Lesson Page Number Lesson Page Number PR #1 S1 Alg. 2.5 S189 PR 1.1 S5 Alg. 3.1 S206 PR 2.1 S16 Alg. 3.2 S215 PR 2.2 S21 Alg. 3.3 S220 PR

NAME DATE ALGEBRA LESSON 4.7

S390

© 2016 CUNY Collaborative Programs Supported by the NYS Education Department

Practice Set 38

1. Draw a line with a slope of 35 that runs through the point (6, 2). Name six points on the line.

2. Draw a line with a slope of −23

that runs through the point (8,-1). Name six points on the line.

3. Imagine three points are plotted on a graph: F (20, 60), G (30,160) and H (60,510). Are F, G and H collinear? How do you know? 4. Imagine three points are plotted on a graph: C (10, 7), A (20, 1) and T (25,-2). Are C, A and T collinear? How do you know?

8 Materials in this lesson are adapted from: Education Development Center, Inc. (2012.) Transition to Algebra, Unit 9.

Page 334: 2016 – 2017 STUDENT HANDBOOK Version 2...Lesson Page Number Lesson Page Number PR #1 S1 Alg. 2.5 S189 PR 1.1 S5 Alg. 3.1 S206 PR 2.1 S16 Alg. 3.2 S215 PR 2.2 S21 Alg. 3.3 S220 PR

NAME DATE ALGEBRA LESSON 4.7

S391

© 2016 CUNY Collaborative Programs Supported by the NYS Education Department

5. The graph shows Tamra and Saul’s distance from work over time.

a. Are they traveling to work or from work?

b. Who started traveling first?

c. Who is traveling faster?

d. How many miles per hour does Saul travel?

e. How many miles per hour does Tamra travel?

6. Five friends experience their growth spurts at the same time. One friend grows 2 centimeters,

one grows 4 centimeters, one grows 6 centimeters, one grows 8 centimeters, and one grows 10 centimeters. Determine how many centimeters Camilo grew based on the clues below.

• Annie grew more than Beverly

• Douglass grew 4 more centimeters than Elijah, but fewer than Beverly

• The difference in growth between Camilo and Elijah is 2 centimeters

7.

Page 335: 2016 – 2017 STUDENT HANDBOOK Version 2...Lesson Page Number Lesson Page Number PR #1 S1 Alg. 2.5 S189 PR 1.1 S5 Alg. 3.1 S206 PR 2.1 S16 Alg. 3.2 S215 PR 2.2 S21 Alg. 3.3 S220 PR

NAME DATE ALGEBRA LESSON 4.7

S392

© 2016 CUNY Collaborative Programs Supported by the NYS Education Department

8.

Page 336: 2016 – 2017 STUDENT HANDBOOK Version 2...Lesson Page Number Lesson Page Number PR #1 S1 Alg. 2.5 S189 PR 1.1 S5 Alg. 3.1 S206 PR 2.1 S16 Alg. 3.2 S215 PR 2.2 S21 Alg. 3.3 S220 PR

NAME DATE ALGEBRA LESSON 4.8

S393

© 2016 CUNY Collaborative Programs Supported by the NYS Education Department

Algebra Lesson 4.81 Mini-Lesson Question: On the graph below, draw all of the lines that go through (2,3) with a slope of ½ . (Remember that ½ has many other fractions equivalent to it.) (Provide graph paper)

1 Materials in this lesson are adapted from: Education Development Center, Inc. (2012.) Transition to Algebra, Unit 9.

Page 337: 2016 – 2017 STUDENT HANDBOOK Version 2...Lesson Page Number Lesson Page Number PR #1 S1 Alg. 2.5 S189 PR 1.1 S5 Alg. 3.1 S206 PR 2.1 S16 Alg. 3.2 S215 PR 2.2 S21 Alg. 3.3 S220 PR

NAME DATE ALGEBRA LESSON 4.8

S394

© 2016 CUNY Collaborative Programs Supported by the NYS Education Department

Activity 12 Use the work above to answer the following: 1. Jahnia says, “Marcel, how did you get your x-distance of 10?” How might Marcel respond?

(Use a rough sketch to help yourself think about it.) 2. Marcel asks Jahnia, “How did you know your slope is negative? Both of the distances are

positive.” How might Jahnia respond?

2 Materials in this lesson are adapted from: Education Development Center, Inc. (2012.) Transition to Algebra, Unit 9.

A line goes through the point (9,8) and has a slope of 45. Marcel and Jahnia

discuss the following questions in math class.

Is (-1,0) on the line? Is (5,13) on the line? Marcel: The x-distance is 10. Jahnia: The slope is negative.

The y-distance is 8. The y-distance is 5. The slope is positive. The x-distance is 4.

The slope is 810

. The slope is −45

. Yes, (-1,0) is on the line. No, (5,13) is not on the line.

Page 338: 2016 – 2017 STUDENT HANDBOOK Version 2...Lesson Page Number Lesson Page Number PR #1 S1 Alg. 2.5 S189 PR 1.1 S5 Alg. 3.1 S206 PR 2.1 S16 Alg. 3.2 S215 PR 2.2 S21 Alg. 3.3 S220 PR

NAME DATE ALGEBRA LESSON 4.8

S395

© 2016 CUNY Collaborative Programs Supported by the NYS Education Department

3. Consider these methods with the following dialogue to think about how can you test the point (x, y) to see if it is on this line.

4. Follow-up: Could y−8

x−9= 4

5 be the equation of the line?

Marcel: So, next we have to figure out if the point (x,y) is on the line. How can we do that?

Jahnia: That problem looks similar to the ones we just completed. The only difference is we are using the letters x and y instead of a pair of numbers. Let’s try to complete it the same way as the other problems. What would be the x-distance?

Marcel: Before we had to subtract to get the distance. So let’s subtract here. The x-distance would be the difference between x and 9, so x-9 is the x-distance.

Jahnia: Ok, that sounds good. So that means the y-distance would be ___________.

Marcel: Now lets’ try and figure out if the slope is negative or positive. We can’t plot the point to see where it is, because we don’t know where (x,y) is. Hmm…

Jahnia: We do know where (x,y) is! It’s on the line. So that means we know the slope has to be 4

5. We don’t have to answer “yes” or “no,” we just have to figure out a pattern for the

points on the line.

Marcel: Ok, I think I understand. It’s like the points we had before were guesses, and we were using the slope to check to see if the points fit a pattern. Now we are just using x and y in the pattern instead of two numbers from a point.

Jahnia: Exactly! So if (x,y) is a point, then 𝑦𝑦−8𝑥𝑥−9

= 45.

Marcel: So that equation should work for every (x,y) point that is on the line.

Jahnia: That means the equation for the line is just the y-distance over the x-distance set equal to the slope.

Page 339: 2016 – 2017 STUDENT HANDBOOK Version 2...Lesson Page Number Lesson Page Number PR #1 S1 Alg. 2.5 S189 PR 1.1 S5 Alg. 3.1 S206 PR 2.1 S16 Alg. 3.2 S215 PR 2.2 S21 Alg. 3.3 S220 PR

NAME DATE ALGEBRA LESSON 4.8

S396

© 2016 CUNY Collaborative Programs Supported by the NYS Education Department

Activity 23 1. Plot the points C (9,4) and D (1,2). Then determine the slope of the line.

2. Is (4,3) a point on this line? How do you know?

3. Is (17,6) a point on this line? How do you know?

4. Write your own point. Then determine if it lies on the line.

5. How would you check to see if (x,y) lies on the line?

6. Circle the solution points that are on the line.

7. Fill in the blanks so that each point lies on the line.

(50,____)

(-15,____)

(____,9)

3 Materials in this lesson are adapted from: Education Development Center, Inc. (2012.) Transition to Algebra, Unit 9.

Page 340: 2016 – 2017 STUDENT HANDBOOK Version 2...Lesson Page Number Lesson Page Number PR #1 S1 Alg. 2.5 S189 PR 1.1 S5 Alg. 3.1 S206 PR 2.1 S16 Alg. 3.2 S215 PR 2.2 S21 Alg. 3.3 S220 PR

NAME DATE ALGEBRA LESSON 4.8

S397

© 2016 CUNY Collaborative Programs Supported by the NYS Education Department

8. An equation describes the pattern for a set of points. For parts A and B, use the pattern to help you complete the questions.

a. Describe a pattern you see for how the points below are related.

(4,7) (8,11) (9,12) (50,53) (-6,-3) (826,829)

Add 3 more points that follow the same pattern.

(____,____) (____,____) (____,____) Write an equation for this line that includes every point.

b. Describe a pattern you see for how the points below are related.

(5,42) (21,201) (8,72) (351,3502) (-4,-48) (-59,-598)

Add 3 more points that follow the same pattern.

(____,____) (____,____) (____,____) Write an equation for this line that includes every point.

Page 341: 2016 – 2017 STUDENT HANDBOOK Version 2...Lesson Page Number Lesson Page Number PR #1 S1 Alg. 2.5 S189 PR 1.1 S5 Alg. 3.1 S206 PR 2.1 S16 Alg. 3.2 S215 PR 2.2 S21 Alg. 3.3 S220 PR

NAME DATE ALGEBRA LESSON 4.8

S398

© 2016 CUNY Collaborative Programs Supported by the NYS Education Department

Activity 34

Use the clues to determine the missing coordinate(s) for each point. You can use the graph below for help.

1. I am point A.

My x-coordinate is 12.

I am on the line 𝑥𝑥 + 𝑦𝑦 = 14.

Where am I?

( , )

2. I am point B. I am on the x-axis.

My y-coordinate is two less than my x-coordinate.

Where am I?

( , )

4 Materials in this lesson are adapted from: Education Development Center, Inc. (2012.) Transition to Algebra, Unit 9.

Page 342: 2016 – 2017 STUDENT HANDBOOK Version 2...Lesson Page Number Lesson Page Number PR #1 S1 Alg. 2.5 S189 PR 1.1 S5 Alg. 3.1 S206 PR 2.1 S16 Alg. 3.2 S215 PR 2.2 S21 Alg. 3.3 S220 PR

NAME DATE ALGEBRA LESSON 4.8

S399

© 2016 CUNY Collaborative Programs Supported by the NYS Education Department

3. I am point C. My x-coordinate is 11.

I am on line 𝑦𝑦 = 𝑥𝑥 − 13.

Where am I?

( , )

4. I am point D.

I am on line 𝑥𝑥 + 𝑦𝑦 = 0.

My x-coordinate is 5.

Where am I?

( , )

5. I am point E.

I am on line 𝑥𝑥 = −6𝑦𝑦.

My y-coordinate is -1.

Where am I?

( , )

6. I am point F.

I am on line 𝑦𝑦 = 𝑥𝑥 − 2.

My x-coordinate is -3.

Where am I?

( , )

Page 343: 2016 – 2017 STUDENT HANDBOOK Version 2...Lesson Page Number Lesson Page Number PR #1 S1 Alg. 2.5 S189 PR 1.1 S5 Alg. 3.1 S206 PR 2.1 S16 Alg. 3.2 S215 PR 2.2 S21 Alg. 3.3 S220 PR

NAME DATE ALGEBRA LESSON 4.8

S400

© 2016 CUNY Collaborative Programs Supported by the NYS Education Department

Practice Set 15 1. Plot the points (3,5) and (11,1). Then, draw the line that goes through both points.

2. What is the slope of the line?

3. Is the point (1,6) on the line? How do you know?

4. Is (19,-3) on the line? How do you know?

5. Write your own point. Then determine if it lies on the line.

6. How would you check to see if the point (x,y) is on the line?

5 Materials in this lesson are adapted from: Education Development Center, Inc. (2012.) Transition to Algebra, Unit 9.

Page 344: 2016 – 2017 STUDENT HANDBOOK Version 2...Lesson Page Number Lesson Page Number PR #1 S1 Alg. 2.5 S189 PR 1.1 S5 Alg. 3.1 S206 PR 2.1 S16 Alg. 3.2 S215 PR 2.2 S21 Alg. 3.3 S220 PR

NAME DATE ALGEBRA LESSON 4.8

S401

© 2016 CUNY Collaborative Programs Supported by the NYS Education Department

7. Circle the solution points that are on the line. Use your equation and/or graph for help.

8. Fill in the blanks so that each point lies on the line.

(11,___) (-7,___) (___,-2)

9. Consider a line with a slope of 8 that goes through the point (40,-20).

a. Is the point (100,220) on the line? How do you know?

b. Is the point (0,-180) on the line? How do you know? c. Write your own point. Then determine if it lies on the line.

10. Consider a line with the equation 𝑦𝑦+6

𝑥𝑥−3= 4

9. Circle the solution points that are on the line.

11. Consider a line with the equation 𝑦𝑦−3

𝑥𝑥+9= 5

−4. Circle the solution points that are on the line.

Page 345: 2016 – 2017 STUDENT HANDBOOK Version 2...Lesson Page Number Lesson Page Number PR #1 S1 Alg. 2.5 S189 PR 1.1 S5 Alg. 3.1 S206 PR 2.1 S16 Alg. 3.2 S215 PR 2.2 S21 Alg. 3.3 S220 PR

NAME DATE ALGEBRA LESSON 4.8

S402

© 2016 CUNY Collaborative Programs Supported by the NYS Education Department

12. Fill in the blanks so that each point lies on the line.

(8,___) (-7,___) (___,48)

13. For each of the following, adjust the equation to find an equivalent form in which y is isolated

and it is simplified, with parentheses removed. (See hint box.)

a) 𝑦𝑦+4𝑥𝑥−3

= 27 b)

𝑦𝑦−3𝑥𝑥+9

= 5−4

c) 𝑦𝑦−2𝑥𝑥+2

= 84

14. Determine the value of each shape.

Page 346: 2016 – 2017 STUDENT HANDBOOK Version 2...Lesson Page Number Lesson Page Number PR #1 S1 Alg. 2.5 S189 PR 1.1 S5 Alg. 3.1 S206 PR 2.1 S16 Alg. 3.2 S215 PR 2.2 S21 Alg. 3.3 S220 PR

NAME DATE ALGEBRA LESSON 4.8

S403

© 2016 CUNY Collaborative Programs Supported by the NYS Education Department

15. Complete the Mystery Grid.

Page 347: 2016 – 2017 STUDENT HANDBOOK Version 2...Lesson Page Number Lesson Page Number PR #1 S1 Alg. 2.5 S189 PR 1.1 S5 Alg. 3.1 S206 PR 2.1 S16 Alg. 3.2 S215 PR 2.2 S21 Alg. 3.3 S220 PR

NAME DATE ALGEBRA LESSON 4.9

S404

© 2016 CUNY Collaborative Programs Supported by the NYS Education Department

Algebra Lesson 4.91 Activity 12 Complete the following exercises by using solution points and graphs. 1. Draw each line separately. Use as much space and as many points as you need to draw an

accurate graph.

𝒚𝒚 = 𝟐𝟐𝟐𝟐 + 𝟑𝟑 𝟐𝟐 + 𝒚𝒚 = 𝟗𝟗

1 Some materials in this lesson are adapted from: Education Development Center, Inc. (2012.) Transition to Algebra, Unit 9, Impact Mathematics Course 3, and MARS. 2 Some materials in this lesson are adapted from: Education Development Center, Inc. (2012.) Transition to Algebra, Unit 9, Impact Mathematics Course 3, and MARS.

Page 348: 2016 – 2017 STUDENT HANDBOOK Version 2...Lesson Page Number Lesson Page Number PR #1 S1 Alg. 2.5 S189 PR 1.1 S5 Alg. 3.1 S206 PR 2.1 S16 Alg. 3.2 S215 PR 2.2 S21 Alg. 3.3 S220 PR

NAME DATE ALGEBRA LESSON 4.9

S405

© 2016 CUNY Collaborative Programs Supported by the NYS Education Department

2. Now draw both lines on the same graph. 3. The lines 𝑦𝑦 = 2𝑥𝑥 + 3 and 𝑥𝑥 + 𝑦𝑦 = 9 are two different lines that involve different relationships

and solution points. But there is one solution point that is the same for both of these lines. This special point is called the point of intersection. What is the solution point, or point of intersection?

4. Determine the values for x and y that make both mobiles true.

Page 349: 2016 – 2017 STUDENT HANDBOOK Version 2...Lesson Page Number Lesson Page Number PR #1 S1 Alg. 2.5 S189 PR 1.1 S5 Alg. 3.1 S206 PR 2.1 S16 Alg. 3.2 S215 PR 2.2 S21 Alg. 3.3 S220 PR

NAME DATE ALGEBRA LESSON 4.9

S406

© 2016 CUNY Collaborative Programs Supported by the NYS Education Department

5. Graph both linear relationships on the grid below.

𝑦𝑦 = 3𝑥𝑥 − 12 𝑦𝑦 = 𝑥𝑥 + 6 6. Bradley looks at the lines in number 5 and says “Those lines don’t cross on the graph, so they

must never cross. There is no point of intersection.” Do you agree with Bradley? Why or why not?

7. You can’t see where the lines cross, but we can figure it out using algebra. Since both

relationships are equal to the y-value at this point, we can set both relationships equal to each other and solve to find the x-value of the point of intersection.

𝟑𝟑𝟐𝟐 − 𝟏𝟏𝟐𝟐 = 𝟐𝟐 + 𝟔𝟔

8. Now use the x-value of the intersection point to find the y-value of the intersection point. Then

write out the entire intersection point. 9. Is there a way to know if these lines will ever cross again? How can we be sure that these lines

won’t cross again when 𝑥𝑥 = −126 or 𝑦𝑦 = 2,298?

Page 350: 2016 – 2017 STUDENT HANDBOOK Version 2...Lesson Page Number Lesson Page Number PR #1 S1 Alg. 2.5 S189 PR 1.1 S5 Alg. 3.1 S206 PR 2.1 S16 Alg. 3.2 S215 PR 2.2 S21 Alg. 3.3 S220 PR

NAME DATE ALGEBRA LESSON 4.9

S407

© 2016 CUNY Collaborative Programs Supported by the NYS Education Department

10. a. Draw the relationship 𝑦𝑦 = 𝑥𝑥2 on the graph below. Use at least 5 points.

b. Draw the relationship 𝑦𝑦 = 12

(2𝑥𝑥 + 2) + 1 on the graph below. Use at least 5 points.

c. Draw the relationships from parts a and b on the graph below.

d. How many points do the two relationships have in common? What are the common point(s)?

Page 351: 2016 – 2017 STUDENT HANDBOOK Version 2...Lesson Page Number Lesson Page Number PR #1 S1 Alg. 2.5 S189 PR 1.1 S5 Alg. 3.1 S206 PR 2.1 S16 Alg. 3.2 S215 PR 2.2 S21 Alg. 3.3 S220 PR

NAME DATE ALGEBRA LESSON 4.9

S408

© 2016 CUNY Collaborative Programs Supported by the NYS Education Department

Problem Set 13 1. a. Draw the relations y=2x+1 and y=2x-1 using as many points for each as you need.

b. Will these lines intersect? Why or why not?

2. a. Draw the relations y=2x+1 and y=.5x using as many points for each as you need.

b. Will these lines intersect? Why or why not?

3 Materials adapted from: Education Development Center, Inc. (2012.) Transition to Algebra, Unit 9

Page 352: 2016 – 2017 STUDENT HANDBOOK Version 2...Lesson Page Number Lesson Page Number PR #1 S1 Alg. 2.5 S189 PR 1.1 S5 Alg. 3.1 S206 PR 2.1 S16 Alg. 3.2 S215 PR 2.2 S21 Alg. 3.3 S220 PR

NAME DATE ALGEBRA LESSON 4.9

S409

© 2016 CUNY Collaborative Programs Supported by the NYS Education Department

Activity 24 1.

2. Write as many different equations as possible for the following mobiles:

3. Write as many different equations as possible for the following mobiles:

4 Materials adapted from: Education Development Center, Inc. (2012.) Transition to Algebra, Unit 9

Page 353: 2016 – 2017 STUDENT HANDBOOK Version 2...Lesson Page Number Lesson Page Number PR #1 S1 Alg. 2.5 S189 PR 1.1 S5 Alg. 3.1 S206 PR 2.1 S16 Alg. 3.2 S215 PR 2.2 S21 Alg. 3.3 S220 PR

NAME DATE ALGEBRA LESSON 4.9

S410

© 2016 CUNY Collaborative Programs Supported by the NYS Education Department

Challenge Problem

Page 354: 2016 – 2017 STUDENT HANDBOOK Version 2...Lesson Page Number Lesson Page Number PR #1 S1 Alg. 2.5 S189 PR 1.1 S5 Alg. 3.1 S206 PR 2.1 S16 Alg. 3.2 S215 PR 2.2 S21 Alg. 3.3 S220 PR

NAME DATE ALGEBRA LESSON 4.9

S411

© 2016 CUNY Collaborative Programs Supported by the NYS Education Department

Activity 35

1. Solve the mobile below. Let h stand for hearts and s stand for stars. Use h and s to write at least 2 equations to represent the mobile.

Share your equations with a classmate. Then write down any new equations you learn through sharing with your classmate.

2. Solve the mobile. Then, write at least 2 equations to represent the mobile. Let a represent arrow, d represent diamond, and s represent semicircle.

5 Materials adapted from: Education Development Center, Inc. (2012.) Transition to Algebra, Unit 9

Page 355: 2016 – 2017 STUDENT HANDBOOK Version 2...Lesson Page Number Lesson Page Number PR #1 S1 Alg. 2.5 S189 PR 1.1 S5 Alg. 3.1 S206 PR 2.1 S16 Alg. 3.2 S215 PR 2.2 S21 Alg. 3.3 S220 PR

NAME DATE ALGEBRA LESSON 4.9

S412

© 2016 CUNY Collaborative Programs Supported by the NYS Education Department

3. Solve the mobile. Then, write at least 2 equations to represent the mobile. Let t represent triangle, and q represent quadrilateral.

4. Solve the mobile. Then, write at least 2 equations to represent the mobile. Let h represent

hexagon, and q represent quadrilateral. 5. Use the two equations to draw one or two mobiles showing the relationship(s) between t

(triangle) and a (arrow).

4𝑡𝑡 + 𝑎𝑎 = 20 10𝑡𝑡 = 20

Page 356: 2016 – 2017 STUDENT HANDBOOK Version 2...Lesson Page Number Lesson Page Number PR #1 S1 Alg. 2.5 S189 PR 1.1 S5 Alg. 3.1 S206 PR 2.1 S16 Alg. 3.2 S215 PR 2.2 S21 Alg. 3.3 S220 PR

NAME DATE ALGEBRA LESSON 4.9

S413

© 2016 CUNY Collaborative Programs Supported by the NYS Education Department

6. Use the two equations to draw one or two mobiles showing the relationship(s) between s (semicircle) and q (quadrilateral). 𝑠𝑠 + 𝑞𝑞 = 22 4𝑠𝑠 + 6𝑞𝑞 = 48

7. More Mystery Numbers!

You’ve found the following calculations from an ancient civilization. You know that the calculation symbols, plus, times, and equal, are the just like our algebra. You’ve also figured out that each symbol is a different digit. Examine the equations to determine the value of each symbol.

8. Use the clues to determine the missing number.

Page 357: 2016 – 2017 STUDENT HANDBOOK Version 2...Lesson Page Number Lesson Page Number PR #1 S1 Alg. 2.5 S189 PR 1.1 S5 Alg. 3.1 S206 PR 2.1 S16 Alg. 3.2 S215 PR 2.2 S21 Alg. 3.3 S220 PR

NAME DATE ALGEBRA LESSON 4.9

S414

© 2016 CUNY Collaborative Programs Supported by the NYS Education Department

Problem Set 26 1. Solve the mobile below.

Let h stand for hearts and s stand for stars. Use h and s to write at least 2 equations to represent the mobile.

2. Solve the mobile. Then, write at least 2 equations to represent the mobile. Let t represent

triangle, and q represent quadrilateral.

6 Materials adapted from: Education Development Center, Inc. (2012.) Transition to Algebra, Unit 9

Page 358: 2016 – 2017 STUDENT HANDBOOK Version 2...Lesson Page Number Lesson Page Number PR #1 S1 Alg. 2.5 S189 PR 1.1 S5 Alg. 3.1 S206 PR 2.1 S16 Alg. 3.2 S215 PR 2.2 S21 Alg. 3.3 S220 PR

NAME DATE ALGEBRA LESSON 4.9

S415

© 2016 CUNY Collaborative Programs Supported by the NYS Education Department

3. Solve the mobile. Then, write at least 2 equations to represent the mobile. Let d represent diamond and s represent semicircle.

4. You find this puzzle in an old algebra text book. Any letter can stand for any number, and different letters can stand for the same number, unless you are otherwise told. No unknown numbers are negative, but at least one is greater than ten. Can you solve for any of the missing numbers?

Page 359: 2016 – 2017 STUDENT HANDBOOK Version 2...Lesson Page Number Lesson Page Number PR #1 S1 Alg. 2.5 S189 PR 1.1 S5 Alg. 3.1 S206 PR 2.1 S16 Alg. 3.2 S215 PR 2.2 S21 Alg. 3.3 S220 PR

NAME DATE ALGEBRA LESSON 4.9

S416

© 2016 CUNY Collaborative Programs Supported by the NYS Education Department

Activity 47

1. Are Dan and Emma correct? If you think Dan is wrong, explain the mistake and explain what you think the equation means. If you think Emma is wrong, explain the mistake and explain what you think the equation means. 2. Figure out for yourself the number of pens and the number of notebooks sold in the store.

7 MARS: http://map.mathshell.org/download.php?fileid=1730

Page 360: 2016 – 2017 STUDENT HANDBOOK Version 2...Lesson Page Number Lesson Page Number PR #1 S1 Alg. 2.5 S189 PR 1.1 S5 Alg. 3.1 S206 PR 2.1 S16 Alg. 3.2 S215 PR 2.2 S21 Alg. 3.3 S220 PR

NAME DATE ALGEBRA LESSON 4.9

S417

© 2016 CUNY Collaborative Programs Supported by the NYS Education Department

Problem Set 38

Joe is mixing nuts and raisins to sell at a school fair. He buys nuts in 4-pound bags and raisins in 1-pound bags:

x = number of bags of nuts he buys. y = number of bags of raisins he buys.

The following equations are TRUE:

3x = y 4x + y = 70

1. Explain in words the meaning of each equation. 2. Find two pairs of values for x and y that satisfy the first equation. 3. Find two pairs of values for x and y that satisfy the second equation. 4. Find pairs of values for x and y that satisfy both equations simultaneously.

8 MARS: http://map.mathshell.org/download.php?fileid=1730

Page 361: 2016 – 2017 STUDENT HANDBOOK Version 2...Lesson Page Number Lesson Page Number PR #1 S1 Alg. 2.5 S189 PR 1.1 S5 Alg. 3.1 S206 PR 2.1 S16 Alg. 3.2 S215 PR 2.2 S21 Alg. 3.3 S220 PR

NAME DATE ALGEBRA LESSON 4.9

S418

© 2016 CUNY Collaborative Programs Supported by the NYS Education Department

Activity 59 The owner of a hat business has fixed expenses of $3,000 each week. She has these expenses regardless of how many hats she makes. The remaining expenses are variable costs, such as materials and labor. These costs are proportional to the number of hats made. For example, in a week in which 500 hats were made and sold, her variable costs were $7,500. In a week in which 1,000 hats were made, they were $15,000. All the hats were sold to department stores at $20 each. Let n equal the number of hats sold and I equal income in a week. 1. Write an equation relating the income (I) to the number of hats sold (n). Income would be the

money received from the department stores for the hats sold to them. 2. Consider the hatmaker’s costs:

a. Write an expression for the variable costs (VC) to produce n hats. That is, if the shop made n hats in a week, what would the variable costs be? (Think about the clues given in the first paragraph)

b. Write an equation relating the total cost per week (TC) and the number of hats made and sold that week (n).

3. What does profit mean? Write a relationship (equation) connecting profit (P), income (I), and

costs (TC). 4. The difference between cost and income is the owner’s profit. If the hatmaker has no sales, she

will still have to pay the fixed costs, and therefore will have a large loss. If she has high sales, she will cover her fixed costs and make a good profit.

a. In one particular week, the hatmaker made and sold 500 hats. Did she make a profit or suffer a loss? How much? (She sold her hats for $20 each).

b. In another week, she made and sold 1,000 hats. Did she make a profit or suffer a loss? How much?

5. Somewhere between no sales and many sales is a number of sales called the break-

even point. This is the point at which costs and income are equal, so there is zero profit but also zero loss.

a. On one set of axes you need to graph the equations for income (question 1) and costs (2b).

9 Impact Math Course 3. P261.

Page 362: 2016 – 2017 STUDENT HANDBOOK Version 2...Lesson Page Number Lesson Page Number PR #1 S1 Alg. 2.5 S189 PR 1.1 S5 Alg. 3.1 S206 PR 2.1 S16 Alg. 3.2 S215 PR 2.2 S21 Alg. 3.3 S220 PR

NAME DATE ALGEBRA LESSON 4.9

S419

© 2016 CUNY Collaborative Programs Supported by the NYS Education Department

I. What would be a reasonable scale for n on the graph? II. What would be a reasonable scale for profit on the graph? III. Label each graph with its equation. You will need to read amounts from your graph, so use an appropriate scale and be as accurate as you can.

How can you use your graph to estimate the break-even point? From your graph, estimate the number of hats needed to make and sell each week to break even. Calculate the costs and income for that number of items to check your estimate. Improve your estimate if necessary. Use your graph to estimate the number of hats she needs to sell each week to make a profit of $1,000 per week. Calculate the costs and income for that number of items to check your estimate. Improve your estimate if necessary. Use the equations you wrote for Problems 1 and 2 to write an equation that gives the value of n for which costs and income are equal. Solve your equation to find the break-even point.

Page 363: 2016 – 2017 STUDENT HANDBOOK Version 2...Lesson Page Number Lesson Page Number PR #1 S1 Alg. 2.5 S189 PR 1.1 S5 Alg. 3.1 S206 PR 2.1 S16 Alg. 3.2 S215 PR 2.2 S21 Alg. 3.3 S220 PR

NAME DATE ALGEBRA LESSON 4.9

S420

© 2016 CUNY Collaborative Programs Supported by the NYS Education Department

Activity 6 A. Basketball10: Carinne scored 23 points in last night’s basketball game. Altogether, 10 of her

shots went in; some were 2-point shots and the others were 3-point shots. Let a stand for the number of 2-point shots and b the number of 3-point shots. a. Write an equation for the total number of Carinne’s shots that went in. b. Write an equation for the total number of points Carinne scored. c. How many 2-point shots did Carinne make? How many 3-point shots did she make?

B. Economics11: A manager of a rock group wants to estimate, based on past expenence, how many tickets will be sold in advance of the next concert and how many tickets will be sold at the door on the night of the concert. At a recent concert, the 1,000-seat hall was full. Tickets bought in advance cost $30, tickets sold at the door cost $40, and total ticket sales were $38,000. a. What are the two different types of tickets? b. Keep track of guesses you make by writing them down and then checking to see if they work. Look for patterns in your work. c. Estimate the number of advance sales and the number of door sales made that night. d. Check that your estimates fit the conditions by substituting them into equations.

C. Movie Economics12: The Webber and Searle families went to the movies. Admission prices were

$9 for adults and $5 for children, and came to a total of $62 for the 10 people who went. a. Write two equations to represent this situation. b. Solve your system to determine how many adults and how many children went to the movies.

10 Impact 3. P 265 11 Impact 3. P 277 12 Impact 3. P279

Page 364: 2016 – 2017 STUDENT HANDBOOK Version 2...Lesson Page Number Lesson Page Number PR #1 S1 Alg. 2.5 S189 PR 1.1 S5 Alg. 3.1 S206 PR 2.1 S16 Alg. 3.2 S215 PR 2.2 S21 Alg. 3.3 S220 PR

NAME DATE ALGEBRA LESSON 4.9

S421

© 2016 CUNY Collaborative Programs Supported by the NYS Education Department

Activity 7 A "system" of equations is a set or collection of equations that you deal with together. In a system, you seek a “solution” that makes all of the equations true. Think about the problems you have been doing in this section:

• First you graphed two lines and found the point where they intersected. • Then you worked on several algebra balance problems and other puzzles where you were

given multiple clues and had to find the “solution” or values for each variable. • You also worked on some scenarios where you had to find solutions that fit multipe conditions.

All these problems have involved systems of equations.

1. Consider these five equations13:

i. 2x + 3 = 7 ii. x2+5x+6=0 iii. (x - 2)2 = 0 iv. 2x + y = 7 v. 3x - y=3

a. Equations i, ii, and iii each involve one variable. How many solutions does each equation have? Find the solutions using any method you choose.

b. Equations iv and v each involve two variables. How many solutions does each equation

have? Can you list them? Explain why or why not. c. Consider Equations iv and v. If you were to graph the solutions of 2x + y = 7 and 3x – y

= 3 together on the same graph, what would you expect to see? What would be especially significant on your graph? Explain.

d. Draw graphs of 2x + y = 7 and 3x - y = 3. At what point or points do they meet?

13 Impact 3 p 257

Page 365: 2016 – 2017 STUDENT HANDBOOK Version 2...Lesson Page Number Lesson Page Number PR #1 S1 Alg. 2.5 S189 PR 1.1 S5 Alg. 3.1 S206 PR 2.1 S16 Alg. 3.2 S215 PR 2.2 S21 Alg. 3.3 S220 PR

NAME DATE ALGEBRA LESSON 4.9

S422

© 2016 CUNY Collaborative Programs Supported by the NYS Education Department

e. What values of x and y make both x + y = 7 and 3x — y = 3 true? That can mean, what is the solution of this system of two equations? How do these values relate to your answer to Part d?

It is possible to find solutions of systems of equations that are not linear! 2. Use a graph to solve this system of equations. Rewrite the equations before graphing them, if

necessary. How many solutions can you find? y – x - 1=0 y=x2 - 3x + 4

3. The problem below is from Activity 3. Is this an example of a system of equations? Why or

why not? 14

14 Edited from EDC’s Transition to Algebra

Page 366: 2016 – 2017 STUDENT HANDBOOK Version 2...Lesson Page Number Lesson Page Number PR #1 S1 Alg. 2.5 S189 PR 1.1 S5 Alg. 3.1 S206 PR 2.1 S16 Alg. 3.2 S215 PR 2.2 S21 Alg. 3.3 S220 PR

NAME DATE ALGEBRA LESSON 4.9

S423

© 2016 CUNY Collaborative Programs Supported by the NYS Education Department

4. Consider the equation x + 1 = x2 - 3x + 4 : a. Follow these steps to solve this equation using a table:

• Enter two equations, y1 = x + I and y2 = x2 - 3x + 4, into a graphing calculator. • Use features of your calculator to find the points of intersection as accurately as you can. • Examine the table for values of x for which y1 and y2 are equal. Create new tables, using smaller increments as necessary.

b. How do the solutions of this equation relate to what you found in Problem 2? Explain why the solutions are related in this way.

c. Now use a table or graph to solve x2 - 4x + 3 = 0. How do the solutions of this equation compare to your result for Part a? Explain.

Page 367: 2016 – 2017 STUDENT HANDBOOK Version 2...Lesson Page Number Lesson Page Number PR #1 S1 Alg. 2.5 S189 PR 1.1 S5 Alg. 3.1 S206 PR 2.1 S16 Alg. 3.2 S215 PR 2.2 S21 Alg. 3.3 S220 PR

NAME DATE ALGEBRA LESSON 4.9

S424

© 2016 CUNY Collaborative Programs Supported by the NYS Education Department

Problem Set 4

Find solutions for the following systems of two equations:

1. y = 2x - 8 y = -3x + 42

2. 3x -2y = 75 y = 150

3. y=x2 y=9

Solve by graphing:

4. y = x + 1 y = 3x -5

5. 2x-3y = -9 -5x+3y=0

6. x+y = 3 -2x +2y = 18

Solve any way

7. 2x - y = -50 -3x + y = -50

8. 3x -3y = -6 x + 2y = 10

9. y = 2x - 90 y = -3x +210

10. After doing some research, you find that there are two companies in your town with jobs for the

summer. Both of them make T-shirts. Tops, Inc. pays its employees $1000 per month plus $2.50 for every shirt they complete in the month. Vees, Inc. pays its employees $500 per month plus $3.50 for every shirt they complete in a month.

a. Consider if you were a student looking for full-time summer work. Pose two questions you

would want to ask? b. Jon knows he can usually work faster than all of his friends. Explain which company might

be a better choice for him. c. Matt doesn't like stressful, fast-paced environments. Which company might be better for

him? Why? d. Create one table for Tops and a second one for Vees. Record any questions you might

have as you are completing the tables. e. Shaneece worked making shirts in another city last year. She knows that in 40 hours she

can usually make about 120 shirts. She thinks that she would probably be able to work about 160 hours in a month. Where do you think she should apply?

f. Use your tables from d to create a graph of Monthly Income (vertical axis) versus Shirts

completed (horizontal axis) for both Tops and Vees.

Page 368: 2016 – 2017 STUDENT HANDBOOK Version 2...Lesson Page Number Lesson Page Number PR #1 S1 Alg. 2.5 S189 PR 1.1 S5 Alg. 3.1 S206 PR 2.1 S16 Alg. 3.2 S215 PR 2.2 S21 Alg. 3.3 S220 PR

NAME DATE ALGEBRA LESSON 4.9

S425

© 2016 CUNY Collaborative Programs Supported by the NYS Education Department

g. At Tops, Inc., every time employees double their monthly production rate, they earn an extra $500. How would this change the choices and strategies for someone seeking a job?

Activity 8: Skill Review Yulia and Angelique discuss how to work with Absolute Value. They are given the problem:

Simiplify: |−14 + 5| Yulia I remember last year, when I had Mr. Umbridge, learning about these. What are they

called again?

Angelique Something with number, or value in it? Absolute number?

Yulia No, it was Absolute value! That was it.

Angelique Yeah! That was totally it. I had Mrs. Lockhart and she talked about how the Absolute

Value bars are kinda like parentheses.

Yulia Like, you have to do whatever is inside of them first?

Angelique Yeah, like it’s the P in PEMDAS. So |−14 + 5| becomes |−9|.

Yulia Yeah, but I forget what else Mr. Umbridge said. I remember him drawing a picture

and talking about distance. What did your teacher last year tell you to do?

Angelique I think Mrs. Lockhart talked about how after you get to just one number inside the

Absolute Value bars, then it’s always a positive number.

Yulia That’s a little different from what Mr. Umbridge said. I think he talked about how

once you got just one number inside, the answer inside was how far away it was from

zero.

Angelique Is that the same thing?

−10 −9 −8 −7 −6 −5 −4 −3 −2 −1 0 1 2 3 4 Use the number line above to tell how far apart is −9 from 0 on the number line. Whose teacher last year used the number line? What is |−9| equal to?

Page 369: 2016 – 2017 STUDENT HANDBOOK Version 2...Lesson Page Number Lesson Page Number PR #1 S1 Alg. 2.5 S189 PR 1.1 S5 Alg. 3.1 S206 PR 2.1 S16 Alg. 3.2 S215 PR 2.2 S21 Alg. 3.3 S220 PR

NAME DATE ALGEBRA LESSON 4.9

S426

© 2016 CUNY Collaborative Programs Supported by the NYS Education Department

Problem Set 5 Perform the operations indicated. 1. |−1| + |13| 3. |−9| − |−4| 5. |−12 + 9| 7. |−8 − 7| 9. |−8 + 4| − |5 − 7| 11. |5 − 12| − |12 − 5|

2. |−1| + |−13| 4. |−4| − |−9| 6. |13 − 18| 8. |5 − (−4)| 10. |16 − 22| − |9 − 10| 12. |8 − 9| − |4 − 14|

Page 370: 2016 – 2017 STUDENT HANDBOOK Version 2...Lesson Page Number Lesson Page Number PR #1 S1 Alg. 2.5 S189 PR 1.1 S5 Alg. 3.1 S206 PR 2.1 S16 Alg. 3.2 S215 PR 2.2 S21 Alg. 3.3 S220 PR
Page 371: 2016 – 2017 STUDENT HANDBOOK Version 2...Lesson Page Number Lesson Page Number PR #1 S1 Alg. 2.5 S189 PR 1.1 S5 Alg. 3.1 S206 PR 2.1 S16 Alg. 3.2 S215 PR 2.2 S21 Alg. 3.3 S220 PR

MORE TOOLS FOR

EQUATIONS

Page 372: 2016 – 2017 STUDENT HANDBOOK Version 2...Lesson Page Number Lesson Page Number PR #1 S1 Alg. 2.5 S189 PR 1.1 S5 Alg. 3.1 S206 PR 2.1 S16 Alg. 3.2 S215 PR 2.2 S21 Alg. 3.3 S220 PR
Page 373: 2016 – 2017 STUDENT HANDBOOK Version 2...Lesson Page Number Lesson Page Number PR #1 S1 Alg. 2.5 S189 PR 1.1 S5 Alg. 3.1 S206 PR 2.1 S16 Alg. 3.2 S215 PR 2.2 S21 Alg. 3.3 S220 PR

NAME DATE MTE LESSON 1

S556

© 2016 CUNY Collaborative Programs Supported by the NYS Education Department

More Tools for Equations Lesson 1 Warm Up Activity 1A. 1B.

2. Rewrite the following expressions changing subtraction to adding the opposite. If possible,

simplify the expression:

A. x – 2y B. 10 – 2 C. 10 – -2 D. -5y – 5y

Page 374: 2016 – 2017 STUDENT HANDBOOK Version 2...Lesson Page Number Lesson Page Number PR #1 S1 Alg. 2.5 S189 PR 1.1 S5 Alg. 3.1 S206 PR 2.1 S16 Alg. 3.2 S215 PR 2.2 S21 Alg. 3.3 S220 PR

NAME DATE MTE LESSON 1

S557

© 2016 CUNY Collaborative Programs Supported by the NYS Education Department

Mini Lesson 11 Introduction: Because division is un-multiplication, the same area model can provide the information for three different equations.

Below are the three different equations that would correspond to the model: Multiply the two factors: 4(b+3) = 4b+12 Divide by a factor: 4𝑏𝑏+12

4= 𝑏𝑏 + 3

Divide by the other factor: 4𝑏𝑏+12

𝑏𝑏+3= 4

1. Consider the following: (2y + 5)(y – 3)

We can use 2y+5 as one dimension of the rectangle and y+ -3 as the other:

2y 5

y

-3

The areas of the internal sections are filled in below:

2y 5

y 2y2 5y

-3 -6y -15

1 Materials adapted from: Transition to Algebra, Unit 10, p 4-13.

Page 375: 2016 – 2017 STUDENT HANDBOOK Version 2...Lesson Page Number Lesson Page Number PR #1 S1 Alg. 2.5 S189 PR 1.1 S5 Alg. 3.1 S206 PR 2.1 S16 Alg. 3.2 S215 PR 2.2 S21 Alg. 3.3 S220 PR

NAME DATE MTE LESSON 1

S558

© 2016 CUNY Collaborative Programs Supported by the NYS Education Department

Now I can extract 3 equations (two division and one multiplication):

2𝑦𝑦2+ −1y+ −152𝑦𝑦+5

= 𝑦𝑦 − 3 2𝑦𝑦2+ −1y+ −15

𝑦𝑦−3= 2𝑦𝑦 + 5

(2𝑦𝑦 + 5)(𝑦𝑦 − 3) = 2𝑦𝑦2 + −1𝑦𝑦 + −15

Turn to a partner, and explain where these equations come from.

Page 376: 2016 – 2017 STUDENT HANDBOOK Version 2...Lesson Page Number Lesson Page Number PR #1 S1 Alg. 2.5 S189 PR 1.1 S5 Alg. 3.1 S206 PR 2.1 S16 Alg. 3.2 S215 PR 2.2 S21 Alg. 3.3 S220 PR

NAME DATE MTE LESSON 1

S559

© 2016 CUNY Collaborative Programs Supported by the NYS Education Department

Activity 12 Name: _________________________________________ 1. Use each area model to write three equations: one using multiplication and two using division. A. B.

C. D.

y -9 m 6

4y 4y2 -36y m m2 6m

5 5m 30

2 Materials adapted from: Transition to Algebra, Unit 10, p 4-13.

Page 377: 2016 – 2017 STUDENT HANDBOOK Version 2...Lesson Page Number Lesson Page Number PR #1 S1 Alg. 2.5 S189 PR 1.1 S5 Alg. 3.1 S206 PR 2.1 S16 Alg. 3.2 S215 PR 2.2 S21 Alg. 3.3 S220 PR

NAME DATE MTE LESSON 1

S560

© 2016 CUNY Collaborative Programs Supported by the NYS Education Department

2. Draw an area model for each expression and use it to answer the multiplication or division problem.

A. 4(3𝑡𝑡2 + 5) = B. 20𝑏𝑏−15

5=

C. 3𝑔𝑔2+6𝑔𝑔𝑔𝑔+2

=

Page 378: 2016 – 2017 STUDENT HANDBOOK Version 2...Lesson Page Number Lesson Page Number PR #1 S1 Alg. 2.5 S189 PR 1.1 S5 Alg. 3.1 S206 PR 2.1 S16 Alg. 3.2 S215 PR 2.2 S21 Alg. 3.3 S220 PR

NAME DATE MTE LESSON 1

S561

© 2016 CUNY Collaborative Programs Supported by the NYS Education Department

3. For the problems below, the inside of the area model is given. Complete the outside of the

model and write two or three equations corresponding to the model. A. B.

C. D.

Page 379: 2016 – 2017 STUDENT HANDBOOK Version 2...Lesson Page Number Lesson Page Number PR #1 S1 Alg. 2.5 S189 PR 1.1 S5 Alg. 3.1 S206 PR 2.1 S16 Alg. 3.2 S215 PR 2.2 S21 Alg. 3.3 S220 PR

NAME DATE MTE LESSON 1

S562

© 2016 CUNY Collaborative Programs Supported by the NYS Education Department

4. With some expressions, the area model doesn’t give any new information. For example, it is not more helpful to fill in the outside of the model below because b2 and 5 have no common factors besides 1.

For the problems below, if it makes sense to factor, fill out the outside of the area model. Otherwise, cross it out.

Page 380: 2016 – 2017 STUDENT HANDBOOK Version 2...Lesson Page Number Lesson Page Number PR #1 S1 Alg. 2.5 S189 PR 1.1 S5 Alg. 3.1 S206 PR 2.1 S16 Alg. 3.2 S215 PR 2.2 S21 Alg. 3.3 S220 PR

NAME DATE MTE LESSON 1

S563

© 2016 CUNY Collaborative Programs Supported by the NYS Education Department

Problem Set 13 Name: _________________________________________ 1. Use each area model to write three equations: one using multiplication and two using division. A. B.

C. D.

E.

3 Materials adapted from: Transition to Algebra, Unit 10, p 4-13.

Page 381: 2016 – 2017 STUDENT HANDBOOK Version 2...Lesson Page Number Lesson Page Number PR #1 S1 Alg. 2.5 S189 PR 1.1 S5 Alg. 3.1 S206 PR 2.1 S16 Alg. 3.2 S215 PR 2.2 S21 Alg. 3.3 S220 PR

NAME DATE MTE LESSON 1

S564

© 2016 CUNY Collaborative Programs Supported by the NYS Education Department

2. Draw an area model, and use it to answer the multiplication or division problem:

A. B.

C. D. 3. For these problems, only the inside of the area model is filled in. Complete the outside of the

model and use your work to write at least one equation represented by your model (multiplication or division).

A. B.

C. D.

Page 382: 2016 – 2017 STUDENT HANDBOOK Version 2...Lesson Page Number Lesson Page Number PR #1 S1 Alg. 2.5 S189 PR 1.1 S5 Alg. 3.1 S206 PR 2.1 S16 Alg. 3.2 S215 PR 2.2 S21 Alg. 3.3 S220 PR

NAME DATE MTE LESSON 1

S565

© 2016 CUNY Collaborative Programs Supported by the NYS Education Department

E. F.

4. Find the following: A B

C D

Page 383: 2016 – 2017 STUDENT HANDBOOK Version 2...Lesson Page Number Lesson Page Number PR #1 S1 Alg. 2.5 S189 PR 1.1 S5 Alg. 3.1 S206 PR 2.1 S16 Alg. 3.2 S215 PR 2.2 S21 Alg. 3.3 S220 PR

NAME DATE MTE LESSON 1

S566

© 2016 CUNY Collaborative Programs Supported by the NYS Education Department

Think! Here are four ways to set up the expression b2 + 8w + 12 inside an area model. Three of the ways don’t help or don’t work when you try to fill out the outside. Cross out the three that don’t work, and complete the one that does.

Page 384: 2016 – 2017 STUDENT HANDBOOK Version 2...Lesson Page Number Lesson Page Number PR #1 S1 Alg. 2.5 S189 PR 1.1 S5 Alg. 3.1 S206 PR 2.1 S16 Alg. 3.2 S215 PR 2.2 S21 Alg. 3.3 S220 PR

NAME DATE MTE LESSON 1

S567

© 2016 CUNY Collaborative Programs Supported by the NYS Education Department

Mini-Lesson 24 Introduction: When we say, “What are factors of 15?” we think about 1, 3, 5, and 15. Turn to a partner and discuss how factoring and division are related. Here are four ways to set up the expression n2 + 10n + 21 inside an area model. Three of the ways don’t help or don’t work. Cross out the three that don’t work, and complete the one that does:

1. Write the algebraic expression in the area model in three ways: A) as a sum of terms, B) as

two factors, and C) as one division equation.

Discuss writing the expression with like terms combined for A above.

4 Materials adapted from: Transition to Algebra, Unit 10, p 4-13.

Page 385: 2016 – 2017 STUDENT HANDBOOK Version 2...Lesson Page Number Lesson Page Number PR #1 S1 Alg. 2.5 S189 PR 1.1 S5 Alg. 3.1 S206 PR 2.1 S16 Alg. 3.2 S215 PR 2.2 S21 Alg. 3.3 S220 PR

NAME DATE MTE LESSON 1

S568

© 2016 CUNY Collaborative Programs Supported by the NYS Education Department

2. Write the algebraic expression in the area model in three ways: A) as a sum of terms, B) as two factors, and C) as one division equation.

Page 386: 2016 – 2017 STUDENT HANDBOOK Version 2...Lesson Page Number Lesson Page Number PR #1 S1 Alg. 2.5 S189 PR 1.1 S5 Alg. 3.1 S206 PR 2.1 S16 Alg. 3.2 S215 PR 2.2 S21 Alg. 3.3 S220 PR

NAME DATE MTE LESSON 1

S569

© 2016 CUNY Collaborative Programs Supported by the NYS Education Department

Activity 25

Name: _________________________________________ 1. Write the algebraic expression in the area model in three ways: A) as a sum of terms, B) as

two factors, and C) as one division equation. A. B.

2. Fill in the missing information, and complete the equations:

A. B.

C. D.

5 Transition to Algebra

Page 387: 2016 – 2017 STUDENT HANDBOOK Version 2...Lesson Page Number Lesson Page Number PR #1 S1 Alg. 2.5 S189 PR 1.1 S5 Alg. 3.1 S206 PR 2.1 S16 Alg. 3.2 S215 PR 2.2 S21 Alg. 3.3 S220 PR

NAME DATE MTE LESSON 1

S570

© 2016 CUNY Collaborative Programs Supported by the NYS Education Department

3. Challenge Problems! Arrange the expression inside the area model in a way that lets you fill out the outside. Fill out the outside, too.

Page 388: 2016 – 2017 STUDENT HANDBOOK Version 2...Lesson Page Number Lesson Page Number PR #1 S1 Alg. 2.5 S189 PR 1.1 S5 Alg. 3.1 S206 PR 2.1 S16 Alg. 3.2 S215 PR 2.2 S21 Alg. 3.3 S220 PR

NAME DATE MTE LESSON 1

S571

© 2016 CUNY Collaborative Programs Supported by the NYS Education Department

Activity 36 Name: _________________________________________ 1. Draw an area model and use it to answer the multiplication or division problem. A. (x + 2)(y + 6) B.

C. D.

2. The two problems below differ in a small but relevant way. Figure out how they differ, and

then solve them.

6 Materials adapted from: Transition to Algebra, Unit 10, p 4-13.

Page 389: 2016 – 2017 STUDENT HANDBOOK Version 2...Lesson Page Number Lesson Page Number PR #1 S1 Alg. 2.5 S189 PR 1.1 S5 Alg. 3.1 S206 PR 2.1 S16 Alg. 3.2 S215 PR 2.2 S21 Alg. 3.3 S220 PR

NAME DATE MTE LESSON 1

S572

© 2016 CUNY Collaborative Programs Supported by the NYS Education Department

3. Match the area models below to the expressions they describe. There will be two expressions

for each area model.

Page 390: 2016 – 2017 STUDENT HANDBOOK Version 2...Lesson Page Number Lesson Page Number PR #1 S1 Alg. 2.5 S189 PR 1.1 S5 Alg. 3.1 S206 PR 2.1 S16 Alg. 3.2 S215 PR 2.2 S21 Alg. 3.3 S220 PR

NAME DATE MTE LESSON 1

S573

© 2016 CUNY Collaborative Programs Supported by the NYS Education Department

Problem Set7 Name: _________________________________________ 1. Solve these area model puzzles, and write algebraic equations to describe them: A. B.

C. D.

E. F.

7 Materials adapted from: Transition to Algebra, Unit 10, p 4-13.

Page 391: 2016 – 2017 STUDENT HANDBOOK Version 2...Lesson Page Number Lesson Page Number PR #1 S1 Alg. 2.5 S189 PR 1.1 S5 Alg. 3.1 S206 PR 2.1 S16 Alg. 3.2 S215 PR 2.2 S21 Alg. 3.3 S220 PR

NAME DATE MTE LESSON 1

S574

© 2016 CUNY Collaborative Programs Supported by the NYS Education Department

G. H.

I. J.

2. Match the area models to the expressions they describe. There are two expressions for each

area model: Area models K & L

Area models M & N

Page 392: 2016 – 2017 STUDENT HANDBOOK Version 2...Lesson Page Number Lesson Page Number PR #1 S1 Alg. 2.5 S189 PR 1.1 S5 Alg. 3.1 S206 PR 2.1 S16 Alg. 3.2 S215 PR 2.2 S21 Alg. 3.3 S220 PR

NAME DATE MTE LESSON 2

S575

© 2016 CUNY Collaborative Programs Supported by the NYS Education Department

More Tools for Equations Lesson 2 Mini Lesson 11 There are at least 10 different ways you could fill out this area model. Pick 2 different ways and complete the model.

1 Materials are adapted from: Transition to Algebra.

Page 393: 2016 – 2017 STUDENT HANDBOOK Version 2...Lesson Page Number Lesson Page Number PR #1 S1 Alg. 2.5 S189 PR 1.1 S5 Alg. 3.1 S206 PR 2.1 S16 Alg. 3.2 S215 PR 2.2 S21 Alg. 3.3 S220 PR

NAME DATE MTE LESSON 2

S576

© 2016 CUNY Collaborative Programs Supported by the NYS Education Department

Activity 12 Name: _________________________________________

5. List all the pairs of integers (positive or negative) whose product is 12: 6. Which pair has a sum of 7? ________ of 8? _________ of 13? _________

of -7? _________

2 This lesson is available online at: http://www.heinemann.com/shared/onlineresources/E05750/TTA_U10.pdf

Page 394: 2016 – 2017 STUDENT HANDBOOK Version 2...Lesson Page Number Lesson Page Number PR #1 S1 Alg. 2.5 S189 PR 1.1 S5 Alg. 3.1 S206 PR 2.1 S16 Alg. 3.2 S215 PR 2.2 S21 Alg. 3.3 S220 PR

NAME DATE MTE LESSON 2

S577

© 2016 CUNY Collaborative Programs Supported by the NYS Education Department

15. List all the pairs of integers (positive or negative) whose product is 30: 16. Which pair has a sum of 11? ________ of -13? _________ of 31? _________

of -17? _________

Page 395: 2016 – 2017 STUDENT HANDBOOK Version 2...Lesson Page Number Lesson Page Number PR #1 S1 Alg. 2.5 S189 PR 1.1 S5 Alg. 3.1 S206 PR 2.1 S16 Alg. 3.2 S215 PR 2.2 S21 Alg. 3.3 S220 PR

NAME DATE MTE LESSON 2

S578

© 2016 CUNY Collaborative Programs Supported by the NYS Education Department

Page 396: 2016 – 2017 STUDENT HANDBOOK Version 2...Lesson Page Number Lesson Page Number PR #1 S1 Alg. 2.5 S189 PR 1.1 S5 Alg. 3.1 S206 PR 2.1 S16 Alg. 3.2 S215 PR 2.2 S21 Alg. 3.3 S220 PR

NAME DATE MTE LESSON 2

S579

© 2016 CUNY Collaborative Programs Supported by the NYS Education Department

Activity 2 Name: _________________________________________ 1.

Page 397: 2016 – 2017 STUDENT HANDBOOK Version 2...Lesson Page Number Lesson Page Number PR #1 S1 Alg. 2.5 S189 PR 1.1 S5 Alg. 3.1 S206 PR 2.1 S16 Alg. 3.2 S215 PR 2.2 S21 Alg. 3.3 S220 PR

NAME DATE MTE LESSON 2

S580

© 2016 CUNY Collaborative Programs Supported by the NYS Education Department

2.

3.

a. Draw how you would arrange 5 roads so there are 6 intersections in the village.

b. Sketch a village map in which 7 roads form 10 intersections.

Page 398: 2016 – 2017 STUDENT HANDBOOK Version 2...Lesson Page Number Lesson Page Number PR #1 S1 Alg. 2.5 S189 PR 1.1 S5 Alg. 3.1 S206 PR 2.1 S16 Alg. 3.2 S215 PR 2.2 S21 Alg. 3.3 S220 PR

NAME DATE MTE LESSON 2

S581

© 2016 CUNY Collaborative Programs Supported by the NYS Education Department

c. d.

e. Suppose the people said they wanted 12 intersections but didn’t care how many roads they had. How many different possible arrangements could you make? Draw the maps. What is the smallest number of roads that will still give them 12 intersections?

f. With exactly 10 roads, what is the smallest number of intersections there can be? What is the greatest number of intersections?

Page 399: 2016 – 2017 STUDENT HANDBOOK Version 2...Lesson Page Number Lesson Page Number PR #1 S1 Alg. 2.5 S189 PR 1.1 S5 Alg. 3.1 S206 PR 2.1 S16 Alg. 3.2 S215 PR 2.2 S21 Alg. 3.3 S220 PR

NAME DATE MTE LESSON 2

S582

© 2016 CUNY Collaborative Programs Supported by the NYS Education Department

Problem Set 1 Name: ____________________________________ Factor the expressions below. You may need to draw your own area model to complete these.

1. 2.

3. 4.

5. 6.

Page 400: 2016 – 2017 STUDENT HANDBOOK Version 2...Lesson Page Number Lesson Page Number PR #1 S1 Alg. 2.5 S189 PR 1.1 S5 Alg. 3.1 S206 PR 2.1 S16 Alg. 3.2 S215 PR 2.2 S21 Alg. 3.3 S220 PR

NAME DATE MTE LESSON 2

S583

© 2016 CUNY Collaborative Programs Supported by the NYS Education Department

7. 8.

9. 10.

11. 12.

Page 401: 2016 – 2017 STUDENT HANDBOOK Version 2...Lesson Page Number Lesson Page Number PR #1 S1 Alg. 2.5 S189 PR 1.1 S5 Alg. 3.1 S206 PR 2.1 S16 Alg. 3.2 S215 PR 2.2 S21 Alg. 3.3 S220 PR

NAME DATE MTE LESSON 2

S584

© 2016 CUNY Collaborative Programs Supported by the NYS Education Department

Mini Lesson 23

A. B.

C. D.

E. F.

3 Transition to Algebra

Page 402: 2016 – 2017 STUDENT HANDBOOK Version 2...Lesson Page Number Lesson Page Number PR #1 S1 Alg. 2.5 S189 PR 1.1 S5 Alg. 3.1 S206 PR 2.1 S16 Alg. 3.2 S215 PR 2.2 S21 Alg. 3.3 S220 PR

NAME DATE MTE LESSON 2

S585

© 2016 CUNY Collaborative Programs Supported by the NYS Education Department

Activity 3 Name: _________________________________________ When factoring, we need to find two numbers that have a particular sum (from adding them), and also have a particular product (from multiplying them). Sometimes the factors can be guessed easily but other times it is not obvious. It becomes useful to have a system to organize your search. Draw your own area model for the following, and then factor:

Example:

2.

Page 403: 2016 – 2017 STUDENT HANDBOOK Version 2...Lesson Page Number Lesson Page Number PR #1 S1 Alg. 2.5 S189 PR 1.1 S5 Alg. 3.1 S206 PR 2.1 S16 Alg. 3.2 S215 PR 2.2 S21 Alg. 3.3 S220 PR

NAME DATE MTE LESSON 2

S586

© 2016 CUNY Collaborative Programs Supported by the NYS Education Department

3.

4. Decide if the factors in each problem will involve addition, subtraction or both

a.

b.

c.

• Explain how you knew the answer for the problem above! 5. 6.

Page 404: 2016 – 2017 STUDENT HANDBOOK Version 2...Lesson Page Number Lesson Page Number PR #1 S1 Alg. 2.5 S189 PR 1.1 S5 Alg. 3.1 S206 PR 2.1 S16 Alg. 3.2 S215 PR 2.2 S21 Alg. 3.3 S220 PR

NAME DATE MTE LESSON 2

S587

© 2016 CUNY Collaborative Programs Supported by the NYS Education Department

Problem Set 2 Name: _________________________________________ 1.

2. 3.

4. 5.

Page 405: 2016 – 2017 STUDENT HANDBOOK Version 2...Lesson Page Number Lesson Page Number PR #1 S1 Alg. 2.5 S189 PR 1.1 S5 Alg. 3.1 S206 PR 2.1 S16 Alg. 3.2 S215 PR 2.2 S21 Alg. 3.3 S220 PR

NAME DATE MTE LESSON 2

S588

© 2016 CUNY Collaborative Programs Supported by the NYS Education Department

6.

7.

8.

9.

Page 406: 2016 – 2017 STUDENT HANDBOOK Version 2...Lesson Page Number Lesson Page Number PR #1 S1 Alg. 2.5 S189 PR 1.1 S5 Alg. 3.1 S206 PR 2.1 S16 Alg. 3.2 S215 PR 2.2 S21 Alg. 3.3 S220 PR

NAME DATE MTE LESSON 2

S589

© 2016 CUNY Collaborative Programs Supported by the NYS Education Department

10. 11.

12. 13.

Page 407: 2016 – 2017 STUDENT HANDBOOK Version 2...Lesson Page Number Lesson Page Number PR #1 S1 Alg. 2.5 S189 PR 1.1 S5 Alg. 3.1 S206 PR 2.1 S16 Alg. 3.2 S215 PR 2.2 S21 Alg. 3.3 S220 PR

NAME DATE MTE LESSON 2

S590

© 2016 CUNY Collaborative Programs Supported by the NYS Education Department

Activity 44 Factoring Game Directions You need:

• a partner • pens or pencils in two different colors • A Factoring Game game board (see above for sample) • Blank paper with a t-table to keep score.

1. Player A chooses a number or expression on the game board and circles it. This will be Partner

A’s score for that round. 2. Using a different color, Partner B circles all the proper factors of Player A’s number or

expression. The proper factors of a number are all the factors of that number except the number itself. Partner B lists the factors as her score.

3. Player B then circles a new number or expression. Player A circles all the remaining factors of that number or expression. Then, play continues in this manner.

4. The players take turns choosing numbers or expressions and circling factors. 5. The game is over when on consecutive plays both players have been unable to circle at least

one un-circled factor from their opponent’s choice. 6. The player with the larger sum of factors and products is the winner. Optional Rules: Scoring could be number of boxes circled Flip a coin in the beginning. The winner gets to choose a value for the ending x. At the end players calculate the “total” from all of their expressions summed together. Roll the dice and that will be the value of x To Do: Create more game boards with factoring variations. Build an App! Or a site. See https://illuminations.nctm.org/Activity.aspx?id=4134

4 Adapted from: https://illuminations.nctm.org/Activity.aspx?id=4134

Page 408: 2016 – 2017 STUDENT HANDBOOK Version 2...Lesson Page Number Lesson Page Number PR #1 S1 Alg. 2.5 S189 PR 1.1 S5 Alg. 3.1 S206 PR 2.1 S16 Alg. 3.2 S215 PR 2.2 S21 Alg. 3.3 S220 PR

NAME DATE MTE LESSON 2

S591

© 2016 CUNY Collaborative Programs Supported by the NYS Education Department

1 2 3 4 x - x

- 2x 2x 3x - 3x x - 1 x + 1

x - 2 x + 2 x - 3 x + 3 - 2x2 - x2 + 2x

2x2 + 2x - x2 - 2x x2 + x - 2 x2 + 3x + 2 x2 - 4 2x2 - 2x

2x2 - 4x - x2 + 3x x2 - 4x + 3 x2 - 2x - 3 x2 - 5x + 6 x2 - 3x + 2

x2 - 4x + 4 - x2 - 3x x2 + 2x - 3 x2 + 4x + 3 x2 + x - 6 x2 - x - 2

Page 409: 2016 – 2017 STUDENT HANDBOOK Version 2...Lesson Page Number Lesson Page Number PR #1 S1 Alg. 2.5 S189 PR 1.1 S5 Alg. 3.1 S206 PR 2.1 S16 Alg. 3.2 S215 PR 2.2 S21 Alg. 3.3 S220 PR

NAME DATE MTE LESSON 2

S592

© 2016 CUNY Collaborative Programs Supported by the NYS Education Department

Activity 5 Sasha felt like she could always find a way to do things on her graphing calculator. She considered the problem x2 – 13x – 48= (x + u)(x + v). She knew that she needed uv = - 48 and u + v = -13.

• Create a grid with a u-axis and a v-axis and then graph uv= -48 and u + v= -13. (Hint: Put u on the x-axis and v on the y-axis and create graphs.)

• How can you use the intersections of the graphs to factor the problem?

Page 410: 2016 – 2017 STUDENT HANDBOOK Version 2...Lesson Page Number Lesson Page Number PR #1 S1 Alg. 2.5 S189 PR 1.1 S5 Alg. 3.1 S206 PR 2.1 S16 Alg. 3.2 S215 PR 2.2 S21 Alg. 3.3 S220 PR

NAME DATE MTE LESSON 3

S593

© 2016 CUNY Collaborative Programs Supported by the NYS Education Department

More Tools for Equations Lesson 3 Warm-Up Activity 1. If the product of two numbers is negative, what can you say about the numbers? 2. If the product of two numbers is positive, what can you say about the numbers? 3. Find the product of the following:

0.000001 x 0.000001? 899,999,831.345 x 0

Page 411: 2016 – 2017 STUDENT HANDBOOK Version 2...Lesson Page Number Lesson Page Number PR #1 S1 Alg. 2.5 S189 PR 1.1 S5 Alg. 3.1 S206 PR 2.1 S16 Alg. 3.2 S215 PR 2.2 S21 Alg. 3.3 S220 PR

NAME DATE MTE LESSON 3

S594

© 2016 CUNY Collaborative Programs Supported by the NYS Education Department

Mini Lesson 1 1. If the product of two numbers is zero, what must be true about the numbers? 2. If the product of two numbers is not zero, what can you say about the numbers? 3. The sum of a and b is zero. What can you say about a and b? 4. If the difference of two numbers is zero, what can you say about the numbers? 5. If the product of three numbers is positive, what can you say about the numbers? 6. If the product of three numbers is negative, what can you say about the numbers?

Think about your answers to these questions as you solve the equations below: A. If 2y = 0, y = _____ B. If 2(v – 1) = 0, v = _____ C. If pq = 0, p = _____ or q = ______ D. If (t – 1)r = 0, t = _____ or r = ______ E. If x – 7 = 0, x = ______ F. If y(y – 8) = 0, y = ______ or ______

Page 412: 2016 – 2017 STUDENT HANDBOOK Version 2...Lesson Page Number Lesson Page Number PR #1 S1 Alg. 2.5 S189 PR 1.1 S5 Alg. 3.1 S206 PR 2.1 S16 Alg. 3.2 S215 PR 2.2 S21 Alg. 3.3 S220 PR

NAME DATE MTE LESSON 3

S595

© 2016 CUNY Collaborative Programs Supported by the NYS Education Department

G. If (x – 7)(x + 7) = 0, x = ______ or _____ H. If (7 + t)(6 – t) = 0, t = _____ or _____ I. If (z + 4)(z + 5) = 0, z = ____ or _____ J. (𝑥𝑥 − 5)(𝑥𝑥 − 5) = 0, x = ____ or _____

The concept you have been thinking through and using is called the “Zero Product Property.”

Activity 11 Name: _____________________________________ 1. You found a notebook with “Decoder” written on its cover. Inside, you found the following

message:

Replace each letter with a number, if:

a x b x c = 0, a x b = 12 and b – a = 1.”

What is the value of each letter? a = _____ b = _____ c = _____

2. What is the value of z in the following:

q * r * s * t * u * v * w * x * y * z = z z * z = z and z – z = z

1 Materials adapted from TTA…

Page 413: 2016 – 2017 STUDENT HANDBOOK Version 2...Lesson Page Number Lesson Page Number PR #1 S1 Alg. 2.5 S189 PR 1.1 S5 Alg. 3.1 S206 PR 2.1 S16 Alg. 3.2 S215 PR 2.2 S21 Alg. 3.3 S220 PR

NAME DATE MTE LESSON 3

S596

© 2016 CUNY Collaborative Programs Supported by the NYS Education Department

3. y2 + 8y + 14 = 0 4. y2 – 9y + 20 = 0

____ ____ ____ ____

____ ____ ____ ____

( ) ( ) = 0 ( ) ( ) = 0

y = _____ or _____ y = _____ or _____

Page 414: 2016 – 2017 STUDENT HANDBOOK Version 2...Lesson Page Number Lesson Page Number PR #1 S1 Alg. 2.5 S189 PR 1.1 S5 Alg. 3.1 S206 PR 2.1 S16 Alg. 3.2 S215 PR 2.2 S21 Alg. 3.3 S220 PR

NAME DATE MTE LESSON 3

S597

© 2016 CUNY Collaborative Programs Supported by the NYS Education Department

Solve the equations below. You may need to factor first. Use an area model, table, or anything else that will help you. 5. If x2 + 8x – 9 = 0 , x = _____ or _____ 6. If x2 + 5x – 36 = 0, x = _____ or _____ 7. If x2 + 17x + 30 = 0, x = _____ or _____ 8. If x2 + 7x + 6 = 0, x = _____ or _____ Use factoring to solve the equations below. To use the zero product property, you may need to rewrite the equation. Use an area model, table, or anything else that will help you. 9. x2 + 5x + 11 = 5 10. x2 + 9x + 9 = -9 11. Create an equation that has only one solution.

Page 415: 2016 – 2017 STUDENT HANDBOOK Version 2...Lesson Page Number Lesson Page Number PR #1 S1 Alg. 2.5 S189 PR 1.1 S5 Alg. 3.1 S206 PR 2.1 S16 Alg. 3.2 S215 PR 2.2 S21 Alg. 3.3 S220 PR

NAME DATE MTE LESSON 3

S598

© 2016 CUNY Collaborative Programs Supported by the NYS Education Department

12. Create an equation that has exactly two solutions. 13.

(From Transition to Algebra, 2014)

Page 416: 2016 – 2017 STUDENT HANDBOOK Version 2...Lesson Page Number Lesson Page Number PR #1 S1 Alg. 2.5 S189 PR 1.1 S5 Alg. 3.1 S206 PR 2.1 S16 Alg. 3.2 S215 PR 2.2 S21 Alg. 3.3 S220 PR

NAME DATE MTE LESSON 3

S599

© 2016 CUNY Collaborative Programs Supported by the NYS Education Department

Problem Set 1 Name: ____________________________________ Solve each of the following equations: 1. 3f = 0

2. 6(p + 2) = 0

3. c2 = 0

4. y(y + 3) = 0

5. (y + 3)y = 0

6. (s + 3)(s – 4) = 0

7. (x – 6)(x + 6) = 0

8. r2 – 4 = 0

Page 417: 2016 – 2017 STUDENT HANDBOOK Version 2...Lesson Page Number Lesson Page Number PR #1 S1 Alg. 2.5 S189 PR 1.1 S5 Alg. 3.1 S206 PR 2.1 S16 Alg. 3.2 S215 PR 2.2 S21 Alg. 3.3 S220 PR

NAME DATE MTE LESSON 3

S600

© 2016 CUNY Collaborative Programs Supported by the NYS Education Department

Factor the following expressions. Use whatever method helps you, including area models or tables. 9. x2 + 10x + 24

10. x2 + 9x – 36

11. x2 – 7x + 6 = 0 Use factoring to solve the equations below. To to rewrite the equation. Use an area model,

12. x2 + 5x – 6 = 0

use the zero product property, you may need table, or anything else that will help you.

13. (x + 5)(x – 7) = 0

14. (x + 9)(x – 2) = 0

15. x2 + 5x – 2 = 4

16. x2 - 5x – 2 = 4

Page 418: 2016 – 2017 STUDENT HANDBOOK Version 2...Lesson Page Number Lesson Page Number PR #1 S1 Alg. 2.5 S189 PR 1.1 S5 Alg. 3.1 S206 PR 2.1 S16 Alg. 3.2 S215 PR 2.2 S21 Alg. 3.3 S220 PR

NAME DATE MTE LESSON 3

S601

© 2016 CUNY Collaborative Programs Supported by the NYS Education Department

17. x2 + 6x + 8 = 0

18. x2 + 7x + 10 = 0

19. x2 - 10x – 11 = 0

20. x2 + 4x – 60 = 0

21. x2 + 17x – 60 = 0

22. x2 + 10x + 16 = 0

Challenge problems! Solve for x, y and z in the following:

A. (x – 4)(y + 2)(y – 7) = 0 B. (x + 2)(y + 3)(z – 2) = 0 (x – 4)(y – 7) = -9 (y + 3)(z – 2) = 0

(x + 2)(y + 3) = 0 (y + 3) = 4

x = _____ y = _____ x = _____ y = _____ z = _____

Page 419: 2016 – 2017 STUDENT HANDBOOK Version 2...Lesson Page Number Lesson Page Number PR #1 S1 Alg. 2.5 S189 PR 1.1 S5 Alg. 3.1 S206 PR 2.1 S16 Alg. 3.2 S215 PR 2.2 S21 Alg. 3.3 S220 PR

NAME DATE MTE LESSON 3

S602

© 2016 CUNY Collaborative Programs Supported by the NYS Education Department

25. (Source: Transition to Algebra, 2014)

Page 420: 2016 – 2017 STUDENT HANDBOOK Version 2...Lesson Page Number Lesson Page Number PR #1 S1 Alg. 2.5 S189 PR 1.1 S5 Alg. 3.1 S206 PR 2.1 S16 Alg. 3.2 S215 PR 2.2 S21 Alg. 3.3 S220 PR

NAME DATE MTE LESSON 3

S603

© 2016 CUNY Collaborative Programs Supported by the NYS Education Department

Activity 22 Consider the following problem without solving it:

(x + 3)(y – 2)(z – 2) = 0 (x + 3)(y – 2) = -7 (x + 3) = 7

Consider some of the strategies we used previously to find solutions for equations, such as replacing parts of the expression with a “Blob,” as follows, so that each expression is its own puzzle:

(Blob1)(Blob2)(Blob3) = 0 (Blob1)(Blob2) = -7 (Blob1) = 7

• IF (Blob1) = 7, then x = _____ when x + 3 = 7. • SO if (7)(Blob2) = -7, Blob2 = _____, and

if Blob2 = _____, then y – 2 = _____ and y = _____. • FINALLY, if (Blob1)(Blob2)Blob3) = 0, then (-7)(Blob3) = 0, and Blob3 = ______,

so that (z – 2) = 0 and z = _____.

Can you create your own problem when we give you the solution?

• Begin with the following: a = 2 b = 5 c = 0 • Create the clues that could lead to your solution. • Now create your own problem. Select values for a, b, and c, then create your clues. Put your

clues on a card and trade them with a partner in order to solve each other’s puzzles.

2 The following is adapted from Transition To Algebra, 2014

Page 421: 2016 – 2017 STUDENT HANDBOOK Version 2...Lesson Page Number Lesson Page Number PR #1 S1 Alg. 2.5 S189 PR 1.1 S5 Alg. 3.1 S206 PR 2.1 S16 Alg. 3.2 S215 PR 2.2 S21 Alg. 3.3 S220 PR

NAME DATE MTE LESSON 3

S604

© 2016 CUNY Collaborative Programs Supported by the NYS Education Department

4. Scott is claiming that his solution of x = 2 or x= 5 can have more than one possible equation. Would the following equations work?

𝑥𝑥2 − 7𝑥𝑥 + 10 = 0 2𝑥𝑥2 − 14𝑥𝑥 + 20 = 0 𝑥𝑥2 − 7𝑥𝑥 + 5 = −5

Activity 3: Skill Review

The price of a 3D movie ticket to see the new Star Wars movie is $16. A group of 4 friends, Mary, Josie, Tricia, & Theresa decide on their walk to school that they are going to see the movie this Saturday.

Price Per ticket in dollars Number of tickets purchased Total paid in dollars 𝟏𝟏𝟏𝟏 𝟒𝟒 𝟏𝟏𝟏𝟏 ⋅ 𝟒𝟒

But Shawn overhears them making their plans, and says he wants to go too and bring his best friend Ricardo. The girls agree to bring them along.

Price Per ticket in dollars Number of tickets purchased Total paid in dollars 16 4 16 ⋅ 4

𝟏𝟏𝟏𝟏 𝟏𝟏 𝟏𝟏𝟏𝟏 ⋅ 𝟏𝟏

Page 422: 2016 – 2017 STUDENT HANDBOOK Version 2...Lesson Page Number Lesson Page Number PR #1 S1 Alg. 2.5 S189 PR 1.1 S5 Alg. 3.1 S206 PR 2.1 S16 Alg. 3.2 S215 PR 2.2 S21 Alg. 3.3 S220 PR

NAME DATE MTE LESSON 3

S605

© 2016 CUNY Collaborative Programs Supported by the NYS Education Department

Later in the day at the lunch table, Marcus finds out about it and also says he was looking for some people to go see the movie with.

Price Per ticket in dollars Number of tickets purchased Total paid in dollars 16 4 16 ⋅ 4

16 6 16 ⋅ 6

𝟏𝟏𝟏𝟏 𝟕𝟕 𝟏𝟏𝟏𝟏 ⋅ 𝟕𝟕

Then Mary makes the suggestion that they should just invite the whole class. Before 6th period she announces to everyone their plans, and to raise their hand if they want to join. They count that 25 total people want to go see the movie this Saturday.

Price Per ticket in dollars Number of tickets purchased Total paid in dollars 16 4 16 ⋅ 4

16 6 16 ⋅ 6

16 7 16 ⋅ 7

𝟏𝟏𝟏𝟏 𝟐𝟐𝟐𝟐 𝟏𝟏𝟏𝟏 ⋅ 𝟐𝟐𝟐𝟐

𝟏𝟏𝟏𝟏 𝒏𝒏 𝟏𝟏𝟏𝟏 ⋅ 𝒏𝒏

The total amount for all the tickets depends on how many students are going to see the movie. The movie ticket price does not change, it is always $16. What changes is the number of possible students going to see the movie.

If we don’t know the total number of students who went, we don’t know how much money will be spent

But we can represent it as something! If there are 𝑛𝑛 students, then we know that the total amount can be represented as 16 ⋅ 𝑛𝑛.

Once we know how many students, then we can fill in for 𝑛𝑛.

The total amount paid if 10 students go is 16 ⋅ 10 dollars. So in this case we evaluate the expression for 𝑛𝑛 = 10.

Page 423: 2016 – 2017 STUDENT HANDBOOK Version 2...Lesson Page Number Lesson Page Number PR #1 S1 Alg. 2.5 S189 PR 1.1 S5 Alg. 3.1 S206 PR 2.1 S16 Alg. 3.2 S215 PR 2.2 S21 Alg. 3.3 S220 PR

NAME DATE MTE LESSON 3

S606

© 2016 CUNY Collaborative Programs Supported by the NYS Education Department

The total amount paid if 15 students go is 16 ⋅ 15 dollars. In this case we evaluate the expression for 𝑛𝑛 = 15.

Evaluating Expressions are helpful ways to sometimes work with problems. When the students go to see the movie, some may decide they want popcorn. Complete the table below.

Price Per popcorn in dollars Number of popcorns

purchased Total paid in dollars

6 1 6 ⋅__

6 2 6 ⋅__

6 3 6 ⋅__

6 4 6 ⋅__

6 5 6 ⋅__

6 6 6 ⋅ __

6 𝑝𝑝 6 ⋅ __

Page 424: 2016 – 2017 STUDENT HANDBOOK Version 2...Lesson Page Number Lesson Page Number PR #1 S1 Alg. 2.5 S189 PR 1.1 S5 Alg. 3.1 S206 PR 2.1 S16 Alg. 3.2 S215 PR 2.2 S21 Alg. 3.3 S220 PR

NAME DATE MTE LESSON 3

S607

© 2016 CUNY Collaborative Programs Supported by the NYS Education Department

Mini-Lesson

Example 1: Evaluate 3𝑥𝑥2 for 𝑥𝑥 = 5

Rewrite 1: 3( )2

Then you can fill in the empty space with the value that is given.

Rewrite 1: 3(5)2

Then you can simplify the expression using the Order of Operations.

3(5)2 = 3 ∙ 25 = 75

Example 2: Evaluate −4𝑏𝑏 − 2𝑐𝑐 for 𝑏𝑏 = 2.5 and 𝑐𝑐 = 10

Rewrite 2: −4( ) − 2( )

Then you can fill in the empty space with the value that is given.

Rewrite 2: −4(2.5) − 2(10)

Then you can simplify the expression using the Order of Operations.

−4(2.5) − 2(10) = −10 − 20 = −30

Complete each of the examples and simplify them to one number.

Example 1: Evaluate 3𝑥𝑥2 for 𝑥𝑥 = 5

Example 2: Evaluate −4𝑏𝑏 − 2𝑐𝑐 for 𝑏𝑏 = 2.5 and 𝑐𝑐 = 10

Page 425: 2016 – 2017 STUDENT HANDBOOK Version 2...Lesson Page Number Lesson Page Number PR #1 S1 Alg. 2.5 S189 PR 1.1 S5 Alg. 3.1 S206 PR 2.1 S16 Alg. 3.2 S215 PR 2.2 S21 Alg. 3.3 S220 PR

NAME DATE MTE LESSON 3

S608

© 2016 CUNY Collaborative Programs Supported by the NYS Education Department

Problem Set 2 Evaluate the following expressions.

1. 2𝑥𝑥 − 5𝑦𝑦 for 𝑥𝑥 = 9 and 𝑦𝑦 = −7

2. 6𝑥𝑥2 + 9𝑥𝑥 − 4 for 𝑥𝑥 = −2

3. 7𝑦𝑦 − 4𝑧𝑧 + 2𝑤𝑤 for 𝑦𝑦 = −1, 𝑧𝑧 = 2, and 𝑤𝑤 = 12

4. 3𝑎𝑎2 − 4𝑏𝑏2 for 𝑎𝑎 = 1 and 𝑏𝑏 = −1

Page 426: 2016 – 2017 STUDENT HANDBOOK Version 2...Lesson Page Number Lesson Page Number PR #1 S1 Alg. 2.5 S189 PR 1.1 S5 Alg. 3.1 S206 PR 2.1 S16 Alg. 3.2 S215 PR 2.2 S21 Alg. 3.3 S220 PR

NAME DATE MTE LESSON 3

S609

© 2016 CUNY Collaborative Programs Supported by the NYS Education Department

5. 5𝑡𝑡 − 14𝑠𝑠 + 𝑠𝑠𝑡𝑡 for 𝑠𝑠 = 9 and 𝑡𝑡 = −4

6. 4𝑥𝑥3 + 2𝑥𝑥2 − 7𝑥𝑥 + 12 for 𝑥𝑥 = −3

7. 2𝑥𝑥2 + 5𝑥𝑥𝑦𝑦 − 3𝑦𝑦2 for 𝑥𝑥 = 3 and 𝑦𝑦 = −2

8. The formula for the area of a triangle is 12𝑏𝑏ℎ where 𝑏𝑏 is the base and ℎ is the height. What

is the area of a triangle with the base of 5 and a height of 12?

Page 427: 2016 – 2017 STUDENT HANDBOOK Version 2...Lesson Page Number Lesson Page Number PR #1 S1 Alg. 2.5 S189 PR 1.1 S5 Alg. 3.1 S206 PR 2.1 S16 Alg. 3.2 S215 PR 2.2 S21 Alg. 3.3 S220 PR

NAME DATE MTE LESSON 3

S610

© 2016 CUNY Collaborative Programs Supported by the NYS Education Department

Activity 5: Skill Review There are times in algebra when using guess and check along with evaluating can help lead to an answer. With multiple choice problems, you can use the answers to give you your guesses too! Follow Deno and Eddie to see how they reached the first answer on their exams. Then answer the questions that show up after.

#1: Solve for 𝑡𝑡 if 5𝑡𝑡 − 3(𝑡𝑡 + 6) = −8 A. 1 B. −1 C. −5 D. 5

Deno is thinking: It’s the test and uh oh! I can’t remember how to do these! Okay, calm down, I can do this! Okay, what do I remember? I know I can guess. Let me try plugging answer A.

5(1) − 3(1 + 6) = −8 Now I know I can just follow PEMDAS. Let’s see, parentheses first.

5(1) − 3(7) = −8 5 − 21 = −8

Okay, 5 − 21 on my calculator gives me −16 not −8, so it’s not A. Let me give B a shot. What if 𝑡𝑡 is −1? Ugh! I hate negatives. Good thing I have a calculator for this exam.

5(−1) − 3(−1 + 6) = −8 Working through that he gets:

−20 = −8 That’s not right either. I’m glad there is no time limit for this exam. I can take my time. Let me try C.

5(−5) − 3(−5 + 6) = −8 Then he gets:

−28 = −8 Okay, that didn’t work either. This last choice better work!

5(5) − 3(5 + 6) = −8 Finally he gets:

−8 = −8 Hey that worked! The answer must be D. Okay, let me try the next one. Whew!

Eddie is thinking. Okay, yes! I know how to do these. First let me write the question down.

5𝑡𝑡 − 3(𝑡𝑡 + 6) = −8 Great, okay, now I think my first step is to distribute.

5𝑡𝑡 − 3𝑡𝑡 − 18 = −8 Oh man, I’m glad I studied distributing yesterday. Last week I made the mistake where I forgot to multiply the negative part! Next step, I gotta put the two 𝑡𝑡 things together. Five 𝑡𝑡s minus three 𝑡𝑡s is gonna be two 𝑡𝑡𝑠𝑠.

2𝑡𝑡 − 18 = −8 Now it looks normal! I know I just have to move the 18 over. So I’m gonna add 18 to both sides.

2𝑡𝑡 = 10 Then I just divide both by 2:

𝑡𝑡 = 5 Awesome! That’s there. I really want to do well on this test though, so before I pick it and move on, I’m gonna check my work. If I plug in 5, I should get −8.

5(5) − 3(5 + 6) = −8 5(5) − 3(11) = −8

25 − 33 = −8 −8 = −8

Perfect! Alright, let me move on to the next one.

Page 428: 2016 – 2017 STUDENT HANDBOOK Version 2...Lesson Page Number Lesson Page Number PR #1 S1 Alg. 2.5 S189 PR 1.1 S5 Alg. 3.1 S206 PR 2.1 S16 Alg. 3.2 S215 PR 2.2 S21 Alg. 3.3 S220 PR

NAME DATE MTE LESSON 3

S611

© 2016 CUNY Collaborative Programs Supported by the NYS Education Department

Answer the following questions about Deno and Eddie.

1. Who answered the two questions correctly?

2. What method did Deno use when he forgot how to solve the equations?

3. Does Eddie need to check his solution in a multiple choice test?

Problem Set 3 Solve the following multiple choice problems in whatever way you like. Use Deno or Eddie to help.

1. 4𝑥𝑥 − 5 − 13𝑥𝑥 = 13 A. 13

22

B. −2 C. 2 D. −8

9

Page 429: 2016 – 2017 STUDENT HANDBOOK Version 2...Lesson Page Number Lesson Page Number PR #1 S1 Alg. 2.5 S189 PR 1.1 S5 Alg. 3.1 S206 PR 2.1 S16 Alg. 3.2 S215 PR 2.2 S21 Alg. 3.3 S220 PR

NAME DATE MTE LESSON 3

S612

© 2016 CUNY Collaborative Programs Supported by the NYS Education Department

2. 13𝑦𝑦 + 2(𝑦𝑦 − 8) = −16 A. 15 B. −8

5

C. 85

D. 0

3. 4𝑥𝑥 − (3 + 2𝑥𝑥) = 3𝑥𝑥 + 5 A. −8 B. 8 C. 5 D. −4

4. 12𝑧𝑧 + 2(2 − 5𝑧𝑧) = −8 A. 6 B. 2 C. −2 D. −6

Page 430: 2016 – 2017 STUDENT HANDBOOK Version 2...Lesson Page Number Lesson Page Number PR #1 S1 Alg. 2.5 S189 PR 1.1 S5 Alg. 3.1 S206 PR 2.1 S16 Alg. 3.2 S215 PR 2.2 S21 Alg. 3.3 S220 PR

NAME DATE MTE LESSON 3

S613

© 2016 CUNY Collaborative Programs Supported by the NYS Education Department

5. −5𝑥𝑥 − 3(𝑥𝑥 + 4) = −2𝑥𝑥 A. 2 B. −2 C. 2

3

D. −32

6. −4 − 2(𝑥𝑥 + 3) = 7 A. −17

2

B. −4 C. 4 D. 17

2

7. 5 = −3𝑥𝑥 + 7(𝑥𝑥 + 3) A. 1

2

B. 11 C. −4 D. −11

Page 431: 2016 – 2017 STUDENT HANDBOOK Version 2...Lesson Page Number Lesson Page Number PR #1 S1 Alg. 2.5 S189 PR 1.1 S5 Alg. 3.1 S206 PR 2.1 S16 Alg. 3.2 S215 PR 2.2 S21 Alg. 3.3 S220 PR

NAME DATE MTE LESSON 3

S614

© 2016 CUNY Collaborative Programs Supported by the NYS Education Department

8. 4 + 2𝑥𝑥(2 − 5) = −4 A. 0 B. 12 C. −4

3

D. 43